Home

Store Systems Technical Referen - ps

image

Contents

1. Well organized i i i i Applicable to your tasks i o SE a e SSE te EESE A NE YPE PENES PE EE PECENE JV T a iy ey o ESE PA EAE YE BEEE YEE PETNE Pe E ENE o y ut e EIE y PES PET ENE PrE EENE a io EE P Please tell us how we can improve this book International Business Machines Corporation Information Development Department E02 P O Box 12195 Research Triangle Park North Carolina 27709 9990 Name ives E E ote Company or Organization Address Phone No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 COMMENTS 1
2. 4 12 V de 7 epee ih A e O A Oth BE eet A O ee CN oe th ee At oe ia ta PICTURE 51 Figure 55 4696 4697 Point of Sale Scanner Cable Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 22 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Point of Sale Printer Model 1 2 3 or 4 Connector and Cable 10 1 23 Point of Sale Printer Model 1 2 3 or 4 Connector and Cable PO 5 5 5 5 5 5 55 55 55 555555 555 5 55 5 55 5 555 555 55 5 555 5555 555 Connector IBM Connector IBM 4683 Line Printer i 4683 Line i Printer 4684 4693 Description Connector 4684 4693 Description Connector i 7 1 38 V de Pin 16 7 9 Serial I O A Pin 8 4 4 4 4 4 4 7 2 38 V de return Pin 15 7 10 Serial I O B Pin 7 ARG i 38 V de Pin 14 7 11 5 V de return Pin 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 7 4 38 V de return Pin 13 112 o Vo de Pin 5 LD i 38 V de Pin 12 FaLa 5 V de return Pin
3. Data rate 250 Kbits sec 500 Kbits sec 1 0 MBits sec PO 5 55 55 55 55 55 5 55 55 Access Time PO 55 55 55 555 555 555 Track to 3 msec maximum 3 msec maximum 3 msec maximum track 4 4 4 4 Head settle 15 msec maximum 15 msec maximum 15 msec maximum time 4 4 4 4 Single track 18 msec maximum 18 msec maximum 18 msec maximum i access i i i Rotation Speed 300 RPM 1 5 300 RPM 1 5 300 RPM 1 5 Spo AE OOS eS eS ee ee ee ee eee ee es Note For more detailed information refer to Engineering Specification P N 5897662 2 0 MB 3 5 inch Flexible Diskette Drive 1 Inch High or Engineering Specification P N 5897633 4 0 MB 3 5 inch Flexible Diskette Drive 1 Inch High A Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 4 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Type 2 Controller SCSI Subsystem 1 1 4 7 Type 2 Controller SCSI Subsystem Model 541 provides SCSI subsystem support for two internally mounted drives Terminators are included on the system board so external terminators are not required Model 541 does not provide an external SCSI port
4. PICTURE 46 Figure 50 Special Attachment Cable Wiring This cable allows the Dual Track MSR and the 1520 Model A02 to be attached to socket 5B at the same time Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 17 1 Store Systems Technical Reference System Unit Printer Parallel Port 4684 and 4693 10 1 18 System Unit Printer Parallel Port 4684 and 4693 do E ag Ny y o do E a y lr E Ca a a eet ly il Dc a E aan lg ii E A E E i a ii CE li eins ad CS e pp E Pin Number Signal Name Pin Number Signal Name 1 STROBE 14 AUTO FEED 2 Data Bit 0 L5 ERROR 3 Data Bit 1 16 Initialize Printer 4 4 4 4 4 Data Bit 2 17 Select Input 4 4 4 4 5 Data Bit 3 18 Ground 6 Data Bit 4 19 Ground 4 7 Data Bit 5 20 Ground 8 Data Bit 6 21 Ground 4 4
5. DELETE AN ATTACHED 4683 DEVICE ADD A 4683 DEVICE NOT ATTACHED CHANGE THE KEYPAD LAYOUT RETURN TO MENU C2 Hoy Y Y Table 40 MENU C4 DELETE AN ATTACHED 4684 DEVICE ADD A 4684 DEVICE NOT ATTACHED CHANGE THE PRIMARY DISPLAY CHANGE THE PRIMARY KEYBOARD a O EAS TOE TEE CHANGE THE KEYPAD LAYOUT ENTER THE FIXED DISK TYPE Pose oS See SS See Se SSeS RETURN TO MENU C2 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 4 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu C3 and Menu C4 5 4 4 Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu C3 and Menu C4 DELETE AN ATTACHED DEVICE Allows you to delete a device from the 4684 or 4683 configuration If you want to delete an entire 4683 terminal from the configuration you must select this menu item You must ACTIVATE NEW CONFIGURATION after you DELETE the device to make the change effective ADD A DEVICE NOT ATTACHED Allows you to add a new device to the 4684 or 4683 configuration that was not attached when the POS automatic configuration was r
6. Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 11 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Dump Error Codes Failure Status Byte 7 2 11 6 Dump Error Codes Failure Status Byte 7 Table 23 defines the meaning of failure status byte 7 of the device Channel adapter failure status bytes E Table 23 Dump Error Codes Poe SSeS asine i ses seen SSS se Sele est eet ee ees Byte 7 Error Code Definition 4 00 No errors detected puree a pora peer Se SOS lee a oN 01 Software invoked dump request error 4 4 l 02 Dump switch invoked dump request error Porron tale Posta et o o e 04 Hardware Dump Request Bit error 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 11 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device Channel Adapter System Status Byte 2 12 Device Channel Adapter System Status Byte Table 24 describes the bits of the device channel adapter system status byte SSB The values in the SSB represent the current state of the store loop adapter hardware A Table 24 Device Channel Adapter System Status Byte Pes ee ee ese se Seite ee ee o ee ee a Bit Definition 4 4 j I Bit Y Reserved Read Only i O Bit 6 1 Generated a device chann
7. Number of Heads 1 2 Number of Disks 1 1 Media Data Rate Mbits sec 16 2 24 0 Y 162 2810 PO 5 5 5 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 4 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference DASD Support Model 541 only 1 1 4 8 DASD Support Model 541 only Model 541 accommodates two internally mounted 2 fixed disk drives and one 25mm l in high diskette drive Model 541 also supports medialess configurations Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 4 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Power Subsystem Features 1 1 5 Power Subsystem Features Subtopics A yolks PRPRPRPRPR PRPRPRPRPR 5a aaa a a A 1 JO Us UN Programmable Power Control RAM Retention System States Battery Operation Battery Performance Power Supply Description Power Supply Output Voltages and Currents Auxiliary Power Source Requirements Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Programmable Power Control RAM Retention 1 1 5 1 Programmable Power Control RAM Retention Models 541 421 and 321 provide programmable power control capability Unlike the 4683 and 4684 terminals power state changes are now controlled by hardware logic This allows software to control machine operating state without the use of a mechanical switch For exampl
8. J10 1 Motor Black 4 4 4 f J10 2 Motor White 4 4 4 J10 3 Motor Red 4 4 4 J10 4 Motor Green 4 4 4 f J10 5 Polarization key No wire 4 4 4 J10 6 Motor Red White 4 4 J10 7 Motor Green White Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 10 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J11 Journal Ribbon Motor 10 3 11 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J11 Journal Ribbon Motor E des ean E e mag de CE a y el e lg dl ol js a ly cl ls ag o a ii A E rt e ii CE fy AT E y o E y A i lag i Ln ER Si ns CE pi MN y ey mi io pr an ay is pi ye ey lo nt ia ny ey cl re Printer Card i Motor Printer Card Motor i Connector Line Description Cable Wire Connector Line Description Cable Wire 4 4 4 4 4 4 J11 1 36 V de Green J11 5 Motor Brown 4 4 4 4 4 4 J11 2 36 V de Red J11 6 Motor Yellow 4 4
9. 4 X 4A Point of Sale Scanner 9A 9B 9C 4B 4 4 4 X 4B 1520 Hand Held Scanner Model 5B i A02 i HO Hand Held Bar Code Reader 9B X 50 Totals Retention Internal to the base unit HO X 54 Cash Drawer 3A HO X 54 Cash Drawer 3B HO Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 15 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device IDs by ID Number X 64 RS 232C Device Serial A All models except 2X2 Png a er lary a 4 X 66 RS 232C Device Serial A Model 2X2 only ee eer a ATA a 4 X 67 RS 232C Device Serial B Model 2X2 only ee tee e a 4 X 68 RS 232C Device Serial B All models except 2X2 NN p EI E A A A A A A AA O ee oe X 6E Scale 9A 9B 9C 4B Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 15 1 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Device IDs by Device Type HO 2 15 2 Device IDs by Device Type Device IDs by Device Type Table 30 E O O O O O O O O O ID Socket Number Device 4
10. J2 7 CR motor signal J2 19 CR low sensor 4 4 4 4 J2 8 i CR motor signal J2 20 Polarization key 4 4 4 4 J2 9 CR motor signal J2 21 Journal low sensor 4 4 4 4 J2 10 CR motor signal J2 22 Journal motion sensor 4 4 4 4 J2 11 Journal motor signal J2 23 DI top sensor 4 4 4 4 J2 12 Journal motor signal J2 24 DI front sensor pp Set OANA AE SADA GESTS RA OS ES AA IAN AA AP A A De A PA S Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J3 Document Insert Motor 10 4 3 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J3 Document Insert Motor A Printer Card Motor Connector Line Description Cable Wire J3 1 36 V de Black 4 4 4 f J3 2 36 V de Green 4 4 4 i J3 3 i Polarization key j No wire
11. System Board 400 170 0 i 380 40 0 j Fan i 0 i 0 i 5 0 i 0 i 0 i 0 AO Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 2 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Controls and Indicators for Model 202 1 2 4 Controls and Indicators for Model 202 The operator access area is shown in Figure 8 and is identical to Models 421 and 321 except that the reset function is not provided in Model 202 Refer to Figure 4 in topic 1 1 7 PICTURE 6 Figure 8 Model 202 Operator Access Area PICTURE 7 Figure 9 Model 202 Rear I O Connector Panel Area Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 2 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference PS 2 Option Adapter Support 1 3 PS 2 Option Adapter Support Architecturally Models 541 421 and 321 support up to five PS 2 option adapters with one of these slots occupied by the POS I O device channel feature Model 541 can accommodate four physical adapters and Models 421 and 321 can accommodate two adapters For configuration the slots are assigned as shown in Table 16 in topic 1 3 1 The actual number of option adapters that can be installed and configured is dependent on the specific system configuration In the 128K adapter memory map space available 8K default optionally 16K is used by the POS 1 0 device channel feature Note None of the 4693 models support 4683 feature cards Devices connected through these adap
12. 4 4 21 1 Reserved Pin 16 21 9 OCR EOT Pin 8 4 4 4 4 4 4 2152 OCR data 1 Pin 1 21 10 OCR data Pin 9 ready i 2123 OCR data 2 Pin 2 21 11 Reserved Pin 18 4 4 4 4 4 4 21 4 OCR data 3 Pin 3 21 12 5 V de Pin 22 i i i i return 4 4 4 21 5 OCR data 4 Pin 4 21 13 OCR user Pin 10 i i i i ready 4 4 21 6 OCR data 5 Pin 5 21 14 Reserved Pin 23 4 4 4 4 4 4 21 1 OCR data 6 Pin 6 Z21L 15 Reserved Pin 24 4 4 4 4 4 4 21 8 OCR edit Pin 7 21 16 Reserved Pin 25 check i Sg eg O E aT ag tree PICTURE 35 Figure 39 OCR Wand Cable Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 6 1 Connector 4683 4684 4693 5A 1 4 5A 2 5A 3 4 5A 4 Ho
13. 3 3 H coil Pin 8 3 4 36 V de Pin 9 PICTURE 45 Figure 49 Special Attachment Cable Wiring Remote Alarm and Non IBM Cash Drawer Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 16 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Special Attachment Y Cable 1520 Model A02 and Dual Track MSR 10 1 17 Special Attachment Y Cable 1520 Model A02 and Dual Track MSR A i Connector i Special Attachment 4683 4684 4693 Line Description Connector i A 1 Reserved B1 1 and B2 1 4 4 4 i A 2 15 Veude B1 2 and B2 2 4 4 4 l A 3 5 V de return B1 3 and B2 3 4 4 4 l A 4 3 Serial I O A j B1 4 and B2 4 4 4 4 A 5 Serial I O B B1 5 and B2 5 4 4 4 l A 6 5 V de B1 6 and B2 6 4 4 4 i j A 7 5 V de return B1 7 and B2 7 4 4 4 A 8 Reserved B1 8 and B2 8 4
14. 38SDL 38 000 Pog Bo 1 300 0 000 600 4 4 5LM 54000 4 5 4 1 200 0 000 50 4 5PPC 5 000 5 4 0 070 0 000 50 5CONT 5 000 4 0 230 0 000 50 BATTERY 24230 4 4 9 V de 7 5 V de 0 240 On OSS 100 pia cha SERENE Sok De Se Nie tha DA gee A hte SR ee oe teas Pe RA ee ee e Nel eae Dh oy SEO oe 0 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 5 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Auxiliary Power Source Requirements 1 1 5 7 Auxiliary Power Source Requirements AC input power may be provided by a back up power source This may be accomplished using an auxiliary power source such as a motor generator or uninterruptible power source UPS Refer to Table 10 for requirements for a backup power source te eee oe A E eee eer eee A A eee ees Table 10 Electrical Power Requirements for Standby Power Supply fi eh A A a A Yo EE E A al E E E ey iS E E E Features of a Standby Power Supply Requirements of the 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Hwy Y A Y rms Voltage Output 100 127 V AC 5 V AC 200 240 V AC
15. J5 1 5 V de return Black 4 4 4 J5 2 5 V de Blue 4 4 4 J5 3 i Polarization key j No wire 4 4 4 J5 4 Sensor Green 4 4 4 J5 5 Sensor White 4 4 4 J5 6 5 V de return Black 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J6 Capacitor 10 3 6 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J6 Capacitor Printer Card i Connector H Line Description i 4 J6 1 36 V de 4 4 J6 2 36 V de return 4 4 j i J6 3 Polarization key 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J7 I O Interface Cable 10 3 7 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J7 1 0 Interface Cable Printer Card Printer Card Connector Line Description Connector Line Description 4 4 4 4 J7 1 5 V de J7 9 i 36 V de return Ho 4 4
16. 4 J8 5 Sensor White 4 Ho 4 J8 6 5 V de return Black A Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J9 Customer Receipt Document Insert Motor 10 3 9 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J9 Customer Receipt Document Insert Motor 4 Printer Card Motor Connector Line Description Cable Wire J9 1 36 V de Green f J9 2 36 V de Red J9 3 Motor Orange 4 4 4 J9 4 Polarization key No wire 4 4 4 f J9 5 Motor Brown 4 4 4 J9 6 Motor Yellow 4 4 4 l J9 7 Motor Black 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 9 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J10 Transport Motor 10 3 10 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J10 Transport Motor Y Printer Card Motor Connector Line Description Cable Wire
17. 4 4 P14 F 12 V de P14 14 Jumper G 4 4 4 4 P14 7 12 V de return P14 R Jumper H 4 4 4 4 P14 H 12 V de return P14 15 Jumper E 4 4 4 4 P14 8 Reserved P14 S Jumper F Boose Soleus see eee ome ee Se Stee Bee a ENE E OE a E at Nese i Nee ete Ne PICTURE 69 Figure 73 Power Supply Connector P14 Wiring Connector pins are numbered the same on Pll P12 P13 and P14 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 2 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Wiring Diagrams for the Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connectors 10 3 Wiring Diagrams for the Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connectors Use the following figure to locate the connectors on the printer card PICTURE 70 Figure 74 Printer Card Connector Wiring The polarization key is counted as a pin Subtopics 10 3 1 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J1 Print Head 10 3 2 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J2 Operator Keypad 10 3 3 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J3 Cover Interlock Sensor 10 3 4 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J4 Document Insert Paper Sensor 10 3 5 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J5 Home Sensor 10 3 6 Model 1
18. 4 4 9 Data Bit 7 22 Ground 4 4 4 4 10 Acknowledge 23 Ground 4 4 4 4 j LL BUSY j 24 Ground 4 4 4 4 j 12 P End out of paper 25 Ground 4 4 4 4 13 Select i 4 UE EE hee E ee ee ee ae eee ae ea e eee PICTURE 47 Figure 51 System Unit Printer Parallel Port 4684 and 4693 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 18 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Serial I O Asynchronous Port 4693 10 1 19 Serial I O Asynchronous Port 4693 Seg a ee mS amg ats pl ml My ey lg la ep Mya ada ce Sy any gy ly cea My ee yn Sa ly cP ac yn i ln Pa cA yy E a Ray eng way tht eran ny aay Table 54 4693 Serial Port Pinout Assignments AN E each Bana ert yj ee el A A eg EI Sy egy IN ERA EN RAS ky Sey eh EN ERRE an Sendo eat enh Rag Sy ech CIA Pin Signal Name Signal Direction 4 4 4 I Data carrier detect In to DTE 4 4 2 Receive data In 4 4 3 Transmit data
19. 4 Token Ring 4 16 i E001 4 Ethernet EFD4 4 4 PC Network Baseband EFEF 4 4 Dual Async EEFF j f 300 1200 2400 Modem EFE1 Y 4 4684 V 32 Modem DDCD f STUMPY Loop Not Available STUMPY NVRAM SIOC EFCB 4 4 PCMCIA Adapter EFDA 4 SVGA Adapter 90EE pastononasttorissssosstoo anectosits est Note In the Model 421 and 321 a maximum of one LAN adapter Token Ring Baseband Ethernet Loop or Wireless is supported for auto configuration Y Note Memory expansion cards installed in adapter slots are not supported Subtopics 1 3 1 Feature Slot Assignment Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Feature Slot Assignment 3 1 Feature Slot Assignment Table 16 PS 2 Option Adapter Assignments Model 421 and Model Slot Model 541 Location 321 Location Remarks 4 4 1 lower left lower left reserved for first i i LAN card PO A A 2 lower right lower right auxiliary video i i connec
20. 25 14 Receive Data current loop Hwy Y 25 15 Receive Return current loop 4 4 25 16 Transmit Return current loop cp RS AAA II AA Bn ee A IA AA ee he PICTURE 41 Figure 45 RS 232C or Current Loop Device Cable Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 10 1 11 1 1993 Store Systems Technical Reference RS 232C Asynchronous Communications Port 10 1 12 RS 232C Asynchronous Communications Port do E ay Sa lye ls E a A GS e ii E ay emi gy E ee e E ai mig al i ly ee an E E a ii Pi wy a ea e id rc AEE Sei ily ea Sa y A id rc Say aa Pin Number Signal Name Pin Number Signal Name 4 4 4 4 1 Not connected 14 Not connected 4 4 4 4 2 Transmit data 15 Not connected 4 4 4 4 3 Receive data 16 Not connected 4 4 4 4 Request to send 17 Not connected 4 Ho 4 4 5 Clear to send i 18 Not connected 4 4 6 Data set ready 19 Not connected 4 Ho 4 4 7
21. Pin 3 81 16 i Pin 4 81 17 Pin 5 81 18 Pin 6 81 19 4 4 Pin 7 81 20 Pin 8 81 21 Pin 9 81 22 Pin 10 81 23 4 4 Pin 11 81 24 4 4 Pin 12 81 25 4 4 Pin 13 a Display Cable Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 25 1 IBM Video Display Connector 10 1 26 4683 Video Display Except 5 Inch Connector and Cable 1 i Connector i 4683 only anijen ia A a yay 81 1 o a id veep ayy wer ey wes pd di a i 81 2 lg ep at Nolan a A 81 3 Fah esi ak asic E ek Deh ay i 81 4 ee A AA i 81 5 E a god MES Gu e A id dl i 81 6 A fone neg ey A AA 81 7 ee omaha eae eh EA 2 i 81 8 it Ras ga Hn tn igi Sy ly i 81 9 E ie A Ray a ji pd A a 81 10 O a eng Sng ley i ay 81 11 A A A E ERA 81 12 O PA tin Sy 81 13 PICTURE 55 Figure 59 Store Systems Technical Reference 4683 Video Display Except 5 Inch Connector and Cable IBM Video Display Connector Other Video Display Cable Wiring Connector 4683 only Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 26 1 IBM Video Display Connector Store Systems Technical
22. 4 Av F7 Buffer address 0010 failed 4 4 4 18 08 Buffer address 0008 failed 4 4 4 f pS FY Buffer address 0004 failed 4 4 4 f IA 0A Buffer address 0002 failed 4 4 1 TB FB Buffer address 0001 failed 4 4 4 Ac OC Buffer address 0000 failed 4 4 4 1D OE Buffer address 0400 failed 4 4 4 E FD Buffer address 0200 failed 4 4 4 1F OC Buffer address 0100 failed 4 4 4 20 FB Buffer address 0080 failed 4 4 4 21 OA Buffer address 0040 failed 4 4 4 j 22 F9 Buffer address 0020 failed 4 4 4 23 08 Buffer address 0010 failed 4 4 4
23. 4 4 P13 E Polarization key P13 13 Master POR 4 4 4 4 PLoS I2 V de P 13 P Master POR P13 F 12 V de P13 14 Jumper C 4 4 4 4 P13 7 12 V de return P13 R Jumper D 4 4 4 4 P13 H 12 V de return PAS L5 Jumper A 4 4 4 4 P13 8 Reserved P13 S Jumper B Sates E eS Soe O Se ees See ape Be sett Ae ee A es Ne PICTURE 68 Figure 72 Power Supply Connector P13 Wiring Connector pins are numbered the same on Pll P12 P13 and P14 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 2 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4683 Power Supply Connector P14 10 2 4 4683 Power Supply Connector P14 dos o a e di cp yay are mi io pe fay aly en ag o a E a AN GE q mg alo E ti E ya ay ey ny Se ly JS Sl A Y A a a Ci hy ea ag o pg is MS ee le lo mie ay cy ls Ci i MA cz ig Power Supply Power Supply Connector Line Description Connector Line Description 4 4
24. 3B 4 36 V de Pin 1 PICTURE 32 Figure 36 Cash Drawer Cable Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Coin Dispenser Connector and Cable 10 1 3 Coin Dispenser Connector and Cable Sa a E a SE ig io E lg Myer ly ii A lg ay ti io i my ay yp iz las vn yy A Connector Line 4683 only Description 29 1 Coin data 29 2 Coin clock 29 3 Coin dispenser enable 29 4 5 V de return i Not used i Not used i i Not used i i Not used atA A A A e A ae PICTURE 33 Figure 37 Coin Dispenser Cable Wiring Coin Dispenser Connector Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Display A Alphanumeric Operator or Shopper Connector and Cable 10 1 4 Display A Alphanumeric Operator or Shopper Connector and Cable A Connector Line Display A 4683 4684 4693 Description Connector 4 4 4 4A 1 i 12 V de return Pin 4 4
25. 4 J6 3 5 V de Blue 4 4 4 J6 4 Polarization key No wire 4 4 4 J6 5 Center home sensor Black 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J7 Cover Interlock Sensor 10 4 7 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J7 Cover Interlock Sensor A Printer Card Sensor Connector Line Description Cable Wire J7 1 5 V de return Black 4 4 4 f J7 2 5 V de Blue J7 3 Sensor to card Green J7 4 Polarization key No wire 4 4 4 f J7 5 Sensor from card White 4 4 4 J7 6 5 V de return Brown l O Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J8 Top Buttons 10 4 8 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J8 Top Buttons Y J8 Printer i Card J8 Line Description Connector i J8 1 Customer
26. P11 F i Battery disable i P11 14 12 V de return 4 4 4 4 l P11 7 5 V de Aux P11 R 12 V de return 4 4 4 4 P11 H 5 V de Aux PL1 15 12 V de 4 4 4 4 P11 8 5 V de Aux return P11 S 12 V de Rete ee ee eae ae eee eee Ae ee eee eee See ee ert eg E N te ee E ENEE PICTURE 66 Figure 70 Power Supply Connector P11 Wiring Connector pins are numbered the same on Pll P12 P13 and P14 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 2 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4683 Power Supply Connector P12 10 2 2 4683 Power Supply Connector P12 per B a e hk ee pee eh ee m ne S per pins are numbered Ja doy o o dl ee yay emg do pe fay ti o a A GE mig lo a E ly aye ay el ny lo JA IN E Sg a Ci i yay ag o pg is RS ar za le tf ay ei ef cy ll Ci la MA cr ze li Power Supply Power Supply Connector Line Description Connector 4 4 P12 1 36 V de solenoid return P12 J 4 4 4 P12 A 36 V de solenoid return P12 9 4 4 4 PAZ 2 i 36 V dc solenoid i P12 K
27. f IA 0A Buffer address 0002 failed 4 4 1 TB FB Buffer address 0001 failed 4 4 4 Ac OC Buffer address 0000 failed 4 4 4 1D OE Buffer address 0400 failed 4 4 4 E FD Buffer address 0200 failed 4 4 4 1F OC Buffer address 0100 failed 4 4 4 20 FB Buffer address 0080 failed 4 4 4 21 OA Buffer address 0040 failed 4 4 4 j 22 F9 Buffer address 0020 failed 4 4 4 23 08 Buffer address 0010 failed 4 4 4 1 24 DB Buffer address 0008 failed Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure Status Bytes 4 and 5 4 4 4 j 25 06 Buffer address 0004 failed
28. 4 P14 1 5 V de P14 J Reserved 4 4 4 P14 A 5 V de P14 9 Reserved 4 4 4 4 P14 2 5 V de return P14 K Reserved 4 4 4 4 P14 B 5 V de return P14 10 Reserved 4 4 4 4 P14 3 12 V de return i P14 L Reserved 4 4 4 4 P14 C 12 V de return P14 11 Address sense 4 4 4 4 j P14 4 12 V de P14 M Reserved 4 4 4 4 j P14 D 12 V de P14 12 Reserved 4 4 4 4 P14 5 Polarization key P14 N Reserved 4 4 4 4 P14 E Polarization key P14 13 Master POR 4 4 4 4 P14 6 I2 V de P14 P Master POR 4
29. 4 J13 6 Polarization key No wire A Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 13 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Wiring Diagrams for the Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connectors 10 4 Wiring Diagrams for the Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connectors Subtopics 10 4 1 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J1 1 0 Interface Cable 10 4 2 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J2 Signals to Extension Card 10 4 3 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J3 Document Insert Motor 10 4 4 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J4 Print Head Transport Motor 10 4 5 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J5 Print Head 10 4 6 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J6 Print Head Home Sensor 10 4 7 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J7 Cover Interlock Sensor 10 4 8 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J8 Top Buttons 10 4 9 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J9 Front Buttons 10 4 10 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J10 Capacitor 10 4 11 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J101 Paper Cutter Motor 10 4 12 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J102 CR Motor 10 4 13 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J103 Signals to Printer Card 10 4 14 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J106 JNL Motion Sensor 10 4 15 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J107 JNL Motor 10 4 16 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J108 DI Front Sensor 10 4 17 Model 3 or 4 Card Con
30. l 09 FE Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 i OA FD Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 j OB FB Data test pattern failed l OC E7 Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 l OD EF Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 OE DF Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 OF BE Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 10 LETE Data test pattern failed 4 4 PE i Lo PI Buffer address 0400 failed 4 4 4 l i 12 1 502 Buffer address 0200 failed 4 4 4 13 F3 Buffer address 0100 failed 4 4 4 14 04 Buffer address 0080 failed 4 lo LS 1 15 Buffer address 0040 failed Ho 4 4 16 06 Buffer address 0020 failed 4 4
31. 4 4 1 5 ROS scan error 0 Good 1 Bad 4 4 4 4 Device channel adapter 0 Good microprocessor status 1 Bad 4 4 4 1 39 Shared buffer latch test error 0 Good code 1 Bad 4 4 p2 Shared Buffer Test Error Code 0 Good j l l Bad 4 4 4 a CMOS test error code 0 Good 1 Bad 4 4 4 1 0 Reset switch test error code 0 Good j j l Bad Ce oe E O A A RA A EA A Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 11 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Microprocessor Status Codes Failure Status Byte 1 2 11 2 Microprocessor Status Codes Failure Status Byte 1 Table 19 defines the meaning of failure status byte 1 of the device channel adapter 4 Table 19 Device Channel Adapter Microprocessor Status Codes a ee i Byte 1 Status Code Definition A l 00 No errors occurred 4 4 i 10 through 16 Device chann
32. 4 i PCSS Statements Commands JCL Options Parameters Keys Process Names Environments Special Characters Diagnose Command Responses Physical Unit Logical i Unit Poe eee A A o ao PIDS Component Ponsa Soe portant o o to a n PUBS Pub 1D Chapter Page Section Appendix TNL Pornos A ee ee ee a Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 7 1 Additional Keywords INCORROUT Store Systems Technical Reference Problem Data Collection Form Return Code Status Code Condition Feedback Module Macro Csect Exec Access Method Subroutine 1 i Panel Diagnostic information generated by a system that indicates potential system problems The information in a message that indicates the System Log section the Source of the problem and the Event that occurred A program that decodes instructions and produces a machine language program which can be executed later onfiguration is the process of creating Operating ystem records that are used later by the system to nsure that software support exits for the hardware ona The resident fixed diskette drive in the store ontroller Q he contents of the memory in the point of sale erminal or store controller tH Describes a problem where an attached device does not accept input or the point of sale terminal or store controller cannot continue to oper
33. 4 X 27 Display Shopper 4B 4 4 X 2A Character Graphics Display 4A 4 4 4 X 2B Character Graphics Display 4B 9A 9B 4 4 X 30 Printer Model 1 or 2 7 4 4 4 X 34 Printer Model 3 or 4 Vo 4 4 4 X 36 Printer Model 2A Fiscal 7 Y X 38 Printer Model 3A Fiscal LF 4 4 4 X 40 MSR Single Track 6 on the keyboard attached to Socket 5A i HO X 41 MSR Single Track 6 on the keyboard attached to i i Socket 5B Y Hwy Y X 46 MSR Dual Track 5A ANPOS or Combined i i Keyboard Display Low Profile 4 4 X 47 MSR Dual Track 5B 4 4 4 X 48 MSR 3 Track 5A 4 4 4 X 49 MSR 3 Track 5B 4
34. 4 J7 2 5 V de return J7 10 36 V de 4 4 4 4 J7 3 5 V de J7 11 36 V de return 4 4 4 4 J7 4 5 V de return wT a 3 6 M de 4 4 4 4 Ib 5 de 7 13 i 36 V de return 4 4 4 4 J7 6 5 V de return J7 14 36 V de 4 4 4 4 J7 7 Serial I O B JLS 36 V de return 4 4 4 4 J7 8 Serial I O A J7 16 36 V de Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J8 Journal Emitter Sensor 10 3 8 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J8 Journal Emitter Sensor Printer Card Sensor Connector Line Description Cable Wire J8 1 5 V de return Black 4 4 4 J8 2 5 V de Blue 4 4 4 J8 3 Sensor Green 4 4 4 J8 4 Polarization key No wire 4 4
35. l 26 FS Buffer address 0002 failed 4 4 j 27 04 Buffer address 0001 failed 28 F3 Buffer address 0000 failed 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 4 2 Store Systems Technical Reference CMOS Error Codes Failure Status Byte 6 5 8 5 CMOS Error Codes Failure Status Byte 6 The following table defines the meaning of failure status byte 6 of the device channel adapter Y Table 47 CMOS Error Codes porcicteiocrosiussssreriiseiocucosproocaueso Byte 6 Error Code Definition f 00 No errors detected pur bse coso poto ee Pee te toa 01 Battery failure Hood fi ce e Be ee 02 Storage failure paia pariet ease eee es 04 Addressing failure Porton Po lao tos ee 10 Restore Save Area failure poo eee Peek Sb oe Meh Ste a eS 20 Save Save Area failure 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Dump Error Codes Failure Status Byte 7 5 8 6 Dump Error Codes Failure Status Byte 7 The following table defines the meaning of failure status byte 7 of the device channel adapter A Table 48 Dump Error Codes peente nise i oes seen sso Se se see
36. 4 0216H 0238H POS data for card ID nnnn Ho ooo f 0239H 025BH POS data for card ID nnnn 4 O25CH 027EH POS data for card ID nnnn 4 027FH 02A1H POS data for card ID nnnn 02A2H 02C4H POS data for card ID nnnn HO 02C5H 02E7H POS data for card ID nnnn 02E8H 030AH POS data for card ID nnnn HO 030BH 032DH POS data for card ID nnnn 032EH 0330H Reserved 0331H 0332H Configuration CRC PO Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference BIOS Data Areas 3 4 BIOS Data Areas The system has two data segments that are called BIOS data areas the original IBM PC BIOS data area and the PS 2 extended BIOS data area EBDA POST allocates both of these data segments specifically as work areas for system BIOS and adapter BIOS The original BIOS data area is 256 bytes of memory starting at address X 0400 and extending through address X 04FF The extended BIOS data area was developed to expand the BIOS data area The extended BIOS data area is relocatable and expandable Acces
37. play play play Operator or Combined board Display play Operator or Combined board Display Alphanumeric Alphanumeric Single Track Single Track ical Character Reader OCR ical Character Reader OCR Dual Track or Combined Keyboard Display w Profile netic Wand 4A 5A if Combined Keyboard Display 4B 5B if Combined Keyboard Display 81 on the Feature Adapter in location 2A 81 on the Feature Adapter in location 2B 7 7 7 7 6 on the keyboard attached to Socket 5A 6 on the keyboard attached to Socket 5B 21 on the Feature Adapter in location 2A 21 on the Feature Adapter in location 2A 21 on the Feature Adapter in location 2B 21 on the Feature Adapter in location 2B 5A 5B 17 5B 9B 26 on the Feature Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 8 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device IDs by ID Number i Adapter in location 2A AS Asie A A a a E a X 4D Magnetic Wand 26 on the Feature i Adapter in location 2B A A a iia X 50 Totals Retention Internal to the base unit SERE A A eee ae A O A eee ees X 54 Cash Drawer 3A a RE A ee ee ee ay a a X 54 Cash Drawer 3B ees Para ee Sa ee eee ee Ros he Nee oe Se Se X 60 Coin Dispenser 29 on the Feature i Adapter in location 2A A rN a ii X 61 Coin Dispenser 29 on the Feature i Adapter in location 2B A HH X 64 RS232 Device 25 on the Feature i Adapter in location 2A A
38. 4 4 4 4 2 Blue is Orange RX 4 4 4 4 T2 i Blue White 2 Black l RX 4 i Drain i 1 Shield i Ground A y PICTURE 61 Figure 65 PS 2 Cable to Data Connector Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 32 1 Store Systems Technical Reference PS 2 Baseband to 4684 Baseband Connector 10 1 33 PS 2 Baseband to 4684 Baseband Connector ag da ae yi mg ada ea Sey sey lg mpc ye a i mg alas ca ti My A ey ny eens Si le rv cay ogy Seg alee ce cy ny A E A A j Wire i Connector RJ11 4684 Connector Number Wire Color Position Position Signal Name 4 4 4 4 4 1 Orange 4 6 i TX 4 4 4 4 4 T1 Orange White 3 1 TX 4 4 4 4 4 2 Blue 5 9 RX T2 Blue White 2 lo RX 4 i Drain i 1 Shield i Ground ps NE ee e E ee ose PICTURE 62 Figure 66 PS 2 Baseband to 4684 Baseband Connector Copyright
39. 4 4 4A 2 i Serial I O B Pin 3 Ho Ho 4 f 42 3 Serial I O A Pin 2 4 4 4 f 4A 4 12 Y de Pin 1 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Display B Alphanumeric Operator or Shopper Connector and Cable 10 1 5 Display B Alphanumeric Operator or Shopper Connector and Cable A Connector Line Display B 4683 4684 4693 Description Connector 4 4 4 4B 1 i 12 V de return Pin 4 4 4 4 4B 2 i Serial I O A Pin 3 Ho 4 f 4B 3 Serial I O B Pin 2 4 4 4 f 4B 4 12 Y de Pin 1 4 PICTURE 34 Figure 38 Display Cable Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Optical Character Reader OCR Connector and Cable 10 1 6 Optical Character Reader OCR Connector and Cable A A A A A A A A A eh Connector Connector 4683 l Line OCR Wand 4683 Line OCR Wand 1 only Description Connector only Description Connector 4 4 4
40. Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 2 5 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Message General Format 8 2 6 Message General Format This is the general format for messages displayed at the store controller mm dd hh mm cc ttt s annn XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX BX SXXX EXXX XXXX XXXX Description mm dd hh mm cc ttt annn XXX SXXX Month and Day the Message Was Logged Time of Day that the Message Was Logged The Store Controller Identifier ID Capital alphabetic in the range of CC to ZZ assigned by the controller load definition screen at configuration Terminal Number In decimal from 000 to 999 if applicable Message Severity Indicator In decimal from 1 to 5 Severity Impact Type of Error or Event pi System Affects multiple point of sale terminals or the entire system 2 Unit fects a single physical unit ch as a point of sale terminal an input output device on P BER 3 Function fects the normal operation a programming function Fh Fh o 4 Statistical Indicates a statistical event error has been detected or a sub part of a programming function was affected 5 Events Indicates an expected occurrence such as an initial program load IPL The Message Identifier Annn IBM 4680 General Sales Application Bnnn IBM 4680 Supermarket Application Cnnn IBM 4680 Chain Drug Sales Application Hnnn IBM 4680 Store Management Application Tnnnn Hardware Tests Unnn IPL Wn
41. Disconnect the active store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle Display the system message at the active store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No i 1054 i 1 i The problem is in the active store controller the store loop adapter or the store loop adapter cable Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 2 6 Rec Are t betwe Yes One seg rec Aft Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0100 W001 Message At the active store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages onnect the active store controller to the store loop here any powered OFF 4683 xxls connected to the store loop segment en the 4683 displaying message W001 and the active store controller No 1056 The problem is in the store loop wiring between the active store controller and the 4683 xxl or in the store loop receptacle for the store controller or 4683 xxl Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring at a time disconnect each powered OFF 4683 xxl from the store loop ment by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop eptacle er each 4683 is disconnected return to the active store controller and display the system m
42. Pol srta in tai eii eds oi i CHECKSUM i ESA cs i i byte sum ARAS CRC PESOS i ADDRESS DESCRIPTION ao S 4 A 0000 0009 Reserved LX o O00A 000D Power control alarm save area Lex O00E 000F i POST Resume status and PPC hardware status x 0010 007F Master terminal SIO configuration data Ix 0080 00EF Satellite terminal SIO configuration data x OOFO O1CF Reserved for SIO configuration data growth L 01D0 01F2 Information and POS data for feature card 1 ix 01F3 0215 Information and POS data for feature card 2 Xx 0216 0238 Information and POS data for feature card 3 ix 0239 025B Information and POS data for feature card 4 IX 025C 027E Information and POS data for feature card 5 ix 027F 02A1 Information and POS data for feature card 6 ix 02A2 02C4 Information and POS data for feature card 7 ix 02C5 02E7 Information and POS data for feature card 8 Xx 02E8 030A Information and POS data for feature card 9 ix 030B 032D Information and POS data for feature card 10 1x 032E 0330 Reserved poe 0331 0332 POS lookup table CRC checksum for bytes 1D0 330 x 0333 07BF Reserved OS j 07C0 07FF Master terminal vital product data ix H Asi Set EEN E 1 H i 0800 1FFF System Data operating system and application Figure 11
43. 5A 5 5A 6 5A 7 i 4 5A 8 PICTURE 36 Figure 40 Store Systems Technical Reference Point of Sale Keyboard A and B Connector and Long Cable 10 1 7 Point of Sale Keyboard A and B Connector and Long Cable Line Keyboard A Connector Long Keyboard Cable Wiring Connector 4683 4684 4693 ri A a 5B 1 pie eee She 5B 2 ee i yey ot ely rine et ye 58 3 et A he A 5B 4 E ee eee ee 5B 5 A E E T 5B 6 E E E 5B 7 ia SS aly A at i e 5B 8 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 7 1 Line Keyboard B Connector Connector 4683 4684 4693 5A 1 4 5A 2 j 5A 3 4 5A 4 Ho 5A 5 5A 6 5A 7 f 5A 8 PICTURE 37 Figure 41 Line Store Systems Technical Reference Point of Sale Keyboard A and B Connector and Short Cable 10 1 8 Point of Sale Keyboard A and B Connector and Short Cable Keyboard A Connector Short Keyboard Cable Wiring Connector 4683 4684 4693 ri A a 5B 1 pie eee She 5B 2 ee i yey A A 58 3 et A he A 5B 4 E ee eee ee 5B 5 TPAD a SoS 5B 6 Ep E a ct kts 5B 7 BIND e EA te 5B 8 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 8 1 1 I Line i i
44. 1 24 DB Buffer address 0008 failed Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 11 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure Status Bytes 4 and 5 4 4 4 j 25 06 Buffer address 0004 failed 4 4 4 l 26 FS Buffer address 0002 failed 4 4 4 j 27 04 Buffer address 0001 failed 4 4 4 28 F3 Buffer address 0000 failed 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 11 4 2 Store Systems Technical Reference CMOS Error Codes Failure Status Byte 6 2 11 5 CMOS Error Codes Failure Status Byte 6 Table 22 defines the meaning of failure status byte 6 of the device channel adapter 4 Table 22 CMOS Error Codes petes er 5525S 2 bESs See4 SSS se Se sees teeta ees Byte 6 Error Code Definition Y 00 No errors detected pur bse coso se ee 01 Battery failure Hood fi ce E e y e o oe 02 Storage failure Poles sake parien n se eee 04 Addressing failure Porton Po la otto ee 10 Restore Save Area failure poo eee Prior Sb Se tanta Ste ee 20 Save Save Area failure 4
45. 3 Four POS data bytes for POS registers 102 through 105 respectively 4 28 bytes reserved Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 4 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference POS Data Lookup Table 3 3 5 POS Data Lookup Table POS data for uninstalled option adapters are stored in a new NVRAM data structure called the POS data lookup table This data structure is similar to the feature slot POS data area but is used differently Entries in the lookup table are not assigned to specific card slots O Each lookup table entry can be used to setup only one card slot O The lookup table can have more than one entry that matches a specific feature adapter card ID 0 Card slots are setup sequentially starting with slot 1 using the first lookup table entry that matches the card ID and is not already in use O The feature slot POS data area is updated from the POS data lookup table when configuration changes are detected O The POS data lookup table contains at least one entry that matches an empty card slot This entry can be used to setup more than one empty card slot Ho Table 36 Card POS Data Lookup Table Poet Last Sees Sos ees eee ae a ees Ss SR este ti RTC NVRAM Address Description 4 01DOH 01F2H POS data for card ID nnnn 01F3H 0215H POS data for card ID nnnn
46. 4 X 54 3A Cash Drawer X 54 3B 4 4 4 l los ole o od IN M I o m A N NIN N IN NIN N l lo l Ape ASS gt Pl l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l ko l l LO va l l LS aml l l O 4 oO l 1 Qed 271 l 1 Q EQ l 1 on on l OA O H l l Q l m LWN WN I D l o Dl l y 9 1 1 Qo aol l x 11 O 0 Oo D pa Q a e l gt gt l x M I amp O MOIK ole mM st i SA tM Io Ios st l l l a amip ea me is ia p Se s l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Ls l 1 oO l l Le l l lod l LO 1 Q l I 1g l lod 1 O l 1 Q IO l In U l led A y l 1a y 1 O l l v l 1 E I 4 l 1 0 3 1 Ob I 4 lA g Ipo o log 1 Od IQ 1 Q S OHA 1 Q a Q 1 on 1 0 I 4 4 QA ect 1 Oo 54 LOA 1 w aS l gt l oy LSO Los 1 o gt r a LoD lop TD a 1 0 AH 40 lod a o 1 QQ I Q I H n 1 QD 1 1 1 40 lod r Q LAM ra oO l l l 4 4 4 X 4B 9B Hand Held Bar Code Reader 4 4 l l l ol IN IA ide ed fe esl al I l xX ol Ix Ix l l E E is l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
47. PICTURE 29 Figure 33 Location of Store Controller Dump Switch Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4684 Point of Sale Terminal Storage Dump 9 1 2 4684 Point of Sale Terminal Storage Dump Warning This procedure stops store operations The storage dump occurs and the 4684 IPLs 1 Press the dump switch shown in Figure 34 Message W507 displays Figure 33 in topic 9 1 1 shows the store loop adapters installed in the Personal Computer AT The dump switch is in the same location on the store loop adapters in the 4684 point of sale terminal 2 Wait for the dump to finish approximately two minutes Message W507 disappears and the 4684 IPLs 3 When the dump is complete notify the store programmer Note On a 4684 using the 4680 Operating System both the point of sale terminal dump and the store controller dump occur at the same time Also both dumps are entered in the store controller dump file PICTURE 30 Figure 34 Location of 4684 Dump Switch Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 1 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Requesting a 4683 Storage Dump 9 2 Requesting a 4683 Storage Dump 1 Press the dump switch on the 4683 xxl See Figure 35 If this is a 4683 xx2 you must press the dump switch on its partner 4683 xx1 or 4684 2 Wait for the dump to complete approximately 10 minutes While the dump is in progress U008 displays When the dump is complete U008 disappears an
48. 4 4 14 vsync vsync vysnc 4 4 4 L5 ID bit 3 no pin no pin pint a i de te dt td ds Note Red green blue return are analog grounds Digital ground is for sync returns and self test ID bit 0 3 is monitor ID bits 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 4 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Type 4 Serial Asynchronous Port 1 1 4 3 Type 4 Serial Asynchronous Port Models 541 421 and 321 provide serial communication ports for asynchronous data transfers up to 345 6K bits per second Data transfers to from the serial ports may be via PIO or DMA with programmable arbitration levels The external interface uses a standard 9 pin D shell connector and pinout defined for RS 232C The serial ports are designated Serial A and Serial B for identification The connector pinout assignments are detailed in Table 3 Y Table 3 Serial Port Pinout Assignments x2 pa ts BS a ee ee at ee Pin Signal Name Signal Direction 4 4 f 1 Data Carrier Detect In to DTE 4 f j 2 j Receive Data j In 4 4 f 3 Transmit Data Out to DCE 4 4 i 4 Data Terminal Ready Out 4
49. 4 4 4 4 J11 3 Polarization key No wire J11 7 Motor Black 4 4 4 4 4 4 J11 4 Motor Orange i i z A E a E O E O A AR E PO O E BIAS NE E ery a E aS oe Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 11 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J12 10 3 12 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J12 Y Printer Card Connector Line Description 4 4 J12 1 Polarization key 4 4 f J12 2 36 V de 4 f J12 3 Signal 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 12 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J13 10 3 13 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J13 Printer Card Cable Wire Connector Line Description i J13 1 5 V de return Black 4 4 4 i J13 2 5 V de Blue 4 4 4 J13 3 Sensor Green 4 4 4 J13 4 Sensor White 4 4 4 J13 5 5 V de return Black 4 4
50. Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Default Boot Priority List 3 3 3 1 Default Boot Priority List The 4693 default boot priority list is the same as the PS 2 Model 57 except that the Store Loop Adapter is added to a sub list of supported RPL devices Following is the 4693 default boot priority list 1 Diskette drive A RPL device a Token ring adapter b Store loop adapter c PC LAN adapter d Ethernet adapter 3 Fixed disk Insert Diskette icon if diskette drive A is present 5 Error message 19990305 if no IPL device is present oy If POST detects hardware errors or configuration setup errors boot record selection criteria and the boot device search process are as follows 1 The fixed disk system partition is enabled if a fixed disk is present 2 The bootstrap loader ignores normal boot records and searches for a reference diskette boot record 3 If RTC CMOS or NVRAM setup data is corrupted all card slots are searched for the presence of RPL adapters The last RPL adapter found in the system is setup using default setup data imbedded in ROM and initialized via the secondary ROM scan process Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 3 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Selectable Boot 3 3 3 2 Selectable Boot The selectable boot device option is supported via data stored in NVRAM by reference diskette software This option allows the user to create a prioritized boot dev
51. E a gl A o ci ere a e ay en gh hk ya aS yy rh er ye Sch Sey a nly yc ly a Snes A em Cl Sica fh oe a Ay en Lay ch et Bit Definition 4 4 Bat 7 1 Diagnostic Self Test Request 4 A Bit 6 1 Read and process the Timer Function bytes 4 A Bit 5 1 Read the Device Channel Function command byte 4 4 Bit 4 1 Process the Transmit Message s held in the Shared i Buffer 4 4 Bit 3 1 New poll list 4 A Bie 2 1 Device Channel Internal Storage Dump Request 4 4 Bit 1 1 Read EC Level Request 4 A Bit D 1 Reserved re tice te Ed As Na aes e ON eae tee e ee e A e a EE Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 13 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Shared Buffer Status Byte 2 14 Shared Buffer Status Byte Table 26 describes the bits of the shared buffer status byte This byte is updated by the device channel adapter microprocessor before it interrupts the system unit microprocessor A y Table 26 Shared Buffer Status Byte Pes eee ee tt ta tek a e ee eee Bit Definition Fras PO at ee ee Bit 7 1 The diagnostic self test is complete
52. 1 1 4 4 Parallel Port 1 1 4 5 Point of Sale 1 0 Device Channel SIO CD Interface 1 1 4 6 Diskette Drive Interface 1 1 4 7 Type 2 Controller SCSI Subsystem 1 1 4 8 DASD Support Model 541 only Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference PS 2 Keyboard Aux Device 1 1 4 1 PS 2 Keyboard Aux Device Models 541 421 and 321 provide attachment support for one PS 2 keyboard and one auxiliary device such as a pointing device The connector pinout assignments are detailed in Table 1 Table 1 Keyboard Aux Device Pinout Assignments x2 Pronostico Pin Signal i 1 data i 2 reserved 3 ground i Pane fis See 4 5 V de 5 clock 4 A 6 reserved Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 4 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Video Support 1 1 4 2 Video Support Models 541 and 421 use the Speedway ISO chipset for super video graphics array adapter SVGA video support The subsystem is capable of providing high resolution modes up to 1024x768x16 and extended modes up to 1053x768x16 The connector pinout is detailed in Table 2 Video support is available in Model 321 with the SVGA video adapter option Table 2 Video Display Pinout Assignments
53. 22 Store Loop Using Wiring Concentrators 19 his illustration represents a typical store loop using the IBM Loop Wiring Concentrator Your stor ay not be wired like this but the position of your 4683s on the loop and their relationship to the ontroller is similar he 4683 P can also be a 4683 001 or 4683 A01 The 4683 002 can also be a 4683 A02 he store controller transmits data to the first 4683 down loop on the store loop This 4683 receive he data and passes it to the next 4683 down loop This continues with each 4683 receiving data fron he 4683 immediately up loop from its position and passing it on to the next 4683 down loop he last 4683 down loop passes the data back to the store controller 23 Store Loop with LAN Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Polls 6 2 4 Polls The store controller transmits unique poll messages to invite 4683s on the store loop to transmit The poll messages are propagated around the store loop as each 4683 receives and then retransmits all messages The position of a 4683 on the store loop determines the sequence in which it receives its unique poll A 4683 must be polled before it can respond to a message that it received from the store controller If a 4683 is waiting with a message or a response to a message it transmits its terminal number followed by the message or response when it is polled It then resumes passing received data to the next 4683 on
54. 4 i Bit i 1 Read EC Level Request 4 Bit D 1 Reserved 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Shared Buffer Status Byte 5 8 9 Shared Buffer Status Byte The following table describes the bits of the shared buffer status byte This byte is updated by the device channel adapter microprocessor before it interrupts the system unit microprocessor A Table 51 Shared Buffer Status Byte pora otto to to it o ee o a o Bit Definition A Bit 7 1 The diagnostic self test is complete 4 A l Bit 6 1 Stress test is active A f BES Reserved 4 A b Bit 1 Device channel received A hE I An error message is present A Bit 2 1 A device channel internal storage dump is present 4 4 i Bit 1 1 An EC level message is present 4 A b Bit 0 Reserved A Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 9 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device Channel Adapter Interrupt Flag Byte 5 8 10 Device Channel Adapter Interrupt Flag Byte The following table describes the bits of the device channe
55. 4 2113 Scale clock Pin 11 4 21 14 Reserved Pin Aap 23 724 4 21 L5 Reserved PIN 225 23 24 21 16 Reserved Pin 22 23 24 4 5 5 PICTURE 44 Figure 48 Scale Cable Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 15 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Special Attachment Cable Remote Alarm and Non IBM Cash Drawer 10 1 16 Special Attachment Cable Remote Alarm and Non IBM Cash Drawer AO i Connector i Special Attachment 4683 4684 4693 Line Description Connector i f not used Pin 1 i f not used Pin 2 i f not used Pin 3 i not used Pin 4 i f not used Pin 5 3 1 DC ground Pin 6 322 sensor Pin 7
56. 4 4 4 J3 4 Motor Brown 4 4 4 f J3 5 Motor Red 4 4 4 J3 6 Motor Orange 4 4 4 i J3 7 Motor Yellow 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J4 Print Head Transport Motor 10 4 4 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J4 Print Head Transport Motor A Printer Card Motor Connector Line Description Cable Wire 4 4 4 J4 1 36 V de Black 4 4 4 J4 2 36 V de White 4 4 4 J4 3 Motor Red J4 4 Motor Green 4 4 4 J4 5 Polarization key No wire 4 4 4 J4 6 Motor Red White J4 7 Motor Green White 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J5 Print Head 10 4 5 Model
57. AL 27h Diagnosis PPC Hardware 4 6 1 4 AL 27h Diagnosis PPC Hardware The function allows direct communication to the PPC hardware This function should be used for diagnostic purposes only The value in register BL is written into the PPC command register On return register BH contains the PPC response register Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 1 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 29h Enable PDI and Use Direct NMI to the Processor 4 6 1 5 AL 29h Enable PDI and Use Direct NMI to the Processor This function enables the power down interrupt PDI to use a direct NMI to the processor that cannot be masked through I O port 70h or port 61h This NMI can only be disabled masked by interrupt 15h AH 42h AL 2Bh This is the default PDI operating mode Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 1 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 2Ah Enable PDI and Use Channel Check NMI 4 6 1 6 AL 2Ah Enable PDI and Use Channel Check NMI This function enables the standard method of generating a NMI with a channel check Because I O port 70h or port 61h can disable the PDI notification this function is not recommended Control of the system unit power will not work correctly if the PPC NMI code is not executed when the power is going away Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 1 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 2Bh Disable PDI 4 6 1 7 AL 2Bh Disable PDI This function dis
58. Automatic Resume Active l l i Press PgDn for additional controller status To refresh the status press F9 1 i i Message line F1 F2 F3QUIT F4 FS F6 ER F8 F9Refresh F10 i Status line i he E a ee EEE E E E E es a E o E Press PgDn to view page 3 This is an example of CONTROLLER STATUS Page 2 CONTROLLER STATUS Page 2 of 3 ID xx Time 00 00 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 6 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Requesting Store Controller Status Master XX XX File Server XX XX Alternate Master XX XX Alternate File Server XX XX Active Controller Connections xe EX Inactive Controller Connections XX XX XX ORR XX Press PgUp to see the previous page of controller status Press PgDn for additional Controller status To refresh the status press F9 Message line F1 F2 F3QUIT F4 FS F6 F7 F8 F9Refresh Status line Press PgUp to view the previous pages This is an example of CONTROLLER STATUS Page 3 AAA AE i CONTROLLER STATUS Loop Status Page 3 of 3 i ID xx Time 00 00 1 i bo 86 6 ORS SSS LOOP lessor sssi Hessens Loop 22 Auto Node Configured Acting Configured Acting Resume 1 i XX Control Controlling Backup Standby Y XX Control Controlling Backup Standby N XX Backup Prevented Backup Standby l i 1 i 1 i i Note Only active controllers Nodes are listed 1 i Press PgUp to see the previous page of controlle
59. CO CO WO OO MAINA OF WD Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Error Code Failure Status Byte 0 5 8 1 Error Code Failure Status Byte 0 The following table defines the meaning of each bit of failure status byte 0 of the device channel adapter A Y Bit Error Values Y 4 7 Dump switch 0 Good i i 1 Bad 4 4 6 Reserved 0 Good 1 Bad 4 4 4 i 5 ROS scan error 0 Good 1 Bad 4 4 4 Device channel adapter 0 Good microprocessor status 1 Bad 4 4 4 l 3 Shared buffer latch test error 0 Good code 1 Bad Y f 2 Shared buffer test error code 0 Good i 1 Bad 4 4 1 CMOS test error code 0 Good 1 Bad 4 4 0 Dump switch test error code 0 Good 1 Bad 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Microprocessor Status Codes Failure Status Byte 1 5 8 2 Microprocessor Status Codes Failure Status Byte 1
60. Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 10 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J101 Paper Cutter Motor 10 4 11 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J101 Paper Cutter Motor A Printer Card Motor Connector Line Description Cable Wire J101 1 36 V de Black 4 4 4 J101 2 Polarization key No wire 4 4 4 J101 3 36 V de Green J101 4 Motor Brown 4 4 4 J101 5 Motor Red J101 6 Motor Orange 4 4 4 J101 7 Motor Yellow 4 PICTURE 72 Figure 76 Printer Extension Card Connector Wiring The polarization key is counted as a pin Note Printer extension card connectors J104 and J105 are reserved Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 11 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J102 CR Motor 10 4 12 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J102 CR Motor Printer Card Motor Connector Line Description Cabl
61. Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 8 2 1 Printer Model RS 232 Device 2A Fiscal 1520 Hand Held Scanner Model A01 Device IDs by Device Type Point o location 2A location 2B location 2A location 2B location 2A location 2B Shares Socket location 2A on the Feature location 2B Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 8 2 2 Store Systems Technical Reference with f Sale Scanner Adapter Store Systems Technical Reference Displaying POS Terminal Configuration Using Set Terminal Characteristics 5 6 9 Displaying POS Terminal Configuration Using Set Terminal Characteristics For a 4683 xx2 see Displaying 4683 xx2 Configuration in topic 5 6 9 2 Subtopics 5 6 9 1 Displaying 4683 xx1 Configuration 5 6 9 2 Displaying 4683 xx2 Configuration Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 9 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Displaying 4683 xx1 Configuration 5 6 9 1 Displaying 4683 xx1 Configuration 10 11 L2 Le 14 Press and hold the dump switch on the 4683 xxl Switch POWER OFF and then release the dump switch Wait 5 seconds and switch power ON Wait for message U005 to display Press and release the dump switch This causes the point of sale terminal to ignore its current terminal number and prompt for a new terminal number by displaying message z001 Wait for message Z001 to display If you have more than one display attached to the point of sale terminal the Zxxx messages are d
62. Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 2 2 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0100 W001 Message loop Is this the first powered ON 4683 xx1 down loop from the active store controller Yes No 4 1014 i 1 i i Continue at Step 023 1 J i i 1015 Disconnect this 4683 xxl from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No 4 1016 4 i 1 i 1 i i Reconnect the 4683 xxl to the store loop and continue at Step 051 1 i i 1018 From step 012 Is the store loop cable plugged into the store loop adapter on the active store controller See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Yes No J i 1019 Correct the problem by plugging the cable into the store loop adapter 1 i 1 i Return to the 4683 xx1 displaying message W001 On this 4683 is the store loop cable plugged into socket 1 and into the store loop receptacle Yes No i i 021 i 1 i i i i Correct the problem by plugging the cable into socket 1 and into the store loop receptacle 1 i 1 i Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the active store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your
63. Failure Status Byte 6 in topic 2 11 5 Parsons Parsons opt ee ee e Byte 7 Dump Error Codes Failure Status Byte 7 in topic 2 11 6 pole ee poso toto to S ee See Ow ee ee eee o noti Byte 8 Contains the EC level of the device channel adapter i microprocessor i A Byte 9 Contains the EC level of the device channel adapter power on self test microcode in ROS A Subtopics 2 11 1 Error Code Failure Status Byte 0 2 11 2 Microprocessor Status Codes Failure Status Byte 1 2 11 3 Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 2 11 4 Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure Status Bytes 4 and 5 2 11 5 CMOS Error Codes Failure Status Byte 6 2 11 6 Dump Error Codes Failure Status Byte 7 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 241 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Error Code Failure Status Byte 0 2 11 1 Error Code Failure Status Byte 0 Table 18 defines the meaning of each bit of failure status byte 0 of the device channel adapter AAA ANP AA AAA A EA AA he en Ah ee A AS Table 18 Failure Status Byte 0 Bit Definition Uae oe o e Seeks a ee ot ee a ee ee ee eee ee ee Se eee Bit Error Values 4 4 4 De Le Reset switch 0 Good 1 Bad 4 4 4 p6 Reserved 0 Good 1 Bad 4
64. Out to DCE 4 4 Data terminal ready Out 4 4 5 Signal ground Common 4 6 Data set ready In 4 4 7 Request to send Out A 4 8 Clear to send In 4 4 4 9 Ring indicator reserved in 4693 Model 202 In E ei P tap li ep nly ene we Sd y Ow e id Ors SERA jr A A wasn Eee Seah es Penn a o nt ef We a E Weer EE a in ae E emg io a A Power eng od PICTURE 48 Figure 52 4693 Serial I O Asynchronous Port Connector Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 19 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4693 Serial I O Asynchronous Wrap Plug 10 1 20 4693 Serial I O Asynchronous Wrap Plug PICTURE 49 Figure 53 4693 Serial I O Asynchronous Wrap Plug Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 20 1 3687 Point of Sale Scanner Model 002 Adapter Connector and Cable Store Systems Technical Reference 10 1 21 3687 Point of Sale Scanner Model 002 Adapter Connector and Cable Connector 4683 or 4684 4 Tal i i ASQ i l l i i 4 1 3 i 1 4 r i i 4 i 71 5 i i 71 6 i 14 1 i i
65. Subtopics 2 6 1 Loading the System Programs 2 6 2 Flow of 4693 System Programs Menus 2 6 3 Test Procedure Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Loading the System Programs 2 6 1 Loading the System Programs Depending upon the model of the 4693 there are different methods of loading the system programs O Model 541 system programs can be loaded from the fixed disk system partition or from the system diskettes using the diskette drive O Models 421 and 321 system programs can be loaded only from a controller or server using the network or store loop This is often referred to as downloading the system programs O Model xx2 satellite terminal does not receive a load It uses its master terminal load Subtopics 2 6 1 1 Procedure to Load From System Partition or Controller Server 2 6 1 2 Procedure to Load From System Diskettes Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 6 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Procedure to Load From System Partition or Controller Server 2 6 1 1 Procedure to Load From System Partition or Controller Server 1 Use the store procedures to stop any application programs that are running 2 Switch Ready mode OFF at the 4693 terminal 3 Press the Reset switch to disable storage retention Note A special keying sequence is required at a specific time during the POST sequence to initiate the loading of system programs This key sequence must occur during a three second
66. The following table defines the meaning of failure status byte 1 of the device channel adapter Hoy Table 44 Device Channel Adapter Microprocessor Status Codes NEn otitis eS btes 2 Byte 1 Status Code Definition 00 No errors occurred 10 through 16 Device channel adapter operational error A 15 through 17 Not valid 20 through 23 Operational error 24 through 70 Not valid 71 through 76 Self test error 77 through 80 Not valid 81 through 84 Self test error 86 through 8F Not valid 90 External wrap error 91 through FF Not valid Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes an
67. There is a marking adjacent to the LED to identify this indicator In Model 541 without a fixed disk drive this indicator is present but non functional System Board Good Indicator A green LED with a numeral 1 marked adjacent to it indicates the state of the system board After completion of power on self tests POST with no errors detected on the system board this indicator is illuminated Power Supply Good Indicator A green LED with a numeral 2 marked adjacent to it indicates the state of the power supply When the indicator is illuminated AC is available to the terminal and the power supply is good not defective This control is provided to help isolate problems between the system board and the power supply Overtemperature Indicator A yellow LED with a numeral 2 marked adjacent to it indicates a terminal overtemperature condition When an overtemperature condition is detected the indicator is illuminated and the power supply is shutdown except for the power supply control circuitry The temperature sensing element and the circuitry to initiate the power supply shutdown and LED illumination is located within the power supply After the overtemperature condition is corrected actuating the Mode Control switch resets the power supply overtemperature circuit and changes the state to operational Overcurrent Indicator A yellow LED with a numeral 4 adjacent to it indicates an overcurrent external to the power sup
68. X 10 Keyboard 50 key or Combined 5A Keyboard Display 4 4 4 X 11 Keyboard 50 key or Combined SB Keyboard Display HO X 12 Keyboard Alphanumeric SA HO X 13 Keyboard Alphanumeric 5B HO X 16 Keyboard Matrix SA HO X 17 Keyboard Matrix SB HO X 1A Keyboard ANPOS SA HO X 1B Keyboard ANPOS 5B HO X 1C RPOS Keyboards OA HO X 1D RPOS Keyboards 5B HO X 20 Display Alphanumeric 4A HO X 21 Display Alphanumeric 4B HO X 22 Display Operator or Combined 4A 5A if Combined Keyboard Display Keyboard Display 4 4 4 X 23 Display Operator or Combined 4B 5B if Combined Keyboard Display Keyboard Display HO X 26 Display Shopper 4A 4 4
69. X30 Printer Model 1 or 2 4 4 X 34 Printer Model 3 or 4 4 4 x 36 Printer Model 2A Fiscal A RSS Printer Model 3A Fiscal 4 4 1 A11 models except 2X2 Serial A i 4 4 RS 232C Device x 66 Model 2X2 only Serial A RS 232C Device 4 4 X 67 Model 2X2 only Serial B RS 232C Device 4 4 X 68 A11 models Serial B RS 232C Device Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 15 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device IDs by Device Type except 2X2 i i i Scale 9A 9B 9C 4B Shares i KGET socket with Point of Sale Scanner E 4 Totals Retention Internal to the base unit o AN E 4 1520 Hand Held Scanner Model A02 5B X 4BI E A ae ges E E hg wg O E ope A E E NA EE Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 15 2 2 Store Systems Technical Reference 4693 Real Time Clock Nonvolatile Random Access Memory Map 2 16 4693 Real Time Clock Nonvolatile Random Access Memory Map
70. l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l cloai ole mo 100 110 mom w l l l As ia Soke l l l l l l l l l l l l l l xe l l oO l l le l l l l Q l l E l l O 10 l o lod l oy l y I O l o 1g l LES l gt o I S l v I o 1 n MH pS ro 1 Q 1 Q 1 A on LH La LO H LA 1 gg a l l aN Los oe ts TT o ae wy 14 I 4 0 1 oO O oO I O 1 50 Q Q 1 Q 1 Q gt o I IO v v 1 o 1 O mM l x l mM 4 5B 1 4 4 4 5A 4 RPOS Keyboards 5B 1 4 4 4 5A 4 Matrix Keyboard 5B j 4 4 4 x 40 6 on the keyboard attached to Socket 5A 4 Single Track MSR 6 on the keyboard attached to Socket 5B X 46 ANPOS or Combined Keyboard Display 5A Dual Track MSR 5B 5A X 48 i 3 Track MSR X 49 5B 4 4 4 X 4A 4B oC y 4 4 4 9B 9A Point of Sale Scanner
71. poo tano feces oe ts sti a o a ee Bit 6 1 Stress test is active Polonio ferto i ee cei pe eee BAS Reserved poroso pare e a a Bit 4 1 Device channel received Horaria Postea pto dot a a e ee Blt a3 1 An error message is present pose Geo eS A DE I O Eg Oe ee Bit 2 1 A device channel internal storage dump is present horca A A A A o e to y oa o Bit 1 1 An EC level message is present pornos E Ex O IO E 5 eee See ee k BRE O Reserved A Subtopics 2 14 1 Device Channel Adapter Interrupt Flag Byte 2 14 2 POST Test Device Channel Adapter Errors Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 14 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device Channel Adapter Interrupt Flag Byte 2 14 1 Device Channel Adapter Interrupt Flag Byte Table 27 describes the bits of the device channel adapter interrupt flag byte This byte is updated by the software interrupt service routine when a level 7 hardware interrupt occurs tao ede Sai gan i yi A a aah ee iy Sa ea ra iy Na de ary na tape So cig i Ml ety A ns ike Sg Sap ig elo iy Sa a aye hry ey S Table 27 Device Channel Adapter Interrupt Flag Byte E a fy pe ry PEN ne AS pg eee ee ee ae e EE Pee ae dt o 2 Oe POI Se Dc e do e oe UE SNe A Samy Oe a many WEIN a nny Loe ia Wes penny a o nanny wes Penny eg Bit Definition A Bit 7 1 The level 7 interrupt is not from the device channel adapter A Bit 6 1 An interrupt occurred wh
72. pul eee eb Se Re ee ee ee oe Se Pin i Planar Output Monochrome Color i 1 red no pin red 2 green mono green 3 blue no pin blue 4 ID bit 2 no pin no pin 5 digital ground self test self test 6 red return dummy pin red return 7 green return mono return green return 8 blue return no pin blue return 9 plug no pin no pin 10 digital ground digital digital ground i i ground 4 11 ID bit 0 no pin digital ground 4 4 4 4 12 ID bit 1 digital no pin i i ground 4 4 4 13 hsync hsync hysnc 4
73. running 5 3 viewing 5 4 2 5 4 8 configuration 4693 auto 2 4 backup and restore 2 4 change 2 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 INDEX 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Index device ID by device type 4693 2 15 2 device ID 4693 2 15 print 2 4 procedure 2 7 programs summary 2 4 resetting the record 2 10 set and view SCSI 2 4 view 2 4 controls and indicators 4693 model 202 1 2 4 models 541 421 321 1 1 7 copy an option diskette 2 5 2 copy an option diskette 4684 reference diskette 5 6 2 create configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 4 1 creating configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 4 D DASD support 4693 model 541 diskette drive interface 1 1 4 8 fixed disk drive specifications 1 1 4 7 type 2 controller SCSI 1 1 4 7 description 4693 See 4693 terminals description device channel 4680 device channel on 4693 1 1 4 5 device Channel adapter 4684 error codes 5 8 1 failure status byte 6 5 8 5 failure status byte 7 5 8 6 failure status bytes 2 and 3 5 failure status bytes 4 and 5 5 failure status bytes 4684 5 8 interrupt flag byte 5 8 10 microprocessor status codes 5 8 2 POST errors 5 8 11 shared buffer request byte 5 8 8 shared buffer status byte 5 8 9 system status byte 5 8 7 device channel adapter 4693 device channel adapter failure status bytes 4693 2 11 error codes 2 11 1 failure status byte 6 2 11 failure status byte 7 2 11 failure status bytes 2 and failure status bytes 4 and interrupt flag
74. 1 Reserved In to DTE 4 4 f j 2 j Receive Data j In 4 4 f 3 Transmit Data Out to DCE 4 i 4 Data Terminal Ready Out 4 4 4 f 5 Signal Ground Common 4 4 f 6 Data Set Ready In 4 4 4 i 7 Request to Send Out 4 4 l 8 Clear to Send In 4 4 9 i Reserved Hoy Y Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 2 2 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Power Supply and Auxiliary Power Source Requirements 1 2 2 3 Power Supply and Auxiliary Power Source Requirements The requirements are the same as other models Refer to Power Subsystem Features in topic 1 1 5 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 2 2 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Internal System Loads 1 2 3 Internal System Loads The system unit power supply provides power for internal and external loads The internal loads are defined in Table 14 AO Table 14 Internal DC Loads Loads are listed in milliamps He pee eS eek ist e eu eS She Sear ees ae ae ease Load 5VL 12VL 12VL 5LM 5PPC 5CONT
75. 4 i E 1 y i i 4 i 7 8 i 1 i i PICTURE 50 Figure 54 J i Line Description eg Sieh Hi at ea lame a ag iy a aY t5 V de OR ey a E ay Recah Ae yap a 5 V de return heat Stee Se aes 4 5 V de A e o A 5 V de return hy ea th ag Bey Sh a io Sp I 5 V de im ii a a e os FI Vade return a he ae Serial I O A i y a E ey Mc DA ry a Scanner Connector 3687 Point of Sale Scanner Model 002 Cable Connector 4683 or 4684 A cathe 17 9 A 17 10 i i Sieeeuesseues LAST A AL 2 Lye 12 EEEE L713 i EE ENEE 17 14 A E 17 15 i i PS 17 16 1 Wir Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 21 1 Line ing Scanner Connector Store Systems Technical Reference 4696 4697 Point of Sale Scanner Connector and Cable 10 1 22 4696 4697 Point of Sale Scanner Connector and Cable di E a AR e ag ii DE gy ema lg do Co js y q aly a e ya ig al O ay anny ny o CE a ly A o pn Se Ae y el pi li A end zp mii el ra l Connector i j 4683 4684 4693 Line Description Scanner i 1 12 V de return 8 2 Serial I O A 10 3 Serial I O B j 9
76. 4 6 2 2 AL Olh Add Device to Poll List This function adds a device to the poll list Registers on entry CX Size of buffer DX Port or device address DS SI Pointer to device work or receive buffer Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 2 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 02h Add Device to Poll List With Receive Routine Pointer 4 6 2 3 AL 02h Add Device to Poll List With Receive Routine Pointer This function adds a device to the poll list and allows the application to be called when information frame data is received Registers on entry BX Bit 0 is set when the application wants to be called on all receive data CX Size of buffer DX Port or device address DS SI Pointer to device work or receive buffer ES DI Pointer to application receive routine Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 2 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 03h Remove Device From Poll List 4 6 2 4 AL 03h Remove Device From Poll List This function removes a device from the poll list On entry register DX is loaded with the port or device address Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 2 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 04h Transmit Message to Device Includes Broadcasts 4 6 2 5 AL 04h Transmit Message to Device Includes Broadcasts This function transmits a message to a device On entry register DS SI is the pointer to the transmit messages Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 2
77. A unit of measure for data 1 megabyte 1 048 576 bytes memory Program addressable storage from which instructions and other data can be loaded directly into registers for subsequent execution or processing memory mapped I O MMIO In an IBM Personal Computer a method of accessing an input or output port as if it were a memory location message 1 An arbitrary amount of information whose beginning and end are defined or implied 2 A group of characters and control bit sequences transferred as an entity 3 In telecommunication a combination of characters and symbols transmitted from one point to another 4 A logical partition of the user device s data stream to and from the adapter See also error message operator message microcode 1 One or more microinstructions 2 A code representing the instructions of an instruction set that is implemented in a part of storage that is not program addressable 3 To design write and also test one or more microinstructions microprocessor An integrated circuit that accepts coded instructions for execution The instructions may be entered integrated or stored internally mirrored files Files that are kept on both the master store controller and the alternate master store controller or on both the file server and alternate file server System mirrored files are kept on the master store controller and alternate store controller and non system mirrored files are kept on the fil
78. AH OAh Write character at cursor position AH OEh Write teletype AH OFh Get video state AH 13h Write string All functions not supported by the POS video BIOS are passed on to the standard 4693 video BIOS Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Interrupt 13h Disk Diskette 4 5 Interrupt 13h Disk Diskette The disk diskette BIOS routine supports the 2 5 inch SCSI fixed disk drive Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Interrupt 15h System Services 4 6 Interrupt 15h System Services There are three system services supporting the 4693 hardware AH AH AH These BIOS Subtopics 4 6 1 AH 4 6 2 AH 4 6 3 AH 42h Programmable power control 92h Point Of Sale POS device control CAh NVRAM services Preserve all registers that are not used for returning information Clear the carry flag if the operation was successful Set the carry flag if the operation failed to complete 42h Programmable Power Control BIOS 92h POS Device Control BIOS CAh NVRAM System Services BIOS Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 1 4 6 1 AH The PPC BIOS provides an application interface to the PPC hardware 42h Store Systems Technical Reference AH 42h Programmable Power Control BIOS Programmable Power Control BIOS This interface gives the user the ability to control the 4693 power on off states T
79. Ho Ho P12 B 36 V de solenoid P12 10 P12 3 5 V de external P12 L 4 P12 C 5 V de external P12 11 4 4 4 j P12 4 5 V de external return P12 M 4 4 4 j P12 D 5 V de external return P12 12 4 4 4 P12 5 Polarization key P12 N 4 P12 E Polarization key P12 13 4 4 4 P12 6 12 V de P12 P 4 4 4 P12 F 12 V de P12 14 4 4 4 PI2 7 12 V de return P12 R 4 4 4 P12 H 12 V de return P12 15 4 4 4 P12 8 2 V de P12 S Sete eee es see eas ee a ee regs ete Bee at ENE BS E at Ne et Nees tet Ne PICTURE 67 Figure 71 Power Supply Connector P12 Wiring Connector the same on Pll P12 P13 and P14 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 2 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4683 Power Supply Connector P13 10 2 3 4683 Power Supp
80. Note The positive and negative voltage requirements and n type semiconductors complement each other A low power input pulse to a gate of a CMOS device turns one semiconductor on and the other off There is no current flow except for capacitance charging and discharging and for switching operations CMOS devices therefore use considerably less power than other types of semiconductor devices They are ideal for use in microcomputers and battery powered devices such as calculators and portable computers cable loss optical The loss in an optical cable equals the attenuation coefficient for the cables fiber times the cable length cable segment A section of cable between components or devices on a network A segment may consist of a single patch cable multiple patch cables connected together or a combination of building cable and patch cables connected together See LAN segment ring segment call The action of bringing a function or subprogram into effect usually by specifying the entry conditions and jumping to an entry point carrier A wave or pulse train that may be varied by a signal bearing information to be transmitted over a communication system carrierband A frequency band in which the modulated signal is superimposed on a carrier signal as differentiated from baseband but only one channel is present on the medium Contrast with baseband broadband cash drawer A drawer at a point of sale terminal that can be programm
81. OFF OFF OFF OFF Mem Retention Enabled i i i i i i i 2 PARAR ARS 3 PRESOS ASS ESPE e a alicia Fasa a 2 Prosa ES oa Pasas aes5s HS RES Overtemperature Present ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF dese Sa ieee esa ssee ii AS PR PSSS PSSS Poe esis Hostos a PS tae tate ETS Overcurrent Present ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 4 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 5 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Battery Operation 1 1 5 3 Battery Operation If the RAM retention function is enabled and AC power is removed the memory is preserved when battery power is available There are two battery capacity options 500 milliamp hour mah and 3600 mah Actual discharge time depends on battery capacity state of charge of battery and memory installed on the system board The system automatically disconnects the battery when voltage drops below protecting the battery from deep discharges The battery also positive temperature coefficient PTC switch to guard against shorts on the battery The battery is located behind the front customer service cover the NA contains a direct It does not require any tools to install or remove and is readily accessible without disturbing the system components Once the warranty period has expired the batteries are a customer maintenance item Batteries have a two year shelf life
82. Ss UU DNP 0 UN Ra 0 3004 0N Aa UNH 003000004 ONA HAA HA aO G O ora OwO A N DNN NO N H o NOP UN Ra 0 0 001010104 os PWD jes OH WWWWWWWWWWNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNDND D t 04 UNA Ss UU UY UY Y WWD t Copyright IBM Corp 1993 CONTENTS 1 4a4aa aaa aa a a a a a a a Y aa a Ya Aa a YA Ya Ya a Ya a a Ya Ya Ya a Ya aa Ya a a a YA aa a Aa YN a Ya Ya Ya Ya a YA a Ya Ya YN a Ya YN YN Ya YN YN UN 0 YN OQ ds ds ds do do do ds ds ds ds ds ds o ds ds us Store Systems Technical Reference Table of Contents 0 Topic 4 4693 Basic Input Output System BIOS sd Basic Input Output System BIOS Routines 2 Interrupt 02h PPC NMI 35 Interrupt OFh IRQ7 4 Interrupt 10h Point Of Sale POS Video BIOS 23 Interrupt 13h Disk Diskette 26 Interrupt 15h System Services acre ll AH 42h Programmable Power Control BIOS 2 AH 92h POS Device Control BIOS O 3 AH CAh NVRAM System Services BIOS eel Interrupt 16h POS Keyboard BIOS 8 Advanced Basic Input Output System ABIOS Routines 9 Device ID 02h Disk 10 Device ID 09h System Services 10 1 Function 20h Programmable Power Control PPC ABIOS bd Device ID OAh PPC NMI 0 Topic 5 4683 and 4684 General Description ad General Description of the 4683 Point of Sale Terminal ed I 4683 Input Voltages 2 General Description of the 4684 Point of Sale Terminal 22 1 4684 Input Voltages A3 4684
83. Store Systems Technical Reference Index power control programmable 1 1 5 1 power subsystem 1 1 5 5 programmable power control Model 202 1 2 2 RAM retention 1 1 5 1 ready indicator 1 1 7 system states 1 1 5 2 power on self test 2 3 1 power on self test 4683 4684 terminals 5 6 16 preparing to run configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 4 preparing to run utilities 4684 reference diskette 5 6 primary display 4684 5 3 3 primary keyboard 4684 5 3 3 printer card connectors 4680 See cable and wiring diagrams 4683 4684 printing configuration 2 4 2 problem analysis diskette 4680 See 4680 collecting problem information problem determination 4680 See 4680 collecting problem information programmable power control See power system 4693 PS 2 PS 55 adapters I O support 4693 publications related PREFACE 1 PREFACE 2 R RAM retention See power system 4693 ready indicator See controls and indicators 4693 reference diskette 4684 backup 5 6 1 copy an option diskette 5 6 2 set system date 5 6 3 set system time 5 6 3 setting vital product data 5 6 4 related publications PREFACE 1 PREFACE 2 remote IPL RIPL 4683 4684 configuration 5 7 3 hardware 5 7 2 installation and maintenance 5 7 1 installation instructions 5 7 4 operating instructions 5 7 5 theory of operation 5 7 6 remote IPL RIPL 4690 Store Loop bootstrap file 2 2 description 2 2 progress messages 2 2 report system log See 4680 collecting problem information
84. This support is in the 4690 Operating System remote file system server 4693 Terminal bootstrap load request example Xx 8008 03C1 9FEA This message is a non sequenced bootstrap load request from terminal number 8 The bootstrap file has a 28 byte header O The first 4 byte field must contain the terminal RAM address at which he first byte of the load file is stored ct 4 he second 4 byte field contains the address at which the bootstrap load is given control O The third 4 byte field contains the length of the load in bytes O The remaining 16 bytes are available for future expansion The addresses are expected to be passed as segment offset Example of the header Xo ELOFF 0000 0000 C007 6044 US00 aeaa a ea aa a we a It translates to the following X FODEE 0004 07TC0 0000 0003r AMADO srada eara ARA AAA WA 1 The bootstrap is to be loaded at physical address X OFE4 given control at physical address X 7C00 and is X 03446C bytes long The load messages on the loop should be 518 bytes long with the last message being the length of the remaining bytes in the bootstrap file plus 6 There is a 1 byte address X C1 a 1 byte next sequential Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4690 Store Loop Remote Initial Program Load RIPL instruction NSI command X 03 a 2 byte sequence number X 0000 X 0100 sequentially to X nnnn the next sequential 512 bytes or
85. kup store controller has two modes of operation that can be set from the keyboard 1 All bac 2 Prevented loo While t owed The backup store controller takes over the store loop if a kup request is received from a 4683 The backup store controller does NOT take over the store p if a backup request is received from a 4683 he backup store controller is controlling the store loop it can display any of the store loop messages that you would normally see at the primary store controller such as W760 W761 W762 W763 and W764 The following are messages that can be displayed ONLY at the backup store control Message Message Message Message Message ler W770 W771 W772 W773 W774 A backup request was received from a 4683 on the store loop because the primary store controller is not functioning The backup store controller status was allowed Therefore it is now in control of the store loop A backup request was received from a 4683 on the store loop because the primary store controller is not functioning The backup store controller status was prevented Therefore it did not take control of the store loop The backup store controller while monitoring the activity on the store loop is not receiving end of poll characters or beacons from 4683s on the store loop It is sending beacons down loop to the primary store controller The backup store controller was in control of the s
86. requesting status 4680 store system See 4680 collecting problem information resetting the terminal number 4683 4684 5 6 14 restore configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 4 2 restoring configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 4 restrictions when connecting displays 4683 4684 5 4 revision level displaying See utility programs summary 4693 RIPL 4683 4684 See remote IPL RIPL 4683 4684 RIPL 4690 Store Loop See remote IPL RIPL 4690 Store Loop RS 232C 4693 tests 2 6 3 running configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 3 running utilities 4684 reference diskette 5 3 S safety information translated FRONT_1 4 save and restore configuration 2 4 5 SBCS single byte character set 4693 4693 SBCS models 1 1 securing the 4684 fixed disk 5 6 5 security features 4693 1 1 8 serial A 4693 tests 2 6 3 serial B 4693 tests 2 6 3 serial I O channel device channel 4684 addressing 5 10 4 1 byte format 5 10 3 configuration 5 10 1 interface 5 10 2 message checking 5 10 5 message format 5 10 4 polling 5 10 4 2 power on initialization 5 10 6 7 5 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 INDEX 6 Store Systems Technical Reference Index serial I O port 4693 pinout assignments 1 1 4 3 serial port pinout assignments 4693 1 1 4 3 set and view SCSI device configuration 2 4 6 set system date 4684 reference diskette 5 6 3 set system time 4684 reference diskette 5 6 3 set vital product data 4684 reference diskette 5 6 4
87. setting a password 2 5 4 setting startup sequence 2 5 8 setting the keyboard rate 2 5 5 setting time and date 2 5 3 severity level message 8 2 6 status information 4680 system description 8 2 5 point of sale terminal message 5 6 10 storage dump store system 4680 4683 storage 9 2 4684 9 1 2 dump switch 4683 9 2 dump switch 4684 9 1 2 dump switch Personal Computer AT 9 1 1 dump switch PS 2 9 1 1 Personal Computer AT 9 1 1 P5 2 9 151 store controller storage 9 1 store controller 4680 displaying messages 8 2 4 PLD recovery from 8 2 3 reference information 8 0 store controller 4693 system See store controller 4680 store loop 4680 backup 8 2 1 beaconing 6 2 6 configuration 6 2 1 CRC error 6 2 7 description 6 2 end of poll timeout 6 2 5 error condition 6 2 8 error message 6 2 8 hardware 6 2 2 polling 6 2 4 recovery procedure 6 2 9 wiring concentrator 6 2 3 store loop 4693 system See store loop 4680 store system description 4680 6 0 support diskette for medialess terminals 4693 description 2 1 1 system date 4684 reference diskette 5 6 3 system diskettes 4693 description 2 1 1 system partition 4693 description 2 1 2 system programs 4693 system time 4684 reference diskette 5 6 3 system unit 4693 tests 2 6 3 T terminal description 4683 See 4680 terminals description terminal number 4683 4684 changing 5 6 12 displaying 5 6 11 entering 5 6 13 resetting 5 6 14 terminals 4683 and 4684 5 0 te
88. 12h contains the double word pointer that is saved into the EBDA Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 10 1 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Subfunction 09h Enable PDI and Use Direct NMI to the Processor 4 10 1 5 Subfunction 09h Enable PDI and Use Direct NMI to the Processor This subfunction enables the power down interrupt PDI to use a direct NMI to the processor that cannot be masked through I O port 70h or port 61h This NMI can only be disabled masked by device ID 09h function 20h subfunction OBh This is the default PDI operating mode Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 10 1 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Subfunction OAh Enable PDI and Use Channel Check NMI 4 10 1 6 Subfunction 0OAh Enable PDI and Use Channel Check NMI This subfunction enables the standard method of generating a NMI with a channel check Because I O port 70h or port 61h can disable the PDI notification this function is not recommended Control of the system unit power will not work correctly if the PPC NMI code is not executed when the power is going away Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 10 1 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Subfunction OBh Disable PDI 4 10 1 7 Subfunction OBh Disable PDI This subfunction disables the PPC hardware from generating a PDI when power is going away This function is used when the user wants to control the system unit power from the front panel Mode Control switch only Copyright IBM Corp 1993
89. 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J5 Print Head Printer Card Printer Card i Connector Line Description Connector Line Description J5 1 Print wire 3 J5 7 36 V de 4 4 4 f J5 2 Print wire 7 J5 8 Print wire 9 4 4 4 4 J5 3 Print wire 1 J5 9 Print wire 4 4 4 f J5 4 Print wire 5 J5 10 Print wire 8 4 4 f J5 5 36 V de J5 11 Print wire 6 4 4 J5 6 36 V de J5 12 Print wire 2 5 5 5 ee Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J6 Print Head Home Sensor 10 4 6 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J6 Print Head Home Sensor A Printer Card Sensor Connector Line Description Cable Wire J6 1 Left home sensor Red J6 2 5 V de return Yellow 4 4
90. 4 4 f 5 Signal Ground Common 4 4 f 6 Data Set Ready In 4 4 4 i 7 Request to Send Out 4 4 4 l 8 Clear to Send In 4 4 9 Ring Indicator In 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 4 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Parallel Port 1 1 4 4 Parallel Port Models 541 421 and 321 provide an enhanced parallel interface port that allows bidirectional output The interface supports level sensitive interrupts with readable interrupt pending status In addition the parallel port may be configured for DMA operation with programmable arbitration levels The connector pinout assignments are detailed in Table 4 Table 4 Parallel Port Pinout Assignments puss oe btp Oe toa a i Pin Signal Name 1 Strobe i 2 Data bit 0 i 3 Data bit 1 i 4 Data bit 2 i 5 i Data bit 3 i 6 Data bit 4 i 7 i Data bi
91. 4680 Supermarket Application Planning and Installation Guide GC30 3371 IBM 4680 Supermarket Application Guide to Operations SC30 3372 IBM 4680 Supermarket Application Programming Guide SC30 3373 IBM 4680 Supermarket Application Terminal Offline Feature User s Guide SC30 3512 IBM 4680 Supermarket Application Electronic Funds Transfer Feature User s Guide SC30 3513 4680 Chain Drug Sales Application IBM 4680 Chain Drug Sales Application Planning and Installation Guide GC30 3412 IBM 4680 Chain Drug Sales Application Guide to Operations SC30 3413 IBM 4680 Chain Drug Sales Application Programming Guide SC30 3414 4680 Store Management Application IBM 4680 Store Management Application Planning and Installation Guide GC30 3483 IBM 4680 Store Management Application Guide to Operations SC30 3484 IBM 4680 Store Management Application Programming Guide SC30 3487 IBM 4680 Store Management Application Inventory Control Feature User s Guide SC30 3485 IBM 4680 Store Management Application Price Management Feature User s Guide SC30 3486 4684 Store Sales Application IBM 4684 Store Sales Application Planning and Installation Guide SB11 8470 IBM 4684 Store Sales Application Programmer s Reference Manual sB11 8472 IBM 4684 Store Sales Application Operator s Guide SB11 8471 IBM 4684 Store Run time Support System Installation and User s Guide 611 8552 Copyright IBM Corp
92. 4683 002 Hard Totals 00c1 51 4693 xx2 Hard Totals 00C2 52 Reserved 00C3 53 Reserved 00C4 54 Cash Drawers 00C5 55 Reserved 00C6 56 Reserved 00C7 57 Reserved 00C8 58 Reserved 00C9 59 Reserved OOCA 5A Reserved 00CB 5B Reserved 00CC 5C Reserved 00CD 5D Reserved 00CE 5E OEM OOCF SF OEM Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 5 5 1 2 16 5 6 External Devices NVRAM Address Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF Device 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 oA 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F Device Type Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 4693 RS232 1 4693 RS232 2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Scale OEM Store Systems Technical Reference External Devices connector J20 connector J21 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 5 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Reserved Device Addresses 2 16 5 7 Reserved Device Addresses This range of SIO addresses is reserved for future I O devices NVRAM Device Device Address Address Type 00E0 70 Reserved 00E1 71 Reserved 00E2 72 Reserved 00E3 13 Reserved 00E4 74 Reserved 00E5 Ta Reserved 00E6 76 Reserved 00E7 77 Reserved Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 5 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Satellite Terminal Configuration Record Header 2 16 5 8 Satellite Terminal Configuration Record Header SIO devices
93. 4693 Real Time Clock RTC NVRAM Memory Map Subtopics 2 16 1 000A 000D Power Control Alarm Save Area 2 16 2 000E POST Resume Status Byte 2 16 3 000F PPC Hardware Status Byte 2 16 4 0010 007F Master Terminal SIO Configuration Data 2 16 5 0080 00EF Satellite Terminal SIO Configuration Data 2 16 6 07C0 07FF Master Terminal Vital Product Data Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 000A 000D Power Control Alarm Save Area 2 16 1 000A 000D Power Control Alarm Save Area 000A 000B 000C 000D Alarm hour 1 byte of packed decimal values 00 23 Alarm minute 1 byte of packed decimal values 00 59 Alarm day of month 1 byte of packed decimal values 01 31 Real time clock register A 1 byte of hex data value xx The value determines the RTC square wave output when the power is off Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 000E POST Resume Status Byte 2 16 2 000E POST Resume Status Byte The POST resume status byte is 1 byte of hex data 00 03 04 05 06 07 AO Non Resume POST path cold start warm start etc PPC hardware read power on events command failed Memory retention was disabled The Reset switch was pressed when main power was off or the battery discharged before the main power returned PPC hardware read power on status command failed Memory contents were bad The operating system failed to complete Suspend func
94. 4693 point of sale terminal models are available The models are similar in appearance and can attach the same type of I O devices Single byte character set 541 41215 3217 202 Double byte character set 551 43 1 331 222 Distributed by World Trade only The single byte character set models provide 38 V dc and the double byte character set models provide 24 V de for their attached single byte or double byte I O devices This manual discusses only the single byte character set models 541 421 321 and 202 All models can under software control perform the functions necessary to process point of sale transactions including data collection credit authorization price lookup and communication with a host processor or other systems They can also handle general business and administrative operations Subtopics 1 1 1 Available Models Features Memory Subsystem Features Port Interface and Storage Devices Power Subsystem Features Internal System Loads Controls and Indicators for Models 541 421 and 321 Security Features PRPRPRPRPRPR PRPRPRPRPR DIA UOBWhHD Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Available Models 1 1 1 Available Models All models of the 4693 employ the modular design approach of the 4680 System with a distributed I O architecture All I O devices are cable attached to the main processing unit called the system unit These devices can be arranged on the top of the s
95. 7 NVRAM 00A0 00A1 00A2 00A3 00A4 00A5 00A6 00A7 00A8 00A9 OOAA OOAB OOAC OOAD OOAE OOAF Device Address Address 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 at 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F Device Type 4680 Printer Model 2 Reserved Reserved Reserved 4680 Printer Model 3 Reserved Fiscal Printer Model 2 Reserved Fiscal Printer Model 3 Reserved 25 character R J 2 30 character R J 2 5956 Kanji R J 5957 compact R J OEM OEM Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 5 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Readers and Scanning Devices 2 16 5 4 Readers and Scanning Devices Readers and scanners connect to the 4693 via tailgate sockets 4B 5A 5B 9A 9B and 9C NVRAM 00B0O 00B1 00B2 00B3 00B4 00B5 00B6 00B7 00B8 00B9 OOBA OOBB OOBC 00BD OOBE OOBF SAD kB A KR DB BR KR DR BB BR BBS Device Address Address YPHAUVUADPOAINHAOBWNEHO Device Type l track MSR 1 track MSR PIN Pad Reserved OCR 9A OCR 9B 2 track MSR 2 track MSR 3 track MSR 3 track MSR 5A or MSR on 5B 5A 5B 5A or MSR on 5B or MSR on Checkout scanner 4B 9A Hand held scanner 4B Reserved Reserved OEM OEM 9A keyboard keyboard keyboard 9B 9C 9B 9C Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 5 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Monetary Devices 2 16 5 5 Monetary Devices Cash Drawers connect to the 4693 via tailgate sockets 3A and 3B NVRAM Device Device Address Address Type 00Cc0 50
96. Connector and Cable 4683 Video Display Except 5 Inch Connector and Cable 4684 4693 9 Inch Video Display Connector and Cable Point of Sale Terminal Connector and Cable Baseband Network Cable Adapter Baseband Network Cable and Connectors Baseband Network Cable and Data Connector PS 2 Cable to Data Connector PS 2 Baseband to 4684 Baseband Connector 4684 Baseband Network Wrap Plug 4684 Baseband Network Terminator Plug X 25 Interface Co Processor 2 Cable Wiring Wiring Diagrams for the 4683 Base Unit Power Supply Connectors Copyright IBM Corp 1993 CONTENTS 3 ARA e es o ss a o a A E e a o e A E o E o PPP PP PP PP SP SP SP SPS SP Se SP BW WWW Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y NN Dd DN y o INDEX COMMENTS Bb NnF 0 J004unN OMANI HDF uN o 20 ir 12 13 14 lt 15 16 17 GLOSSARY Store Systems Technical Reference Table of Contents J J J al 0 0 30104 WD 10 11 La 13 0 J004unN wo 10 1 or 2 Printer Card Connectors Print Head Operator Keypad Cover Interlock Sensor Document Insert Paper Sensor Home Sensor Capacitor I O Interface Cable Journal Emitter Sensor Customer Receipt Document Insert Motor Transport Motor Journal Ribbon Motor inter Card Connectors I O Interface Cable Signals to Extension Card Document Insert Motor Print Head Transport Motor Print Head Print Head Home Sensor Cover Interlock Sensor
97. Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 14 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Scale Connector and Cable 10 1 15 Scale Connector and Cable Connector j i i 4683 only Line Description Scale Connector 21 1 Scale Inhibit Pin 19 2 L 2 Scale Data 1 Pin 1 4 4 f ai 3 Scale Data 2 Pin 2 4 21 4 Scale Data 4 Pin 3 2AL5 Scale Data 8 Pin 4 21 6 Reserved Pin 22 234 24 4 f ZA Reserved PIN l2 y edp ed 4 4 4 21 8 Reserved Pin 22 23 24 4 4 f 21 9 Reserved Pin Lar 2 355 24 4 21 10 Reserved Pin 22 23 24 4 l 21 11 Reserved Pin 22 23 24 4 f 21 12 Signal Ground Pin 22 23 24 4
98. Corp 1993 5 8 3 1 31 Device c adapter topi adapter topi adapter topi adapter topi adapter topi adapter See topi Store Systems Technical Reference Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 hannel system status CAD Te hannel system status Gs O hs hannel system status CSS Ts hannel interrupt flag Ear LU hannel interrupt flag CDe 8 10 hannel interrupt flag Cv 988 DU 1 i byte i Saa sae Pesas i byte i Saa pas i byte 1 i l byte ESAS pa eres byte i Began set Se i byte i i Timeout request read EC Timeout read EC A level unexpected status A level expected A level Timeout while waiting software POR request while waiting to acquire the level request while waiting level request 7 interrupt 7 interrupt 7 interrupt expected for a response for a response shared buffer from a Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 3 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure Status Bytes 4 and 5 5 8 4 Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure Status Bytes 4 and 5 The following table defines the meaning of failure status bytes 4 and 5 of the device channel adapter Hoy y Table 46 Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns postistonss
99. DAS lhc A A A ee oe ee Pee eee 82 Disk IML 1 I i Load in and verify IML boot record from disk a as A AS A A A 83 Diskette IML 1 i i Diskette recovery from SCSI IML failure Load in and verify IML boot record from diskette Dase MI A ae ee a e o a e O E e e 84 Copy media Stage II image into system RAM AS PELA e o a a E a O EEEE 85 Verify Stage II image checksum Se AA A 86 Store system partition pointer and system partition type i i Jump to Stage II reset vector Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 2 4 Table 33 lists the checkpoints that occur during the initial program in Stage II Table 34 lists the checkpoints that are exceptions Store Systems Technical Reference Checkpoint Codes load Table 33 Checkpoint Codes during IPL Stage II Code Description 6E clear screen clear boot_locn read INT 13H devices 1 i reset the disk parameter table vector 1 i read in the single sector to the boot location validate the boot record disk diskette boot record read successful insure first byte of loaded boot is not zero reset the diskette disk system if the read is unsuccessful test for password request go to boot code 1 i 1 i l insure data pattern first 8 words not all equal 1 i i i i if attempt to RPL via INT 18H test for password request the POST code is running in protected mode ate Sa i Woy Si ay Mg yy al a yy San ga Hy hy Sa a Table 34 Che
100. Device Addresses 2 16 4 8 Master Terminal Configuration Record Header Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Keyboard Devices 2 16 4 1 Keyboard Devices SIO Keyboards connect to the 4693 via tailgate sockets 5A and 5B NVRAM 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 YPHAUVUADPOAIDA UY BWNEHFO THOAWPOMIAUHUBRWNEO Device Address Address Device Type 50 key 5A or operator keyboard 50 key 5B Alphanumeric 5A Alphanumeric 5B Reserved Reserved 4680 Matrix 5A 4680 Matrix 5B 4682 PIN pad PLU keyboard ANPOS 5A ANPOS 5B RPOS Keyboard 5A RPOS Keyboard 5B OEM OEM Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 4 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 2 16 4 2 Display Devices Display Devices SIO Displays connect to the 4693 via tailgate sockets 4A 4B and 9C NVRAM 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 0029 002A 002B 002 002D 002E 002F Device Address Address 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F Device Type A N Fluorescent 4A A N Fluorescent 4B Reserved Reserved Retail Shopper 4A Retail Shopper 4B Reserved Reserved Character graphics Character graphics Character graphics Character graphics OEM OEM 9A 9B 9C A N Operator in Keyboard 5A A N Operator in Keyboard 5B 9A 1 1 2 2 9B 9C operator customer operator customer Copyright IBM C
101. Glossary background application A non interactive program that can be selected from the background application screen or can start automatically when the system is IPLed backup Pertaining to a system device file or facility that can be used in the event of a malfunction or the loss of data backup copy A copy usually of a program or of a library member that is kept in case the original or the working copy is unintentionally altered or destroyed backup diskette A diskette that contains information copied from another diskette It is used in case the original information is unintentionally altered or destroyed bar code A code representing characters by sets of parallel bars of varying thickness and separation that are read optically by transverse scanning base address A numeric value that is used as a reference in the calculation of addresses in the execution of a computer program to or through which the input output devices are connected baseband 1 A frequency band that uses the complete bandwidth of a transmission medium Contrast with broadband carrierband 2 A method of data transmission that encodes modulates and impresses information on the transmission medium without shifting or altering the frequency of the information signal baseband LAN A LAN in which information is encoded multiplexed and transmitted without modulation of a carrier base unit The part of the IBM 4683 point of sale terminal tha
102. Go to the next powered ON 4683 xxl up loop from this 4683 See the store loop layout chart Is U003 displayed Yes No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 5 3 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0130 W005 Message Continue at Step 026 1026 ho From step 024 Is the keyboard OFFLINE light ON Yes No 4 027 i 1 I 1 i i Continue at Step 031 1 i i i At the 4683 press Sl type 2 and press S2 to display the OFFLINE message Note On the ANPOS Keyboard during some procedures and on the Enhanced Alphanumeric Keyboard Esc S1 and Enter S2 Did message W001 display Yes No i 1029 i I 1 i 1 I i Continue at Step 031 1 i 1 i 1031 From steps 027 and 029 Disconnect this 4683 xxl from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No 4 1032 4 Reconnect the 4683 xxl to the store loop and continue at Step 034 1034 From step 032 Go to the next powered ON 4683 xx1 down loop from this 4683 See the store loop layout chart Disconnect this 4683 xxl from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller
103. Guide SA27 3882 IBM 4687 Point of Sale Scanner Model 2 Operator s Guide SA27 3884 IBM 4687 Point of Sale Scanner Model 2 Maintenance Manual SY27 0324 IBM 4696 Point of Sale Scanner Scale Physical Planning Installation and Operation Guide GA27 3965 IBM 4696 Point of Sale Scanner Scale Maintenance Manual SY27 0333 IBM Personal Computer and IBM Personal System 2 IBM Guide to Operations Personal Computer AT P N 6280066 IBM Guide to Operations Personal Computer AT Store Loop Adapter SA27 3694 IBM Hardware Maintenance and Service Personal Computer AT Store Loop Adapter SX27 0296 IBM Personal System 2 Model 50 Quick Reference and Reference Diskette S68X 2247 IBM Personal System 2 Model 60 Quick Reference and Reference Diskette S68X 2213 IBM Personal System 2 Model 70 Quick Reference and Reference Diskette S68X 2308 IBM Personal System 2 Model 80 Quick Reference and Reference Diskette S68X 2284 IBM Personal System 2 Store Loop Adapter A Supplements for the Hardware Maintenance Library SK2T 0319 Cabling A Building Planning Guide for Communication Wiring G320 8059 IBM Cabling System Planning and Installation Guide GA27 3361 IBM Cabling System Catalog G570 2040 IBM PC Network Broadband Guide S68X 2269 IBM Token Ring Network Introduction and Planning Guide GA27 3677 Using the IBM Cabling System with Communication Products GA27 3620 Setup and Verification IBM 4
104. IBM Corp 1993 10 1 33 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4684 Baseband Network Wrap Plug 10 1 34 4684 Baseband Network Wrap Plug PICTURE 63 Figure 67 4684 Baseband Network Wrap Plug Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 34 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4684 Baseband Network Terminator Plug 10 1 35 4684 Baseband Network Terminator Plug PICTURE 64 Figure 68 4684 Baseband Network Terminator Plug Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 35 1 Store Systems Technical Reference X 25 Interface Co Processor 2 Cable Wiring 10 1 36 X 25 Interface Co Processor 2 Cable Wiring PICTURE 65 Figure 69 X 25 Interface Co Processor 2 Cable Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 36 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Wiring Diagrams for the 4683 Base Unit Power Supply Connectors 10 2 Wiring Diagrams for the 4683 Base Unit Power Supply Connectors Subtopics 10 2 1 4683 Power Supply Connector P11 10 2 2 4683 Power Supply Connector P12 10 2 3 4683 Power Supply Connector P13 10 2 4 4683 Power Supply Connector P14 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4683 Power Supply Connector P11 10 2 1 4683 Power Supply Connector P11 A A eye lg A SA ny ai E na Power Supply Power Supply Connector Line Description Connector Line Description P11 1 POR 1 p11 J 5
105. IBM Corp 1993 PREFACE 1 1 SC30 3600 IBM 4690 Store IBM 4690 Store IBM 4690 Store 8030 3582 IBM 4690 Store System System System System Store Systems Technical Reference Store System Libraries Programming Guide SC30 3602 User s Guide SC30 3597 Communications Programming Reference Messages Guide SC30 3598 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 PREFACE 1 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Store System Related Publications Software PREFACE 2 Store System Related Publications Software IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM Retail Industry Programming Support Services IBM Retail Industry Programming Support Services Planning and Installation Guide SC33 0575 IBM Retail Industry Programming Support Services Base Package Programmer s Guide SC33 0576 IBM Point of Sale Subsystem DOS Programming Reference SC30 3621 IBM Retail Industry Programming Support Services Host Communication Package Programmer s Guide SC33 0650 4680 General Sales Application IBM 4680 General Sales Application Planning and Installation Guide GC30 3368 IBM 4680 General Sales Application Guide to Operations SC30 3369 IBM 4680 General Sales Application Programming Guide SC30 3370 IBM 4680 General Sales Application Price Management Feature User s Guide SC30 3461 IBM 4680 General Sales Application Terminal Offline Feature User s Guide SC30 3499 4680 Supermarket Application IBM
106. IS A A A A DE Setup a memory stack for POST Resume A a eee A EE o ENTE E DF Test the SIO adapter as eee e a FO additional protected virtual mode test set up for protected mode verify protected mode Boe E Lee eRe A es A ws On Oe E1 ensure software interrupt 32h works ETEA E AE AETERNE ea EE ENEA E A E E E EE E E e es ETE F2 force an exception Odh ensure it happens Acces eas pre fae int E ts OE i E oh E eS a er en E es F3 verify ldt sdt ltr and str instructions palo o it A E A SA AE AE AAA AAA F4 verify the bounds instruction Lh Pepe ee ee oe AA A AA F5 verify push all and pop all instructions ia a A o as e e e de e ro e 0d F6 verify access rights function correctly bien nen AA N EA E E E S E AA ES F7 verify arpl instruction works A A AA AAA AA F8 verify lsl instruction works a LE feo Eee A E A ee A F9 verify lar instruction works SAA Hate e as FA low meg chip select test that address the correct buffer 1 i set descriptor to screen buffer and ensure i i able 32 lists the checkpoints that occur during the IML process in Stage Table 32 Checkpoint Codes during IML Stage I Code Description it A ASA 6E check for password manufacturing ROM scan jump to IML routine SCSI ESDI initialization code is called is read in and IML boot record Ne ant ace in sg of tee ge E a tre ot eee Sake Ss Si teh ti SR Bg a ta 81 Diskette IML 1 i Load in and verify IML boot record from diskette
107. J1 5 Print wire 6 J1 11 Print wire 1 J1 6 36 V de J1 12 Print wire 3 A RE A oe A ke ae oe oe ar hoe Se Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J2 Operator Keypad 10 3 2 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J2 Operator Keypad J2 Printer Card Connector 4 4 J2 1 Customer receipt paper advance 4 4 f J2 2 Journal paper advance 4 4 J2 3 5 V de return 4 4 l J2 4 Document insert open close 4 4 i J2 5 Test Y Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J3 Cover Interlock Sensor 10 3 3 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J3 Cover Interlock Sensor Printer Card Sensor Connector Line Description Cable Wire J3 1 5 V de return Black 4 4 4 J3 2 5 V de Blue 4 4 4 J3 3 Sensor Green 4 4 4 J3 4 Sen
108. KB RTC NVRAM area location I On return register AH contains the return code 00h Completed successfully 02h NVRAM data is corrupt 32 KB area only 86h Function not supported On return register BX contains the address modified based on bit 6 of register CH and register CL contains the data read Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 3 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 23h Write Byte To NVRAM With CRC Check 4 6 3 2 AL 23h Write Byte To NVRAM With CRC Check This function writes a byte of information to either the 32 KB or the 8 KB NVRAM areas The CRC code is checked to verify that it is good before a write operation to the 32 KB area is performed No checks are performed on the 8 KB RTC NVRAM area The address to write to is supplied in the BX register with bit 15 indicating the desired state of NMI upon exit of this call Control information is provided in the CH register with bit 7 indicating the I O location for this operation and bit 6 indicating address increments On entry register BX contains the address to write Bits 0 through 14 Target address Bit 15 0 NMI is enabled on exit 1 NMI is disabled on exit On entry register CH contains control information Bit 6 1 Increment address Bit 7 0 32 KB NVRAM area location 1 8 KB RTC NVRAM area location Il On entry register CL contains the data to write On return register AH contains the return code 00h Comp
109. Keyboard B Connector Store Systems Technical Reference Enhanced A N Keyboard Connector and Cable 4684 4693 10 1 9 Enhanced A N Keyboard Connector and Cable 4684 4693 PICTURE 38 Figure 42 Enhanced A N Keyboard Cable Continuity Check PICTURE 39 Figure 43 Enhanced A N Keyboard Cable Pin Voltages Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 9 1 Store Systems Technical Reference RS 232C Device Connector and Cable 10 1 10 RS 232C Device Connector and Cable A y Connector RS 232C Connector RS 232C 4683 only Line Description Connector 4683 only Line Description Connector 4 4 4 4 4 4 23 1 Transmit Data Pin 2 2355 Ground Pin 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 23 2 Reserved Reserved 23 6 Clear to Send Pin 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 23 3 Receive Data Pin lt 3 23 1 Data Set Ready Pin 6 amp 8 4 4 4 4 4 4 23 4 Request to Send Pin 4 23 8 Data Terminal Pin 20 i i i Ready i i A PICTURE 40 Figure 44 RS 232C Cable Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 10 1 IO hadi
110. MENU M1 Lis Select COPY OPTION DISKETTE TO REFERENCE DISKETTE from MENU Ul 3 Follow the instructions on the display Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Setting System Date And Time 5 6 3 Setting System Date And Time To start utilities begin at Preparing to Run Utilities in topic 5 6 E Select START UTILITIES from MENU M1 Lis Select SET SYSTEM DATE AND TIME from MENU U1 3 Follow the instructions on the display Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Setting Vital Product Data 5 6 4 Setting Vital Product Data To start utilities begin at Preparing to Run Utilities in topic 5 6 E Select START UTILITIES from MENU M1 Lis Select SET VITAL PRODUCT DATA from MENU Ul 3 Follow the instructions on the display Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Moving the 4684 Securing the Fixed Disk 5 6 5 Moving the 4684 Securing the Fixed Disk To start utilities begin at Preparing to Run Utilities in topic 5 6 E Select START UTILITIES from MENU M1 Lis Select MOVE THE 4684 from MENU Ul 3 Follow the instructions on the display Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Logging Errors 5 6 6 Logging Errors To start an error log E Select START TESTS from MENU M1 Les Select RUN SYSTEM UNIT TESTS from MENU T1 3 Select TEST SYSTEM UNIT from MENU T2 4 Select LOG OR DISPL
111. Mapped Type 1 geese eee i i i 8 KB Memory Mapped or I O Mapped 1 i I i i Type 0 1 i i AE e e SRA SAA AAA l i i 6 KB Memory Mapped 1 1 i i i Type 0 i i i E saaarin aaao kan e aa iA AiE E i l 2KB PS 2 Configuration Reserved 4 4693 NVRAM all of NVRAM RTC NVRAM 8 KB I O Extended Mapped Type 2 64 Bytes Extended User RAM Reserved 50 Bytes User RAM Reserved Timekeeping Data Area Reserved This application program interface API differentiates access to the 32 KB NVRAM and the 8 KB RTC NVRAM by use of a control flag in the register The following functions are accessed by interrupt 15h with register CAh and register AL equal to the number below On return from these functions AL AL AL AL AL AL AL 00h 02h 03h 86h Subtopics 4 6 3 1 AL 4 6 3 2 AL 4 6 3 3 AL 4 6 3 4 AL 4 6 3 5 AL 4 6 3 6 AL 4 6 3 7 AL CH I O requests to the 32 KB NVRAM area include a check of the diagnostic byte that indicates data integrity 22h 23h 28h 29h 2Ah 2Bh 2Ch R W R W R W W No error NVRAM data is corrupt Address out of range Function call not valid 22h 23h 28h 29h 2Ah 2Bh 2Ch ead Byte From NVRAM with CRC check rite Byte To NVRAM with CRC check ead Byte From NVRAM Without CRC check rite Byte To NVRAM Without CRC check ea
112. Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J106 JNL Motion Sensor 10 4 14 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J106 JNL Motion Sensor O Printer Card Sensor Connector Line Description Cable Wire J106 1 5 V de return Black 4 4 4 f J106 2 5 V de Blue 4 4 4 J106 3 Sensor output Green 4 4 4 J106 4 Polarization key No wire 4 4 4 f J106 5 Sensor input White 4 4 4 J106 6 5 V de return Brown A Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 14 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J107 JNL Motor 10 4 15 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J107 JNL Motor Printer Card Motor Connector Line Description Cable Wire J107 1 i 36 V de Black f J107 2 36 V de Green J107 3 Polarization key No wire 4 4 4 J
113. Operating System the retail industry program support services RIPSS operating system or an independently developed operating system 4683 A02 This model is functionally equivalent to the 4683 002 Other than the addition of socket 9A it is the same as the 4683 002 Note In a 4680 Store System a 4683 xx2 relies on a 4683 xx1 or 4684 for all of its processing and storage capability Subtopics 5 1 1 4683 Input Voltages Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4683 Input Voltages 5 1 1 4683 Input Voltages The two input voltage options for the 4683 are Low voltage 100 to 125 V AC rms nominal single phase 50 or 60 Hz High voltage 200 to 240 V AC rms nominal single phase 50 or 60 Hz Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference General Description of the 4684 Point of Sale Terminal 5 2 General Description of the 4684 Point of Sale Terminal The following 4684 point of sale terminal models are available The models are similar in appearance and can attach the same type of I O devices All models can be programmed to perform the user s point of sale functions Models 110 130 and 160 are distributed by World Trade only Model 110 O System board without baseband network 0 1 44 MB diskette drive Model 111 O System board with baseband network O 1 44 MB diskette drive Model 130 O System board without baseband network O 30 MB fixed disk O 1 44 MB diskette
114. Passing the tip of the wand reader over information encoded on a merchandise ticket credit card or employee badge waveform The mathematical representation of a wave especially a graph of deviation at a fixed point versus time wideband Synonym for broadband wiring concentrator A unit that allows multiple attaching devices access to the ring at a central point such as a wiring closet or in an open work area A star wired ring consists of one or more concentrators connected together to form a ring See also access unit work area An area in which terminal devices such as displays keyboards and printers are located Access units may also be located in work areas workstation 1 An I O device that allows either transmission of data or the reception of data or both from a host system as needed to perform a job for example a display station or printer 2 A configuration of I O equipment at which an operator works 3 A terminal or microcomputer usually one connected to a mainframe or network at which a user can perform tasks world Category of identification defined for file access protection xX X 25 A CCITT Recommendation that defines the physical level physical layer link level data link layer and packet level network layer of the OSI Reference Model An X 25 network is an interface between data terminal equipment DTE and data circuit terminating equipment DCE operating in the packet
115. Problem Determination Guide or the Hardware Service Manual for your particular point of sale terminal or store system operating system Subtopics PREFACE 1 Store System Libraries PREFACE 2 Store System Related Publications Software PREFACE 3 Store System Related Publications Hardware Copyright IBM Corp 1993 PREFACE 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Store System Libraries PREFACE 1 Store System Libraries IBM IBM IBM IBM 4693 Point of Sale Terminals IBM 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Introduction and Planning Guide SA27 3977 IBM 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Configuration and Operation Guide SA27 3978 IBM 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Setup Instructions P N 73G1012 IBM 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Quick Reference Card P N 7361022 IBM 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Maintenance Summary SX27 3919 IBM 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Hardware Service Manual SY27 0337 IBM Store Systems Hardware Service Manual for Input Output Devices sY27 0339 IBM 4693 4684 4683 Point of Sale Terminals Parts Catalog S131 0097 4683 4684 Point of Sale Terminals IBM 4683 Point of Sale Terminal Installation Guide SA27 3783 IBM 4684 Point of Sale Terminal Installation Guide SA27 3837 IBM 4684 Point of Sale Terminal Introduction and Planning Guide SA27 3835 IBM 4684 Store Loop Adapter A Installation Testing Problem Determination and Technical Reference SD21 0045 IBM 4683 4684 Point of Sale T
116. Programs Summary Utility Programs Summary Using the System Programs mal Loading the System Programs Flow of 4693 System Programs Menus 3 Test Procedure Configuration Procedure Utilities Procedure Using System Programs Test Procedure Using Operating System Exercisers Resetting Configuration and the Terminal Load POS I O Device Channel Adapter Failure Status Bytes Error Code Failure Status Byte 0 Microprocessor Status Codes Failure Status Byte 1 Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure Status Bytes 4 and 5 CMOS Error Codes Failure Status Byte 6 Dump Error Codes Failure Status Byte 7 Device Channel Adapter System Status Byte Shared Buffer Request Byte Shared Buffer Status Byte wok Device Channel Adapter Interrupt Flag Byte 2 POST Test Device Channel Adapter Errors Device IDs for the 4693 Point of Sale Terminal Device IDs by ID Number 2 Device IDs by Device Type 4693 Real Time Clock Nonvolatile Random Access Memory Map 4 0010 007F Master Terminal SIO Configuration Data JI 0080 00EF Satellite Terminal SIO Configuration Data 6 07C0 07FF Master Terminal Vital Product Data Topic 3 4693 Power On Self Test POST Power On Self Test and the Meaning of Beeps Checkpoint Codes POST Interface Reference Information Memory Retention Store Loop Adapter RIPL Initialization Boot Device Selection Feature Slot Setup POS Data Lookup Table BIOS Data Areas
117. Reference 4684 4693 9 Inch Video Display Connector and Cable 10 1 27 4684 4693 9 Inch Video Display Connector and Cable Connector i 4684 or 4693 Video Connector i Position Number Position Number Signal Name i 1 i 1 Red Video i 6 i 6 Red Return i 3 i 3 Blue Video i 8 i 8 Blue Return i 2 i 2 Green Video i 7 i 7 Green Return 3 3 Horizontal Sync 4 4 Vertical Sync i 1 i sa Sense 1 i 2 2 Sense 2 i 5 i 5 Ground i 0 i 0 Ground PICTURE 56 Figure 60 4684 9 Inch Video Display
118. Signal ground 20 Data terminal ready 4 4 4 8 Data carrier detect 21 Not connected Ho 4 4 9 Not connected 22 Ring indicate 4 4 4 10 Not connected 23 Not connected 4 Ho 4 4 11 Not connected 24 Not connected 4 4 4 4 12 Not connected 25 Not connected 4 Ho 4 4 LS Not connected A E E EE a ENA ty Sy nS ga O O EA A O EET a a Ni A E E PICTURE 42 Figure 46 RS 232C Asynchronous Communications Connector Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 12 1 Store Systems Technical Reference RS 232C Current Loop Wrap Plug 10 1 13 RS 232C Current Loop Wrap Plug Pin 9 Receive Data is connected to pin 18 Transmit Data Pin 11 Receive Return is connected to pin 25 Transmit Return Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 13 1 Store Systems Technical Reference RS 232C EIA Wrap Plug 10 1 14 RS 232C EIA Wrap Plug Pin 2 Transmit Data is connected to pin 3 Receive Data Pin 4 Request to Send is connected to pin 5 Clear to Send Pin 6 Data Set Ready is connected to pin 20 Data Terminal Ready PICTURE 43 Figure 47 Wrap Plug Wiring
119. Supply Output Voltages and Currents 1 1 5 6 Power Supply Output Voltages and Currents Sag det ii a ic ig dos a May ely ii y iS fi a ay yg adc E mig al o ay al a a a o E ley ela a a A Gl il gl San ld reja na ct tng ll Ca il ci le al rca Table 9 Output Voltage and Load Current Distribution A RO A SN SN O A AR A AE AS ORAR PEA O AAN OO AN PERA A A A AS cay 4 Output Nominal Tolerance Maximum Minimum Ripple Level V Voltage V Current A Current A pk pk mV 5L 5 000 5 203 12 000 0 250 50 12L 12 000 5 4 0 800 0 020 100 12L 12 000 5 4 0 350 0 120 240 5SDL Sa O00 4 95 22 4 2 600 0 200 50 Eo ooo 12SDL 12 000 5 4 2 600 0 000 100
120. Synonymous with host computer Hz See hertz te Be IBM Disk Operating System DOS A disk operating system based on MS DOS identifier String of characters used to name elements of a program such as variable names reserved words and user defined function names IML Initial machine load IML image Initial machine load image impedance The combined effect of resistance inductance and capacitance on a signal at a particular frequency inactive 1 Not operational 2 Pertaining to a node or device not connected or not available for connection to another node or device 3 In the IBM Token Ring Network pertaining to a station that is only repeating frames or tokens or both information I frame A frame in I format used for numbered information transfer See also supervisory frame unnumbered frame initialize In a LAN to prepare the adapter and adapter support code if used for use by an application program initial machine load IML 1 A procedure that prepares a device for use 2 In PSS a an initialization procedure that prepares the store controller or the terminal for operation b a portion of the data representing the operational environment loaded into the active storage of the store controller to control its operations and c the procedure for starting the subsystem store controller with a particular supervisor configuration initial program load IPL The initialization pr
121. W008 PROGRAM IS BEING LOADED Find the message in the IBM 4680 Store System Messages Guide To clear the message press Clear Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 10 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Displaying the Terminal Number 5 6 11 Displaying the Terminal Number The first time a point of sale terminal is powered ON a terminal number is not stored in its totals retention The initial point of sale terminal application program load uses a default terminal number During set terminal characteristics STC the terminal number is entered by the operator and stored in totals retention storage This terminal number is permanently assigned unless it is reset or changed by STC To display the terminal number 1 Press Sl type 7 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc S1 and Enter S2 2 Message W012 containing the terminal number appears on the system display To exit If you are in test mode press S2 If you are not in test mode press Clear Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 11 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Changing the Terminal Number 5 6 12 Changing the Terminal Number After the terminal number has been entered you may want to change it Note You can display the current terminal number by pressing S1 typing 7 and pressing S2 Message W012 containing the terminal number appears on the system display Press Clear to
122. active configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 4 2 auto configuration 2 4 4 automatic configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 3 2 1 B backup and restore system programs 2 5 1 backup configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 4 2 5 4 6 backup store controller configuration 8 2 2 store controller 8 2 1 backup system diskette 2 5 1 backup the 4684 reference diskette 5 6 1 baseband LAN remote IPL RIPL 4683 4684 5 7 Basic Input Output System BIOS 4693 advanced BIOS ABIOS 4 8 fixed disk and diskette 4 5 hardware interrupts 4 4 NVRAM BIOS functions 4 6 3 NVRAM system services 4 6 3 POS device control 4 6 2 POS keyboard 4 7 programmable power control 4 6 1 software interrupt routines 4 1 system services 4 6 video 4 4 beaconing 4680 store loop 6 2 6 beeps on POST 4693 See POST errors checkpoints 4693 BIOS See Basic Input Output System BIOS 4693 ak ck Ta c cable and wiring diagrams 4683 4684 3687 point of sale scanner model 002 connector and cable 10 1 21 4683 video display 5 inch distributed connector and cable 10 1 25 4683 video display except 5 inch connector and cable 10 1 26 4696 4697 point of sale scanner connector and cable 10 1 22 asynchronous port 4693 10 1 19 cash drawer A connector and cable 10 1 1 cash drawer B connector and cable 10 1 2 coin dispenser connector and cable 10 1 3 display A alphanumeric operator or shopper connector and cable 10 1 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 INDEX 1 Sto
123. active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i f l 1032 f i Return to the 4683 xx1 and switch POWER OFF Service the 4683 base unit 1 i 1 i Return to the 4683 xxl and examine its store loop receptacle for damage Is the store loop receptacle OK Yes No i 1034 1 i Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop Copyright IBM Corp 1993 74 4 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0120 W004 Message Correct the problem by exchanging the store loop cable attached to the 4683 1036 From steps 028 and 030 Is the store loop cable plugged into the store loop adapter on the active store controller See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Yes No I i 1037 Correct the problem by plugging the cable into the store loop adapter 1 i 1 i Disconnect the active store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle Display the system message at the active store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No i 1039 i 1 i 1 The problem is in the active store controller the store loop adapter or the store loop adapter cable Record keywords CONTROL
124. approximately period when the cursor or minus appears in the upper right corner of the display The key sequence required varies depending on the type of keyboard you are using and where it is attached O For keyboards attached to socket 5A or 5B that have a Ctrl key press and hold the Ctrl key then press S1 Ctrl S1 when the cursor appears at the right side O For keyboards attached to socket 5A or 5B that has no Ctrl key just press the Sl O For keyboards attached to the Kybd PICTURE 8 socket PS 2 Type press and hold the Ctrl key and the Alt key and then press the Insert key Ctrl Alt Ins when the cursor appears at the right side 4 Switch Ready mode ON and look for the cursor to appear in the upper right corner of the display 5 When the cursor appears enter the appropriate key sequence as defined above This enables the terminal to load the system programs from the fixed disk system partition or from the store controller server O If an error code is displayed before the main menu appears see Messages in 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Hardware Service Manual O If you have an audible or visible symptom see Symptoms in 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Hardware Service Manual Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 6 1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Procedure to Load From System Diskettes 2 6 1 2 Procedure to Load From System Diskettes If for some reason you cannot load the system programs from
125. are not permitted to have addresses within the range X 78 through X 7F This space is allocated to store configuration record header information for the satellite terminal NVRAM Device Device Address Address Type 00E8 N A Reserved 00E9 N A Reserved O0EA N A Reserved OOEB N A Satellite terminal workstation status Bit 7 1 One or more SIO devices are present Bits 6 2 reserved Bit 1 1 4693 xx2 AutoPower function is enabled by master terminal POST default 1 Bits 0 reserved OOEC N A Reserved OOED N A Reserved OOEE N A Record ID x 02 OOEF N A Record checksum Checksum of bytes 80H through EEH Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 5 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 07C0 07FF Master Terminal Vital Product Data 2 16 6 07C0 07FF Master Terminal Vital Product Data 07C0 07C1 VPD Record ID and length 1 word of hex data x A840 length includes bytes x 07C0 through x 07FF 07C2 07C8 Machine type and model 7 bytes of ASCII data i e 4693101 07C9 07D0 Mfg plant code and serial number 8 bytes of ASCII data i e 23 00001 07D1 07D 7 Planar card EC number 7 bytes of ASCII data i e 3998224 07D8 07DE Power supply EC number 7 bytes of ASCII data i e 395822A 0O7DF 07FD nulls 31 bytes of x 00 O7FE O7FF VPD CRC checksum for bytes x 07C0 through x 07FD Note Satellite terminal vital product data is stored in 4693 xx2 NVRAM at address OCOOH Master terminal and satellite terminal VPD reco
126. as numeric for the purpose of calculating the checksum See also module integrity value circuit 1 A logic device 2 One or more conductors through which an electric current can flow clear To delete data from a screen or from memory COBOL Common business oriented language A high level programming language based on English that is used primarily for business applications command 1 A request for performance of an operation or execution of a program 2 A character string from a source external to a system that represents a request for system action communication adapter A circuit card and its associated software that enable a device such as a personal computer to be connected to a network or another computer examples include binary synchronous asynchronous modem and LAN adapters communication channel A path for transmitting information from one location to another compile 1 To translate all or part of a program expressed ina high level language into a computer program expressed in an intermediate language an assembly language or a machine language 2 To prepare a machine language program from a computer program written in another programming language by making use of the overall logic structure of the program or generating more than one computer instruction for each symbolic statement or both as well as performing the function of an assembler 3 To translate a source program into an executable pro
127. code Contrast with double byte character set small computer system interface SCSI An input and output bus that provides a standard interface between the OS 2 multimedia system and peripheral devices SNA Systems Network Architecture socket Synonym for port 2 source The origin of any data involved in a data transfer source address A field in the medium access control MAC frame that identifies the location from which information is sent Contrast with destination address stack Data structure to which values are added and from which values are removed at only one end That is the last value placed onto the stack must be the first value removed from the stack The stack passes variables from one routine to another and stores all local variables for each iteration of a recursive procedure start stop tape drive A magnetic tape unit that stops at each inter block gap when reading or writing data Contrast with streaming tape drive state See conversation state state transition The act of moving from one conversation state to another store controller A programmable unit in a network used to collect data to direct inquiries and to control communication within a point of sale system store loop In the IBM Store System a cable over which data is transmitted between the store controller and the point of sale terminals Store Loop Adapter A hardware component used to connect the loop to a control unit such as
128. device is configured or attached to that socket For a list of point of sale terminal device IDs see Device IDs for the Point of Sale Terminal in topic 5 6 8 Press S2 after each message is displayed O If a socket has no device configured or attached its message is not displayed O An error message may be displayed when you IPL the point of sale terminal if a socket has a device configured but not attached When message Z025 displays press S2 When message Z012 displays this indicates that the operation is complete If an error was discovered O The configuration must be corrected at the store controller See the IBM 4680 Store System User s Guide to correct the configuration E Q The correct device must be connected to the correct socket at the point of sale terminal Press 8S2 If customer setup CSU has never been run it is automatically loaded and started If CSU has been run the initial point of sale terminal application program is loaded Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 9 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Displaying a Point of Sale Terminal Message 5 6 10 Displaying a Point of Sale Terminal Message The lights on the keyboard give you status information about the system When one of these lights comes on the system is sending a message to the point of sale terminal system display The types of messages are O A wait message See Displaying a Wait Message in topic 5 6 10 1 O An offlin
129. disk of the controller and on the backup diagnostic diskette These tests are designed for use by operator or service personnel A test is provided for each point of sale device attached to the terminal Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 3 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Point of Sale Exercisers 2 3 5 Point of Sale Exercisers These exercisers reside on the fixed disk of the store controller They are designed for use by operator or service personnel An exerciser is provided for each point of sale device that is attached and configured See 4690 Store System Messages Guide for instructions on how to request these exercisers Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 3 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Configuration Programs Summary 2 4 Configuration Programs Summary There are several configuration programs available in the system programs Some are only available when a video display and an enhanced A N keyboard console are attached This is known as a video console Also some programs that deal specifically with the fixed disk and diskette drive are only available when running on a Model 541 that has a fixed disk The configuration programs are View configuration Print configuration Change configuration Auto configuration Save configuration Restore configuration Set and view SCSI device configuration Running configuration should only be necessary when the options and devices attached to the terminal are changed Mo
130. diskette It is the responsibility of the operating system to disable interrupt 10h redirection if the video BIOS function is not desired See INT 15h AH 92h AL 00h in topic 4 6 2 for a way to disable this redirection feature POS video BIOS supports only VGA modes 13h and below Any request to set the video mode above 13h is ignored by BIOS When the POS video BIOS is active a 2 x 20 display viewport of the 25 x 80 screen is shown at the last written character position Notes 1 The cursor is not displayed on the SIO displays 2 Mode 0 13h is not supported Displays are 2 lines x 20 columns of alphanumeric data APA graphics are not supported 3 Displayable characters include code page 437 20h through 7Fh There is no support for characters outside this range because the characters are not represented consistently across all POS displays 4 Some displays fold lower case letters to upper Case 5 Power on default mode is 3 6 In mode 2 all off screen actions set the carry flag on return 7 In mode 3 the carry flag retains the video BIOS return state The POS video BIOS intercepts the following video BIOS calls for displaying data on the POS attached display AH 00h Set mode clear screen only AH 02h Set cursor position AH 03h Read cursor position AH 06h Clear screen only AH 07h Not supported AH 08h Not supported AH 09h Write character attribute at cursor
131. drawers for the 4683 4684 family It is available in two voltage ranges The low voltage nominal input range is 100 127 V rms and the high nominal input range is 200 240 V rms For more detailed information refer to 177 Watt 38 V dc Version Multi Output Power Supply Specification P N 74F6263 AC input is applied through an appliance coupler per IEC 320 Sheet C14 AC input protection is provided by a non replaceable fuse located internal to the power supply A convenience outlet per IEC 320 2 2 Sheet F is provided for the attachment of a supported monitor The power to the convenience outlet is controlled by the Mode Control switch and is fused for overcurrent protection with an externally accessible fuse The fuse rating for low voltage applications is 2 5 A 250 V Time Delay 1 25 inch x 25 inch and for high voltage applications 2 5 A 250 V IEC12 Sheet III Time Lag 5mm x 20mm Note Only supported video displays should be attached to the convenience outlet Attachment of any other devices including power strips violates safety certifications The power supply also provides overtemperature overvoltage and overcurrent protection The power supply resets to normal operation if the fault is removed and the Mode Control switch cycled In addition the power supply illuminates indicator lights identifying overtemperature and overcurrent conditions Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 5 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Power
132. drive Model 131 0 System board with baseband network 0 30 MB fixed disk O 1 44 MB diskette drive Model 160 O System board without baseband network O 60 MB fixed disk 0 1 44 MB diskette drive Model 161 0 System board with baseband network O 60 MB fixed disk O 1 44 MB diskette drive Model 200 System board with 80286 processor Up to 8 MB system board memory Up to 160 MB fixed disk 1 44 MB diskette drive Model 300 O System board with 80386SX processor O System board side card attachment for baseband network or token ring adapter O Up to 8 MB system board memory 0 Up to 160 MB fixed disk O 1 44 MB diskette drive Subtopics 5 2 1 4684 Input Voltages Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4684 Input Voltages 5 2 1 4684 Input Voltages The two input voltage options for the 4684 are Low voltage 100 to 125 V AC rms nominal single phase 50 or 60 Hz High voltage 200 to 240 V AC rms nominal single phase 50 or 60 HZ Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 2 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4684 Configuration and Utility Procedures 5 3 4684 Configuration and Utility Procedures Subtopics 5 3 1 MENUs for Configuration Procedures 5 3 2 Understanding the Configuration Process 5 3 3 Primary Keyboards and Displays for the 4684 Terminal 5 3 4 4684 and 4683 Point of Sale Configuration Record 5 3 5 Resetting the POS Configuration in the 4684 5 3 6 Resetting the System Un
133. from a PLD use the following procedure Ty Switch POWER OFF at the store controller 2 While you are waiting about 20 seconds insert the supplemental diskette into diskette drive A 3 3 Switch power ON at the store controller 4 Wait for the supplemental diskette to complete loading Loading is complete when the SYSTEM MAIN MENU displays 5 At this point the fixed disk has been corrected for sectors that were not complete as a result of the PLD Remove the supplemental diskette and IPL from the fixed disk 6 The store controller should now load as it did prior to the PLD If the store controller does not IPL it may be necessary to recover the 4680 Operating System from the previously prepared backup diskettes or tape from streaming tape drive If any messages or codes are displayed as a result of the IPL failure find the message in the IBM 4680 Store System Messages Guide 7 After fixing the problem return the supplemental diskette to its secure storage location Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 2 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Displaying a Store Controller Message 8 2 4 Displaying a Store Controller Message When SYSTEM MESSAGE AVAILABLE appears in the lower right of the store controller display screen there is a message available that has not been displayed You can use the following procedure at any time to see the ten most recent messages in the system message file You can view all of the messa
134. i 1 1 i i el 1 i i X 00000 9 Note The 64 KB window at X A4000 for EMS if used restricts applications to video modes 0 through 6 Figure 17 4684 Memory Map Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 12 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4684 Communication Adapters Port Assignments 5 9 4684 Communication Adapters Port Assignments Subtopics 5 9 1 4684 Asynchronous Adapter System Board 5 9 2 IBM Dual Asynchronous Adapter 5 9 3 IBM Multiprotocol Communication Adapter Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 9 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4684 Asynchronous Adapter System Board 5 9 1 4684 Asynchronous Adapter System Board Default This port is assigned as a serial port Serial_1 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 9 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference IBM Dual Asynchronous Adapter 5 9 2 IBM Dual Asynchronous Adapter The connectors on the IBM dual asynchronous adapter are automatically assigned by the automatic configuration program One card installed Connector 1 Default This connector is assigned to the following serial port if one dual asynchronous adapter is present Serial_2 connector 1 on the dual asynchronous adapter Connector 2 Default This connector is assigned to the following serial port if one dual asynchronous adapter is present Serial_3 connector 2 on the dual asynchronous adapter Two cards installed Connector 1 Default This connector is assigned
135. in the read only memory ROM runs automatically when Ready mode is switched ON and storage retention is disabled All basic functions of the terminal hardware are tested and errors are reported via an eight digit error code displayed on the console display See Messages in 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Hardware Service Manual Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 3 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference System Unit Tests 2 3 2 System Unit Tests The system unit tests reside on the fixed disk of the controller and on the backup diagnostic diskette These tests are designed primarily for use by service personnel A test is provided for each device in the terminal such as the diskette drive the fixed disk drive and option adapters Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 3 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Verification Tests 2 3 3 Verification Tests The verification tests reside on the fixed disk of the controller and on the backup diagnostic diskette The verification tests test the basic functions of the master terminal and satellite terminal with a minimum of operator intervention These tests are used primarily to verify operation after initial installation or after a service call These tests can be used by the operator or service personnel Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 3 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Point of Sale Device Tests 2 3 4 Point of Sale Device Tests The point of sale device tests reside on the fixed
136. is for reference only To resolve the problem described here see message W764 Te Message W764 is displayed at the store controller Disconnect the last 4683 from the store loop If normal operation resumes leave this failing 4683 off the store loop until it is repaired If removing the last 4683 does not resolve the situation reconnect this 4683 to the store loop and disconnect the store controller T the result of this step is an offline message W003 at the 4683s the store controller is failing Normal operation cannot be re established unless a backup store controller takes over the store loop If the previous step does not show that the store controller is failing reconnect the store controller to the store loop The problem is in the store loop wiring segment between the store controller and the last 4683 on the store loop Normal operation cannot resume until this segment is bypassed or repaired Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 9 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Topic 7 Store Loop Maintenance Analysis Procedures 7 0 Topic 7 Store Loop Maintenance Analysis Procedures Subtopics 7 1 Store Loop MAPs 7 2 MAP 0100 W001 Message 7 3 MAP 0110 W003 Message 7 4 MAP 0120 W004 Message 7 5 MAP 0130 W005 Message 7 6 MAP 0140 W762 Message 7 7 MAP 0150 W764 Message 7 8 MAP 0160 W772 Message Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 0 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Store Loop MAPs 7 1 Store Loop MAPs
137. keyboard key is stuck or the keyboard is failing or the system board is failing One Long and One Short Beep The video adapter card is failing One long beep and Two Short Beeps The video subsystem is failing or a video I O adapter ROM is not readable If the one long and two short beep sequence is sounded twice both the system planar board and an option adapter video are failing On a terminal that does not have a video display the serial I O adapter is failing Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Checkpoint Codes 3 2 Checkpoint Codes Table 31 lists the checkpoints displayed on the primary display of a terminal during Power On Self Test POST These checkpoint codes are used primarily during manufacturing test and are seen in the lower right corner of a video display during POST When a POST error is detected a checkpoint code may be visible They are listed here for reference only and need not be used during normal maintenance activity A Table 31 Checkpoint Codes pato a o te cdo a dio T Code Description 4 A l 01 R W test the 80386 registers with pattern disable CMOS clock interrupts turn off video perform channel reset possess pit os oes lot Boe fee ee ee Bie eee Be eee ee bee 02 ROM checksum hb poolen Sie ee oe ew ee eek a 03 verify planar enable setup latch l verify planar RAM enabled A Y f 04 verif
138. memory address C000 0000 and ends when it reaches the top memory address E000 0000 During the process each RPL adapter steals interrupt 18H from its previous owner Therefore the RPL adapter token ring store loop PC LAN etc installed at the highest address in the memory mapped 1 0 space is the final owner of interrupt 18H Subtopics 3 36201 RPL Configuration Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference RPL Configuration 3 3121 RPL Configuration RTC CMOS address 13H bit 5 RPL Installed is set by the reference diskette software to enable RPL Under normal conditions the RPL Installed configuration bit in the RTC CMOS determines if the interrupt 18H interface is used to IPL the system However if RTC CMOS or NVRAM setup data is corrupted and the reference diskette is not found the bootstrap loader calls interrupt 18H as a last resort Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 2 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Boot Device Selection 3 3 3 Boot Device Selection Bootstrap loader interrupt 19H microcode selects an appropriate IPL device from a prioritized list The hardware system can have two boot device lists that it can act on A default boot priority list is always imbedded in POST ROM A selectable boot device list can optionally be stored in NVRAM Implementation of both lists conform to current PS 2 architecture Subtopics 3 3 3 1 Default Boot Priority List 3 3 3 2 Selectable Boot
139. mode and connected to public data networks by dedicated circuits X 25 networks use the connection mode network Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 25 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary service MS DOS is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 26 Store Systems Technical Reference Index Numerics 4680 store system description 6 0 4680 terminals description configuration 5 6 9 configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 3 description of 4683 5 1 description 4684 5 2 device ID 5 6 8 dump switch 9 2 input voltage 4683 input voltage 4684 offline message 5 6 10 2 power on self test 5 6 16 reference information 5 0 storage dump 9 2 system message 5 6 10 3 utilities 4684 reference diskette 5 3 wait message 5 6 10 1 4680 collecting problem information collecting information about a problem 9 0 to 9 6 creating problem analysis diskette 4680 9 5 keywords problem data collection form 9 7 problem data collection form 9 7 status request 9 6 storage dump report 9 3 system log report 9 4 468x terminals 5 0 4693 BIOS See Basic Input Output System BIOS 4693 4693 configuration See configuration 4693 4693 reference diskette configuration procedure 2 7 introduction 2 1 loading 2 6 1 menus 2 6 2 test procedure 2 6 3 utilities procedure 2 8 4693 system unit See system unit 4693 4693 terminals description model descriptions 1 1 46xx local area network LAN 8 0 A
140. module on a network dedicated to providing a specific service to a network 2 On a LAN a data station that provides facilities to other data stations Examples are a file server print server and mail server session 1 A connection between two application programs that allows them to communicate 2 In SNA a logical connection between two network addressable units that can be activated tailored to provide various protocols and deactivated as requested 3 The data transport connection resulting from a call or link between two devices 4 The period of time during which a user of a node can communicate with an interactive system usually the elapsed time between log on and log off 5 In network architecture an association of facilities necessary for establishing maintaining and releasing connections for communication between stations shared RAM Random access memory on an adapter that is shared by the computer in which the adapter is installed signal 1 A time dependent value attached to a physical phenomenon for conveying data 2 A variation of a physical quantity used to convey data sign on 1 A procedure to be followed at a terminal or workstation to establish a link to a computer 2 To begin a session at a workstation single byte character set SBCS A character set in which each character Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 21 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary is represented by a one byte
141. modules to replace the modules in the active program subdirectory The first diskette of the set must contain a product control file that describes which product the modules are to be applied to and a list of all modules that are to be replaced coupler A device that connects a modem to a telephone network See also acoustic coupler cps Characters per second Used to measure the printing speed of a printer CRC Cyclic redundancy check credit authorization The process of accepting or rejecting a request for credit approval cursor A movable point of light or a short line that indicates where the next character is to be entered on the display screen customer receipt An itemized list of merchandise purchased and paid for by the customer cyclic redundancy check CRC Synonym for frame check sequence FCS iD j DASD Direct access storage device data 1 A representation of facts concepts or instructions in a formalized manner suitable for communication interpretation or processing by human or automatic means 2 Any representations such as characters or analog quantities to which meaning is or might be assigned data circuit terminating equipment DCE In a data station the equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal equipment DTE and the line data file A collection of related data records organized in a specific manner for example a payroll file one
142. of an IBM product that may be ordered separately by the customer Feature Expansion A card that plugs into an IBM 4683 point of sale terminal and allows additional devices to be used Federal Communications Commission FCC A board of commissioners appointed by the President under the Communications Act of 1934 having the power to regulate all interstate and foreign communications by wire and radio originating in the United States field On a data medium or a storage medium a specified area used for a particular category of data for example a group of character positions Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 9 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary used to enter or display wage rates on a panel file A named set of records stored or processed as a unit For example an invoice may form a record and the complete set of such records may form a file See also data file and data set file allocation table FAT A table used by the operating system to allocate space on a disk for a file and to locate and chain together parts of the file that may be scattered on different sectors so that the file Can be used in a random or sequential manner file server 1 A store controller that maintains prime versions of all non system mirrored files 2 A high capacity disk storage device or a computer that each computer on a network can access to retrieve files that can be shared among the attached computers file type The attribu
143. of the system board Revision level of the POST BIOS Reference diskette version Diagnostic program version Configuration program version IML file name if available Serial I O level Power control level Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 5 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Update System Programs Model 541 only 2 5 7 Update System Programs Model 541 only This utility is used to update the programs in the system partition from the system diskettes Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 5 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Set Startup Sequence Model 541 only 2 5 8 Set Startup Sequence Model 541 only This utility allows selection of the search sequence for a boot device Boot devices are devices such as a diskette drive a fixed disk or a remote initial program load RIPL adapter such as a token ring Ethernet PC network baseband or store loop adapter A default sequence is selected automatically when there is no video display Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 5 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Display Memory Map Video Console only 2 5 9 Display Memory Map Video Console only This utility displays a map indicating how the memory is being utilized by the installed adapters This utility is not available when there is no video display Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 5 9 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Display NVRAM Error Log 2 5 10 Display NVRAM Error Log This utility displays the NVRAM erro
144. on the Enhanced Alphanumeric Keyboard Esc S1 and Enter S2 Is message W004 still displayed Yes No 4 1044 4 i i i i The failure symptom has changed Follow the User Response for the message in the IBM 4680 Store System Messages Guide i HO E Follow the Repair Action for the symptom 1 i i i Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the active store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages Copyright IBM Corp 1993 74 6 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0130 W005 Message 7 5 MAP 0130 W005 Message The 4683 xx1 is not receiving store loop communications i he store loop is open up loop from the 683 displaying message W005 4683 xxl is failing up loop he 4683 xxl store loop cable is ailing he 4683 base unit is failing he primary store controller is ailing 1 i i i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 1 i l 1 1 i j 1 1 i i i The 4683 xx1 store loop adapter test was run automatically and it detected no problems 1 1 i l i 1 i i 1 i i 1 1 i i 1 1 i i l i i i 1 1 i I he backup store controller is failing he distance exceeds 4000 feet 1220 eters between powered ON 4683 xxls on he store loop It is sending beacons but not receiving beacons t3 HH MHA HHP BH The 4683 keyboard OFFLINE light
145. only 2 5 set startup sequence 2 5 set time and date 2 5 update system programs 2 5 vital product data 2 5 Vv verification tests 2 3 3 video display pinout assignment 4693 1 1 4 2 view active configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 4 8 viewing active configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 4 2 viewing configuration 2 4 1 viewing configuration 4693 vital product data 4683 4684 setting 5 6 4 vital product data 4693 voltage 4683 input 5 1 1 voltage 4684 input 5 2 1 VPD See vital product data 4693 WwW wait light 4683 4684 5 6 10 5 6 10 1 wiring diagrams 4683 4684 See cable and wiring diagrams 4683 4684 x x 25 artic communications 4693 tests 2 6 3 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 INDEX 8 Store Systems Technical Reference Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You COMMENTS Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You Store Systems Technical Reference Publication No SY27 0336 00 Overall how satisfied are you with the information in this book Legend Very satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Very dissatisfied ok WNHE o o e Gla re A Rea ee ee o ee o Be Se ae se 1 2 3 4 3 HO Accurate i i HO Complete i Easy to find HO Easy to understand i
146. other inquiry and data entry functions 2 The IBM 4683 4684 Point of Sale Terminal A unit that provides central processing point of sale transaction data collection credit authorization price look up and other inquiry and data entry functions polling 1 Interrogation of devices for purposes such as to avoid contention to determine operational status or to determine readiness to send or receive data 2 In data communication the process of inviting data stations to transmit one at a time The polling process usually involves the sequential interrogation of several data stations polling characters address A set of characters specific to a terminal and the polling operation response to these characters indicates to the computer whether the terminal has a message to enter port 1 An access point for data entry or exit 2 A connector ona device to which cables for other devices such as display stations and Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 18 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary printers are attached Synonymous with socket post 1 To affix to a usual place 2 To provide items such as return code at the end of a command or function 3 To define an appendage routine 4 To note the occurrence of an event POST Power On Self Test power line disturbance PLD Interruption or reduction of electrical power Power On Self Test POST A series of diagnostic tests that are run automatically each ti
147. press S1 type 2 and press S2 to display the OFFLINE message Note On the ANPOS Keyboard during some procedures and on the Enhanced Alphanumeric Keyboard Esc S1 and Enter S82 Did message W003 change to message W005 Yes No 4 1006 4 i 1 i 1 i Switch POWER OFF at the 4683 xxl Service the 4683 base unit 1 i 1 i Remove shorting plug 1B from the end of the cable Plug the store loop cable back into socket 1 Continue at Step 012 1008 From step 004 Is the keyboard OFFLINE light ON at any other 4683 xx1 Yes No i i 1009 Switch POWER OFF at the 4683 ij 1 i i i The 4683 displaying message W003 is failing 1 i Service the 4683 base unit 1 i i At the other 4683 s press Sl type 2 and press S2 to display the OFFLINE message s Note On the ANPOS Keyboard during some procedures and on the Enhanced Alphanumeric Keyboard Esc S1 and Enter S82 Did message W003 display Yes No 4 1011 4 I 1 i 1 i The 4683 displaying message W003 is failing Switch POWER OFF at the 4683 Service the 4683 base unit i i 1 I From step 007 Is there a backup store controller connected to this store loop Yes No i 1013 Continue at Step 025 1 i j i Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 3 2 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0110 W003 Me
148. pressing F3 after pressing Esc If you plan to create a problem analysis diskette continue at step 5 of Creating a 4680 Problem Analysis Diskette in topic 9 5 When the CREATE PROBLEM ANALYSIS DISKETTE screen appears select System Log Report and Terminal Dump or Controller Dump Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 4 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Creating a 4680 Problem Analysis Diskette 9 5 Creating a 4680 Problem Analysis Diskette 1 Press System Request on the store controller keyboard 2 The SYSTEM KEYS screen displays 3 On the SYSTEM KEYS screen enter s Start New Application a e o li a e a ed tl a o a e PE e e rd li a o di py a ed ca YPE a A e a id o a lh is a By co ii A e Ay a A Lee Sy l SYSTEM KEYS i i Type one of the following letters or a function key 1 i m Access the System Messages Display screen i e Access the Store Control Functions screen b Access the Background Application Control screen s Start New Application Displays System Main Menu w Access the Window Control screen n Pass control to the next higher numbered window owned by this operator Next p Pass control to the next lower numbered window owned by this user Preceding a Access the Auxiliary Console Control screen 1 I 1 i i Message line F1 F2 F3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9Disconnct i Status line i feas aa eee ENE o NE E E E O ee E E 4 On the SYSTEM MAIN MENU enter 6 Pro
149. slots Installed with a system planar side card Model 300 only 3 If two token ring adapters are installed only one of the adapters can have RIPL ROM N Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 7 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Configuration 5 7 3 Configuration Use the following procedure to support RIPL on the 4684 Models 1xx 200 300 using version 3 00 of the 4684 reference diskette version 3 00 supersedes all prior versions of the reference diskette for all models of the 4684 1 Follow the installation and operation instructions listed below to personalize the CONFIG SYS file on a backup copy of the version 3 00 reference diskette any language For baseband LAN configurations only you can optionally personalize the EFEF ADF file on a backup copy of the version 3 00 reference diskette any language 2 Enable the RIPL function for 4684 token ring or baseband LAN by using the updated backup copy of the version 3 00 reference diskette to configure the 4684 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 7 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Installation Instructions 5 7 4 Installation Instructions RIPL Configuration Driver Installation Instructions for the 4684 Model 1xx 200 300 Reference Diskette Version 3 00 For 4684 systems configured with token ring or baseband LAN For each language you wish to support edit the CONFIG SYS file on a backup copy of the 4684 version 3 00 reference diskette root directory and enabl
150. store i loop layout chart Continue at Step 018 1 I 1 i From step 017 Disconnect this 4683 xxl from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No 4 1019 4 i 1 I 3 i i Reconnect the 4683 xxl to the store loop and continue at Step 027 1 I i i Is the store loop cable plugged into socket 1 on this 4683 xx1 base unit See Figure 29 in topic 7 1 Yes No i 021 i 1 i i Correct the problem by plugging the cable into socket 1 i i 1 i Unplug the store loop cable from socket 1 on this 4683 xx1 base unit Attach shorting plug 1B to the 4683 end of the cable See Figure 29 in topic 7 1 Plug the other end of the cable into the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No 1 f i 1023 i Return to the 4683 xxl and switch POWER OFF Service the 4683 base unit I 1 i Return to the 4683 xxl and examine its store loop receptacle for damage Is the store loop receptacle OK Yes No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 74 3 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 01
151. store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1023 From step 014 Look for 4683 xx1s up loop from this 4683 with message W001 displayed See the store loop layout chart Are there any 4683 xxls up loop from this 4683 with message W001 displayed Yes No i i i 1024 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 2 3 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0100 W001 Message Continue at Step 030 Return to the active store controller and check each 4683 xx1 down loop until you find one displaying message W001 Is this the first powered ON 4683 xx1 down loop from the active store controller Yes No 1 1 4 1026 o Continue at Step 030 027 Disconnect this 4683 xxl from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No 1 4 1028 4 Reconnect the 4683 xxl to the store loop and continue at Step 051 1030 From steps 024 and 026 Disconnect this 4683 xxl from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M k
152. the remaining bytes in the bootstrap file and 2 CRC characters the CRC is modulo 8 Example of a load block on the loop nnnn CRC x UCAOS C400 wesw okey E OZ bytes OE data rs ra e MRAM This message is an example of bootstrap load block number 4 that has 512 bytes of data unless it is the last block in which Case it has the number of bytes of data left in the file up to 512 The actual load data consists of a 2 byte sequence number followed by the next sequential 512 bytes of the bootstrap file Copyright IBM Corp 1993 22 2 2 3 Test Programs Summary The following are Except for POST Power on self test POST System unit tests Verification tests Point of sale POS device tests POS Exercisers Store Systems Technical Reference Test Programs Summary available for 4693 terminals the tests for Model 541 are part of the system programs that reside in the system partition as well as on the diagnostic diskette For medialess Models 421 and 321 connected via the store loop or local area network LAN the tests are downloaded over the store loop or network upon request Subtopics 2 3 1 Power On Self Tests POST 2 3 2 System Unit Tests 2 3 3 Verification Tests 2 3 4 Point of Sale Device Tests 2 3 5 Point of Sale Exercisers Copyright IBM Corp 1993 23 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Power On Self Tests POST 2 3 1 Power On Self Tests POST The power on self test that resides
153. the IBM Personal Computer AT streamer Synonym for streaming tape drive streaming tape drive A magnetic tape unit especially designed to make a nonstop dump or restore of magnetic disks without stopping at inter block gaps Synonymous with streamer Contrast with start stop tape drive subroutine Section of code that performs a specific task and is logically separate from the rest of the program subsystem A secondary or subordinate system or programming support usually capable of operating independently of or asynchronously with a controlling system supervisory S frame A frame in supervisory format used to transfer supervisory control functions See also information frame unnumbered frame SVC Switched virtual circuit switch On an adapter a mechanism used to select a value for enable or disable a configurable option or feature switched virtual circuit SVC A virtual circuit that is requested by a virtual call It is released when the virtual circuit is cleared synchronous 1 Pertaining to two or more processes that depend upon the occurrence of a specific event such as a common timing signal 2 Occurring with a regular or predictable timing relationship Synchronous Data Link Control SDLC A discipline conforming to subsets of the Advanced Data Communication Control Procedures ADCCP of the American National Standards Institute ANSI and High level Data Link Control HDLC of the International Organiz
154. the message in the IBM 4680 Store System Messages Guide 4 To clear the message press Clear Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 10 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Displaying an Offline Message 5 6 10 2 Displaying an Offline Message When the keyboard Of fline light comes on normal system communications have been interrupted and the point of sale terminal is offline not communicating with the store controller You can display a message related to the offline condition by using a system function request If you display the message when the Offline light is ON the message indicates the reason for the current offline condition O If you display the message when the Offline light is OFF the message indicates the reason for a previous offline condition 1 Press S1 type 2 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 2 The offline message appears on the point of sale terminal system display Example of an offline message NOT RESPOND 3 Find the message W004 CONTROLLER DOES in the IBM 4680 Store System Messages Guide 4 To clear the message press Clear Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 10 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Displaying a System Message 5 6 10 3 Displaying a System Message The point of sale terminal receives numerous messages from the system such as Prompting messages Inf
155. the store controller keyboard 2 The SYSTEM KEYS screen displays Fa On the SYSTEM KEYS screen enter c Access Store Control Functions KE ENE e See She ee ee en oe Se eae EEE ts E E E as oe SYSTEM KEYS Type one of the following letters or a function key m Access the System Messages Display screen e Access the Store Control Functions screen b Access the Background Application Control screen s Start New Application Displays System Main Menu w Access the Window Control screen n Pass control to the next higher numbered window owned by this operator Next p Pass control to the next lower numbered window owned by this user Preceding a Access the Auxiliary Console Control screen Message line F1 F2 F3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9Disconnct Status line Note If the STORE CONTROL FUNCTIONS screen does not display after you enter c press Esc 4 On the STORE CONTROL FUNCTIONS screen enter 2 Controller Functions STORE CONTROL FUNCTIONS Select one of the following Terminal Functions Controller Functions System Functions LAN Control Functions System Functions Oa SF G0uNnNRAa Type your selection number then press Enter Message line FIHELP F2 F3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Status line 5 On the CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS screen enter 1 Display Controller Status CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS Select one of the following Display Controller Status Enable Controller RAM Disk Disable Controller RAM Disk Loa
156. this operator Next p Pass control to the next lower numbered window owned by this user Preceding a Access the Auxiliary Console Control screen 1 I i Message line i F1 F2 F3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9Disconnct i Status line i ty a o e o de e a des 4 On the SYSTEM MAIN MENU enter 6 Problem Analysis Reports 4 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O i j SYSTEM MAIN MENU 1 i Select one of the following 1 1 User defined text appears here 2 User defined text appears here 3 File Utilities 4 Installation and Update Aids 5 Problem Analysis Data Collection 6 Problem Analysis Reports T Command Mode 1 i Type your selection number then press ENTER _ 1 1 i i Message line i F1HELP F2 F3 F4 ES F6 F7 F8 FOSIGNOFF Status line i A EE E el ee ee ee ae ee 5 On the PROBLEM ANALYSIS REPORT screen enter 1 Scan System Log Data PROBLEM ANALYSIS REPORT Select one of the following Scan System Log Data Format System Trace Data Format Performance Data Format Dump Data Create Problem Analysis Diskette OS WNER Type your selection number then press ENTER Message line FIHELP F2 F3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Status line Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Requesting a System Log Report On the SYSTEM LOG REPORT screen enter the number corresponding to the System Log section you want F
157. to be asked as well BACKUP CONFIGURATION Allows you to save the 4684 and 4683 configuration data by writing the current configuration to the backup reference diskette RESTORE CONFIGURATION Allows you to retrieve the 4684 or 4683 configuration data from the backup reference diskette and make it the current configuration by writing it into memory in the 4684 Table 38 MENU C2 i Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 4 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu C2 5 4 3 Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu C2 VIEW NEW 4684 4683 CONFIGURATION Allows you to view the configuration of the 4684 or 4683 after changes have been made but before they are activated See Figure 14 in topic 5 4 8 for information on the 4684 slots ACTIVATE NEW CONFIGURATION The 4684 IPLs to activate new new or changed configuration data Select this when you have finished entering all configuration data CHANGE 4684 4683 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION Allows you to change the default options of the 4684 or 4683 These options include deleting and adding devices primary display and keyboard selection and changing the numeric keypad layout Note Each time automatic configuration is run any changes that were made to the primary display and the primary keyboard assignments are lost You must ACTIVATE NEW CONFIGURATION after you change the defaults to make the change effective O Table 39 MENU C3
158. to the reference and diagnostic diskettes or to the system partition If the reference diskette is loaded from the diskette drive the option files are copied from the option diskette to the appropriate reference or diagnostic diskette If the reference diskette is loaded from the system partition the option files are copied from the option diskette to the system partition Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 5 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Set Time and Date 2 5 3 Set Time and Date This utility allows the user to set or change the current date and time in nonvolatile RAM NVRAM Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 5 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Set Password 2 5 4 Set Password This utility allows the user to set or change the power on password When a power on password is active set the user must type the password each time Ready mode is switched ON Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 5 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Set Keyboard Rate 2 5 5 Set Keyboard Rate This utility allows selection of the typamatic keyboard rate for the enhanced A N keyboard connected to keyboard socket 1 The normal rate is 10 9 characters per second CPS and the fast rate is 30 CPS Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 5 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Display Revision Level 2 5 6 Display Revision Level This utility displays the revision level of POST BIOS part number Revision date of the POST BIOS Model and submodel
159. to the following serial ports if two dual asynchronous adapters are present Serial_2 connector 1 on 1st dual asynchronous adapter Serial_4 connector 1 on 2nd dual asynchronous adapter Connector 2 Default This connector is assigned to the following serial ports if two dual asynchronous adapters are present Serial_3 connector 2 on 1st dual asynchronous adapter Serial_5 connector 2 on 2nd dual asynchronous adapter Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 9 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference IBM Multiprotocol Communication Adapter 5 9 3 IBM Multiprotocol Communication Adapter If this adapter is defined as asynchronous it is always assigned serial 7 port If a second adapter is present and defined as asynchronous it is always assigned serial 8 port Default This adapter is assigned to the following serial port SDLC_1 lst adapter primary SDLC_2 2nd adapter alternate OPTIONS Bisync_1 lst adapter primary Bisync_2 2nd adapter alternate Serial_7 lst adapter primary Serial_8 2nd adapter alternate NOTE The MPCA adapter installed in slot 1 is always the primary adapter if two MPCA adapters are present in the 4684 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 9 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4683 Serial Input Output Channel Device Channel 5 10 4683 Serial Input Output Channel Device Channel The device channel is a communication channel that ties the associated input output device
160. 1 A l PICTURE 53 Note Both connectors autowrap pin 1 to 3 and pin 2 to 4 when disconnected Figure 57 Store Loop Cable Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 24 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4683 Video Display 5 inch Distributed Connector and Cable 10 1 25 4683 Video Display 5 inch Distributed Connector and Cable 1 i i i Connector 4683 only Line Description 81 1 Horizontal return 81 2 Vertical return 81 3 Dual intensity i return 4 81 4 Video return 4 4 81 5 12 V de return 4 4 81 6 12 V de return 4 4 81 7 Sense 4 4 81 8 Reserved 4 4 81 9 Reserved 81 10 Reserved 81 11 Reserved 4 4 81 12 Reserved 4 4 81 13 Reserved PICTURE 54 Figure 58 5 Inch Video Distributed IBM Video Display Connector i Connector 4683 only 4 Pin 1 81 14 4 Pin 2 81 15 4
161. 10 V AC 4 A Sinewave approximation A squarewave is acceptable if the peak voltage requirements are met Peak voltage is Waveform to be 128 V AC 4 4 Harmonic content lt 10 lt 10 4 4 4 Output frequency 60 Hz 3 50 Hz 3 4 4 4 Transfer time length of interruption to the critical load Transfer threshold when switching from utility power to standby power supply Hwy Y Transfer threshold when 104 V AC 208 V AC switching from standby power supply to utility power PO MMMM Overcurrent protection Current limiting circuitry output should remain stable PO 5 55 55 Battery j Sealed lead acid maintenance free is recommended Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 5 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Internal System Loads 4 F The system unit provides power for the internal DASD and microchannel 1 1 6 Internal System Loads cards per Table 11 Loads are listed in milliamps Internal DC Loads Table 11 A A
162. 107 4 Motor Brown 4 4 4 f J107 5 Motor Red J107 6 Motor Orange 4 4 4 i J107 7 Motor Yellow 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 15 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J108 DI Front Sensor 10 4 16 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J108 DI Front Sensor Printer Card i Connector i Line Description i 4 4 J108 1 5 V de return Ho 4 J108 2 Signal to card 4 4 J108 3 Polarization key 4 4 J108 4 5 V de Hmm Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 16 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Card Connector J109 DI Top Sensor 10 4 17 Model 3 or 4 Card Connector J109 DI Top Sensor Printer Card i Connector i Line Description i 4 J109 1 5 V de i J107 2 Polarization key 4 4 J107 3 Signal to card 4 4 J107 4 5 V de return 4 Copyright IBM Corp 19
163. 1993 PREFACE 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Store System Related Publications Software IBM 4684 Store Application Tool Kit Programmer s Guide SB11 8478 In Store Processing In Store Processing Application Development Guide SC30 3534 In Store Processing IBM AIX Application Development Guide 83023537 In Store Processing IBM OS 2 Extended Edition Application Development Guide SC30 3538 In Store Processing IBM OS 400 Application Development Guide SC30 3535 In Store Processing IBM 4680 OS Application Development Guide SC30 3536 Networks IBM Local Area Network Support Program P N 83X7873 IBM PC Network Baseband Planning Guide S68X 2269 IBM PC Network Broadband Guide S68X 2269 IBM Token Ring Network Introduction and Planning Guide GA27 3677 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 PREFACE 2 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Store System Related Publications Hardware PREFACE 3 Store System Related Publications Hardware Scanners IBM 1520 Hand Held Scanner User s Guide GA27 3685 IBM 4686 Retail Point of Sale Scanner Physical Planning Installation and Operation Guide SA27 3854 IBM 4686 Retail Point of Sale Scanner Maintenance Manual SY27 0319 IBM 4687 Point of Sale Scanner Model 1 Physical Planning Installation and Operation Guide SA27 3855 IBM 4687 Point of Sale Scanner Model 1 Maintenance Manual SY27 0317 IBM 4687 Point of Sale Scanner Model 2 Physical Planning
164. 20 W004 Message i i l 1025 Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1 i 1026 Correct the problem by exchanging the store loop cable attached to the 4683 1027 From step 019 Are there any powered OFF 4683 xxls connected to the store loop segment between the 4683 that you just reconnected and the active store controller Yes No i i 1028 i i i 1 Continue at Step 036 1 i 1 i One at a time disconnect each powered OFF 4683 xx1 from the store loop segment by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle After each 4683 is disconnected return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No i i 1030 i 1 1 If all powered OFF 4683s have not been disconnected continue disconnecting them and displaying the system message at the active store controller SO a If all powered OFF 4683s have been disconnected reconnect all of them and continue at Step 036 1 i 1 I Unplug the store loop cable from socket 1 on the 4683 xxl that you just disconnected from the store loop Attach shorting plug 1B to the 4683 end of the cable See Figure 29 in topic Vu Ls Plug the other end of the cable into the store loop receptacle Return to the
165. 3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Status line Examine the terminal number if applicable date time and reason for the dump to determine if the dump file contains the dump you requested If the dump file does not contain the dump you requested try to recreate the problem and request the storage dump again Press Esc to return to the PROBLEM ANALYSIS REPORT screen Note You can return to the SYSTEM MAIN MENU by pressing F3 after pressing Esc If you plan to create a problem analysis diskette continue at step 5 of Requesting a System Log Report in topic 9 4 On the SYSTEM LOG REPORT screen enter 7 All of the Above Reports Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 3 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Requesting a System Log Report 9 4 Requesting a System Log Report 1 Press System Request on the store controller keyboard 2 The SYSTEM KEYS screen displays 3 On the SYSTEM KEYS screen enter s Start New Application a e o is a A a e id tl a o a a e e o a e rd rl a o di a a do PAE YPE e A o a a o a pd to a as co id ST Sy De io a i a ay ad l SYSTEM KEYS i i Type one of the following letters or a function key 1 i m Access the System Messages Display screen i e Access the Store Control Functions screen b Access the Background Application Control screen s Start New Application Displays System Main Menu w Access the Window Control screen n Pass control to the next higher numbered window owned by
166. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 7 6 38 V de return Pin 11 7 14 5 V de Pin 3 7 7 38 V de Pin 10 7 15 5 V de return Pin 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 7 8 38 V de return Pin 9 7 16 5 V de Pin 1 55 5 5 55 55 55555 55555 555 555 5 555 55 5 555 55 5 55 5 555 55555 5555 PICTURE 52 Figure 56 Point of Sale Printer Model 1 2 3 or 4 Connector and Cable Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 23 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4680 4690 Store Loop Connector and Cable 10 1 24 4680 4690 Store Loop Connector and Cable AO 55 55 55 5 55 55 5 5 5 55 55 5555 55 55 Connector 4683 or 4693 Line Description Store Loop Connector 4 4 4 1 1 Receive signal A black dot Pin 4 4 4 4 1 2 Receive signal B orange dot Pin 3 4 4 4 1 3 Transmit signal A green dot Pin 2 4 4 4 i 1 4 Transmit signal B red dot Pin
167. 4 see Moving the 4684 Securing the Fixed Disk in Eopie Dub Da un a btopics 1 Making a Backup Reference Diskette 2 Copying an Option Diskette to the Reference Diskette 3 Setting System Date And Time 4 Setting Vital Product Data 5 Moving the 4684 Securing the Fixed Disk 6 Logging Errors 7 Formatting the Fixed Disk 8 Device IDs for the Point of Sale Terminal 9 Displaying POS Terminal Configuration Using Set Terminal Characteristics 10 Displaying a Point of Sale Terminal Message 11 Displaying the Terminal Number 12 Changing the Terminal Number 13 Entering the Terminal Number 14 Resetting the Terminal Number 15 Initial Program Load IPL 16 Power On Self Test for the Point of Sale Terminal L aaa a a a a a a a a a Y Y OY OY OV OV OY OV OV OV OV OV OV OV OD OV OD OD Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Making a Backup Reference Diskette 5 6 1 Making a Backup Reference Diskette To start utilities begin at Preparing to Run Utilities in topic 5 6 E Select START UTILITIES from MENU M1 Lis Select BACKUP REFERENCE DISKETTE from MENU Ul 3 Follow the instructions on the display Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Copying an Option Diskette to the Reference Diskette 5 6 2 Copying an Option Diskette to the Reference Diskette To start utilities begin at Preparing to Run Utilities in topic 5 6 E Select START UTILITIES from
168. 4 10 1 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device ID OAh PPC NMI 4 11 Device ID 0OAh PPC NMI NMI routine supports the programmable power If the PPC NMI routine gets control and finds the existing ROM NMI The nonmaskable interrupt control PPC hardware that the PPC hardware did not generate the NMI routines are executed as normal Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 11 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Topic 5 4683 and 4684 General Description 50 Topic 5 4683 and 4684 General Description This topic contains reference information about the 4683 4684 point of sale terminals Subtopics si aa aa a a a A 2 3 4 9 6 7 8 9 1 General Description of the 4683 Point of Sale Terminal General Description of the 4684 Point of Sale Terminal 4684 Configuration and Utility Procedures Preparing to Run Configuration Introduction to Utilities Preparing to Run Utilities Remote IPL RIPL for Token Ring and Baseband LAN 4684 Device Channel Adapter Failure Status Bytes 4684 Communication Adapters Port Assignments 0 4683 Serial Input Output Channel Device Channel Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 0 1 Store Systems Technical Reference General Description of the 4683 Point of Sale Terminal 5 1 General Description of the 4683 Point of Sale Terminal The following 4683 point of sale terminal models are available The models are similar in appearance and can attach the same type of 1 0 devices The basic termin
169. 4693 family of terminals provide a programmable power control feature that allows the end user under software control to turn off the system and power back on at pre determined times O Support for 4683 and 4684 1 0 devices All models of the 4693 support many of the I O devices used on the 4683 and 4684 terminals O Store networking The 4693 family supports token ring baseband store loop and Ethernet network architectures O Integrated features Models 541 421 and 321 provide ports for video optional on Model 321 two RS 232C ports PS 2 keyboard auxiliary input device mouse touchscreen one parallel interface device and RS 485 attached point of sale I O The point of sale ports allow attachment of devices such as cash drawers scanners displays keyboards and printers O Totals retention Model 541 421 and 321 provide 36 KB nonvolatile random access memory for operating system and application use as totals retention This memory area is powered by a 10 year battery Model 202 provides 28 KB nonvolatile random access memory 0 Host independence Model 541 does not require a host system although it supports host communications O Media support Model 541 supports media A 3 1 2 inch diskette and 2 1 2 inch small computer system interface SCSI fixed disk drives are optional Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Memory Subsystem Features 1 1 3 Memory Subsystem Features Th
170. 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 05h Receive Message From Device 4 6 2 6 AL 05h Receive Message From Device This function receives a message from a device Registers on entry CX Length of application receive buffer DX Port or device address DS SI Pointer to receive buffer Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 2 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 06h Transmit Message Status and Device Status 4 6 2 7 AL 06h Transmit Message Status and Device Status This function transmits message status and device status On entry register DX is loaded with the port or device address On return register CL contains the number of messages pending and register CH contains 80h Reserved 40h Command reject received 20h Sequence error received 10h Poll timeout received 08h Receive buffer overflow 04h Receive routine received 02h SNA received 01h ROL received Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 2 7 1 4 6 3 AH The NVRAM system service provides a common application interface to the NVRAM in the 4690 system The 4693 has a total of 40K bytes of CAh Store Systems Technical Reference AH CAh NVRAM System Services BIOS NVRAM System Services BIOS dedicated for internal operating system and application use As illustrated in Figure 12 type 0 and 1 is for operating system and application use Figure 12 Type 2 is for operating system and internal use 32 KB NVRAM 16 KB I O
171. 6 2 2 1 6 2 3 S Figure store 1 PICTURE Figure PICTURE Figure PICTURE Figure PICTURE NOTES T m c H HttH Figure PICTURE NOTES T m e T HttH Figure Store Systems Technical Reference Store Loop Wiring Concentrator tore Loop Wiring Concentrator 19 is a diagram of 4683s and a store controller connected by radial oop cables to a loop wiring concentrator 15 19 Example of Store Loop Radial The 4683 P can also be a 4683 001 or 4683 A01 The 4683 002 can also be a 4683 A02 16 20 Example of Store Loop Serial The 4683 P can also be a 4683 001 or 4683 A01 The 4683 002 can also be a 4683 A02 17 21 Radial Store Loop Wiring Connected to a Loop Wiring Concentrator The 4683 P can also be a 4683 001 or 4683 A01 18 his illustration represents a typical store loop using the IBM Loop Wiring Concentrator Your stor ay not be wired like this but the position of your 4683s on the loop and their relationship to the ontroller is similar he 4683 P can also be a 4683 001 or 4683 A01 The 4683 002 can also be a 4683 A02 he store controller transmits data to the first 4683 down loop on the store loop This 4683 receive he data and passes it to the next 4683 down loop This continues with each 4683 receiving data fron he 4683 immediately up loop from its position and passing it on to the next 4683 down loop he last 4683 down loop passes the data back to the store controller
172. 62 he 4683 is failing terminal number isplayed in message W762 he primary store controller is i The terminal number in i 1 i i i i ailing 1 i i 1 i i i i 1 i 1 i this W762 message does not respond to messages sent to it by the store controller H he active store controller is receiving end of polls he backup store controller is failing he distance exceeds 4000 feet 1220 eters between powered ON 4683 xxls on he store loop H he active store ontroller is not receiving beacons l t3 HHMAHQHDSHDH Q The store loop appears to be OK To display the terminal number press S1 type 7 and press S2 To display messages at a point of sale terminal when the keyboard OFFLINE light is ON press Sl type 2 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS Keyboard during some procedures and on the Enhanced Alphanumeric Keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 To display a system message at the store controller sign on at the store controller press System Request and then press the M key Warning Switching POWER OFF at a 4684 affects operations at all point of sale terminals attached to it Before starting store loop problem determination obtain the filled in Terminal Identification Chart from the book IBM 4680 Store System Preparing Your Site E Obtain a store loop layout chart containing O The physical location of store controller s and point of sale termina
173. 680 Store System Setup and Verification SA27 3703 Subtopics PREFACE 3 1 General Publications Copyright IBM Corp 1993 PREFACE 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference General Publications PREFACE 3 1 General Publications Advanced Data Communications for Stores General Information GH20 2188 Distributed Systems Executive General Information GH19 6394 IBM Disk Operating System 4 0 P N 6280256 IBM Proprinters SC31 3793 IBM 3270 Emulation Feature for the IBM 4680 Store System Online with the product IBM 4680 Support for COBOL Version 2 Online with the product IBM 4680 Store System Regression Tester Online with the product NetView Distribution Manager General Information GH19 6587 Systems Network Architecture General Overview GC30 3073 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 PREFACE 3 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Topic 1 4693 General Description 1 0 Topic 1 4693 General Description This topic contains a general description of the 4693 point of sale system Subtopics LT PRPRPRPR Nok WD General Description of the 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Model 202 System Unit Description PS 2 Option Adapter Support PS 2 1 0 Support POS I O Support Operating System Software Compatibility Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 0 1 Store Systems Technical Reference General Description of the 4693 Point of Sale Terminals 1 1 General Description of the 4693 Point of Sale Terminals The following
174. 684 affects operations at all point of sale terminals attached to it Before starting store loop problem determination obtain the filled in Terminal Identification Chart from the book IBM 4680 Store System Preparing Your Site E Obtain a store loop layout chart containing O The physical location of store controller s and point of sale terminals O The order of store controller s and point of sale terminals on the store loop O The terminal numbers Is there a backup store controller connected to this store loop Yes No 1 i i i 1002 Continue at Step 011 1 i i I At the backup store controller display the Backup Store Loop status Is the Backup Store Loop status Providing Backup Yes No i i 1004 4 i 1 i 1 i i Continue at Step 008 if I 1 i At the primary store controller display the Store Loop Control status The primary store controller is the controller that has been designated to control the store loop It is supported by the backup store controller Is the Store Loop Control status Controlling Loop Yes No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0150 W764 Message i i 1006 Disconnect the primary store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 i Do not reconnect this store cont
175. 93 10 4 17 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary GLOSSARY Glossary This glossary defines terms and abbreviations used in this book Consult the IBM Dictionary of Computing SC20 1699 and the index of this book for terms that you do not find in this glossary AY access method A software component in a processor for controlling the flow of information through a network access unit A unit that allows multiple attaching devices access to a token ring network at a central point such as a wiring closet or in an open work area active 1 Able to communicate on the network A token ring network adapter is active if it is able to transmit and receive on the network 2 Operational 3 Pertaining to a node or device that is connected or is available for connection to another node or device 4 Currently transmitting or receiving adapter 1 In the point of sale terminal a circuit card that with its associated software enables the terminal to use a function or feature 2 In a LAN within a communicating device a circuit card that with its associated software and or microcode enables the device to communicate over the network ADCS Advanced Data Communications for Stores address 1 In data communication the IEEE assigned unique code or the unique locally administered code assigned to each device or workstation connected to a network 2 A character group of characters or a value that identi
176. A A AS A AA 5LM 5PPC 5CONT BATTERY 12VL 4 4 4 4 4 4 Load System Board inc SCSI logic 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Fan 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 179 1600 MCA Cards per slot 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 tll Diskette Drive 1 44 MB 2 88 MB il Fixed Disk Drive 2 per device operating A 1 1 6 1 System Operation Interlock Subtopics Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference System Operation Interlock 1 1 6 1 System Operation Interlock An access interlock is provided to prevent the removal of logic cards or power supply when the terminal is operational or ram retention 5LM active This is to prevent hot plugging of system board possibly causing damage This interlock is accomplished by a sequential disassembly procedure The power supply or logic cards cannot be removed without removing the battery or the interlock connector for systems without batteries such as the Model 202 or some Model 541s If the terminal is still on when the battery or the interlock connector is removed the system powers down and the memory retention voltage to the terminal system board 5LM is r
177. AL 00h Reserved AL Olh Suspend system AL 02h Set the power on events AL 03h Reserved AL 04h Reserved AL O5h Read PPC status and power on events AL 06h Reserved AL 07h Reserved diagnostic use only AL 08h Register OS PLD notification pointer AL 09h Enable PDI and use direct NMI to the processor AL OAh Enable PDI and use channel check NMI AL OBh Disable PDI Subtopics 4 10 1 1 Subfunction 01h Suspend System 4 10 1 2 Subfunction 02h Set the Power On Event 4 10 1 3 Subfunction 05h Read PPC Status and Power On Events 4 10 1 4 Subfunction 08h Register OS PLD Notification Pointer 4 10 1 5 Subfunction 09h Enable PDI and Use Direct NMI to the Processor 4 10 1 6 Subfunction OAh Enable PDI and Use Channel Check NMI 4 10 1 7 Subfunction OBh Disable PDI Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 10 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Subfunction 01h Suspend System 4 10 1 1 Subfunction 01h Suspend System This subfunction sets the 4693 power to off When this command is issued to the PPC hardware it generates an NMI at least 4 ms before the system power is completely removed Assuming that the NMI vector has not been modified the PPC NMI routine gains control of the system Note The application should set the power on events before using this function If no power on events are previously set the system only resumes when the Mode Control switch
178. AY ERRORS from MENU T3 5 MENU T5 allows several selections Select the desired function 6 Follow the instructions on the display Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Formatting the Fixed Disk 5 6 7 Formatting the Fixed Disk Note Formatting the fixed disk destroys all data that is now on the fixed disk Select START TESTS from MENU M1 Select RUN SYSTEM UNIT TESTS from MENU T1 Select FORMAT FIXED DISK from MENU T2 Follow the instructions on the display Ss UU NP If a message error occurs follow the User Response for the message the IBM 4680 Store Messages Guide Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 7 1 in Store Systems Technical Reference Device IDs for the Point of Sale Terminal 5 6 8 Device IDs for the Point of Sale Terminal The following is a list of the device IDs The device IDs are used by set terminal characteristics STC to identify devices that are configured for or attached to a point of sale terminal The device ID is also required when requesting a trace report of the device channel for a unique device Subtopics 5 6 8 1 Device IDs by ID Number 5 6 8 2 Device IDs by Device Type Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device IDs by ID Number 5 6 8 1 Device IDs by ID Number Dis DES Dis Key Dis Key MSR MSR Opt Opt Lo Mag board 50 key board Display board 50 key board Display
179. C1l 3 Follow the instructions on the display to perform the backup Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 4 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Restoring the Configuration 5 4 7 Restoring the Configuration To start configuration begin at Preparing to Run Configuration in topic 5 4 des Select START CONFIGURATION from MENU M1 Select RESTORE CONFIGURATION from MENU Cl 3 Follow the instructions on the display to restore the configuration Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 4 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Viewing the Active Configuration 5 4 8 Viewing the Active Configuration To start configuration begin at Preparing to Run Configuration in topic 5 4 E Select START CONFIGURATION from MENU M1 2 Select VIEW ACTIVE CONFIGURATION from MENU Cl 3 The current or active configuration record that is saved in the 4684 is displayed 4 Follow the instructions on the display See Figure 14 for information on the 4684 slots lot 1 OOOOoOOON lot 2 B O E OE Eo 0 JO UA Figure 14 option adapter Dual asynchronous adapter ISDN interface coprocessor 2 adapter Multiprotocol communication adapter Token ring network adapter X 25 interface coprocessor 2 ARTICx 2 2 8 MB 80286 memory expansion adapter option adapter ISDN interface coprocessor 2 Dual asynchronous adapter Multiprotocol communication adapter Token ring network adapter X 25 interface coprocessor 2 ARTICx 2 2 8 MB 80286 me
180. Configuration and Utility Procedures 357 MENUs for Configuration Procedures 342 Understanding the Configuration Process TD Primary Keyboards and Displays for the 4684 Terminal 3 4 4684 and 4683 Point of Sale Configuration Record 39 Resetting the POS Configuration in the 4684 330 6 Resetting the System Unit Configuration in the 4684 4 Preparing to Run Configuration 4 1 Creating or Changing Configuration 4 2 Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu Cl 4 3 Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu C2 4 4 Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu C3 and Menu C4 4 5 Restrictions When Connecting Displays 4 6 Backing Up the Configuration 4 7 Restoring the Configuration 4 8 Viewing the Active Configuration 4 9 Using Optional 4684 System Unit Configuration 5 Introduction to Utilities Drak Flow Chart of MENUs 6 Preparing to Run Utilities Get Making a Backup Reference Diskette 6 2 Copying an Option Diskette to the Reference Diskette O 3 Setting System Date And Time 6 4 Setting Vital Product Data 653 5 Moving the 4684 Securing the Fixed Disk 6 6 Logging Errors 6 7 Formatting the Fixed Disk 6 8 Device IDs for the Point of Sale Terminal 6 9 Displaying POS Terminal Configuration Using Set Terminal Characteristics 6 10 Displaying a Point of Sale Terminal Message 6 11 Displaying the Terminal Number Ora 12 Changing the Terminal Number Gs L3 Entering the Terminal Number 6 14 Resetting the Terminal Number 6 25 Initial Prog
181. Connector and Cable Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 27 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Point of Sale Terminal Connector and Cable 10 1 28 Point of Sale Terminal Connector and Cable A An eee yer may A E Sy aI gla A A A A A E A E eae Table 55 Data Cable from 4683 Model 001 to 4683 Model 002 or from 4693 202 to 4693 541 421 or 321 ERE RN e ES A e ER A EE AI ARO See IA EE 4683 xx1 Line Description 4683 xx2 11 1 j Serial I O A 1131 Hmm Ho 11 2 j Serial I O B 112 Ho j 11 3 j Serial I O A 11 3 4 4 4 4 Serial 1 0 B 11 4 PA A A A O a E ee ee The top cable in Figure 61 4684 to H PICTURE 57 Figure 61 4683 xx1 4693 xx1 to 4683 xx2 4683 xx2 to 4693 xx1 he bottom cable in Figure 4683 4684 or 4693 to 4683 4684 or 4693 to connects 61 connects the loop wiring concentrator the store loop receptacle Point of Sale Terminal Cable Wiring 4683 and 4693 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 28 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Baseband Network Cable Adapter 10 1 29 Baseband Network Cable Adapter PICTURE 58 Figure 62 Baseband Network Cable Adapter Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 29 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Baseband Network Cable and Connectors 10 1 30 Baseband Network Cable and Connectors Connector A Connector B Position Position Sig
182. Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 6 2 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0140 W762 Message controller and follow the procedures for Store Loop Problems E For message W764 follow MAP 0150 W764 Message in topic 7 7 1015 From step 012 Go to the 4683 that has the terminal number displayed in message W762 If it is a 4683 xx2 go to its partner 4683 xx1 A 4683 xx2 displays the status of its partner 4683 xx1 See the store loop layout chart Switch POWER OFF at the 4683 xxl Wait five seconds and switch power ON again Did the 4683 IPL correctly Yes No 4 1016 o i 1 I 1 The failure symptom has changed Follow the User Response for the message in the IBM 4680 Store System Messages Guide i o y Follow the Repair Action for the symptom 1 i i Wait at least two minutes for the 4683 to become operational Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did the active store controller display message W762 again Yes No I i 1018 The 4683 is operating correctly now If the problem returns record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the active store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1 I 1 i Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the active store con
183. E a ai X 65 RS232 Device 25 on the Feature i Adapter in location 2B A HH 23 on the Feature Adapter in location 2A gla gan ly a 4 X 69 RS232 Device 23 on the Feature Adapter in location 2B eee ae SSR Sh A AAA A A ee AS A RAS ek AAA Oh N X 6A Scale Feature Expansion B or C only 21 on the Feature i Adapter in location 2A E rd SE a to a iia X 6B Scale Feature Expansion B or C only 21 on the Feature i Adapter in location 2B A HH X 6E Scale 17 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 8 1 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Device IDs by Device Type 5 6 8 2 Device IDs by Device Type Table 42 Device IDs by Device Type Coin Dispenser Display Alphanumeric Display Operator or Combined Keyboard Display Display Shopper Display Video Keyboard 50 key or Combined Keyboard Display MSR Single Track Magnetic Wand Optical Character Reader OCR 5A if Combined Keyboard Display 5B if Combined Keyboard Display 4A 4B 6 on the keyboard attached on t he Feature location 2A on t he Feature location 2B on t he Feature location 2A on t he Feature location 2B to Socket 5A 6 on the keyboard attached to Socket 5B SA ANPOS or Combined Keyboard Display on t he Feature location 2A on t he Feature location 2B on t he Feature location 2A on t he Feature location 2B
184. F memory controller A f OF Base 512k read write memory test 4 4 po JO set base memory parity flag A prk write the high byte of failing memory address to mfg_port 2 write the low byte of failing memory address to mfg_port 3 possnnt pose taea H a o o eS 12 verify 386 lgdt sgdt lidt sidt instructions and registers Porco pur nt o it ee e HITS initialize 8259 interrupt controllers master poo sols postu eee poh e he ee eee ee ee eh Oe eee 14 initialize 8259 interrupt controllers slave hoc o ae Se ee ee ee ae le LS initialize hardware interrupt vectors posse ae ee ae 16 initialize bios calls interrupt vectors Panor Posh se see ee ee Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Checkpoint Codes verify CMOS CRC HOW_BIG_END1 set expansion memory size in CMOS i return 1 from shutdown setup tos stack pointer reset 0 0 vector l setup and test video check for video feature ROM c000h to c800h i test 8259 controller test interrupt mask registers w zero l check for hot interrupts display 101 error hot NMI int w o i o memory parity enabled test timer0 timerl and timer3 i verify timer 2 output low and that timer 0 interrupt did not occur i verify that timer 0 does not count too fast slow use refresh verify that timer 3 generates NMI watc
185. IPL Initialization The store loop adapter has an on board ROM chip that contains POST diagnostics for the adapter RIPL microcode and functions to initialize the RIPL microcode A POST sub process called secondary ROM scan starts the RIPL initialization sequence by CALLing the on board adapter ROM code After diagnostics complete successfully the store loop adapter ROM code initializes the RIPL microcode and then returns to the POST secondary ROM scan This action does not start the RIPL process it only initializes an interface so that RIPL can be started later by the bootstrap loader interrupt 19H The interface between RIPL and the bootstrap loader is established through interrupt 18H At the beginning of secondary ROM scan interrupt 18H points to a procedure in POST ROM that displays an error message Note In PC products and older PS 2 products interrupt 18H was the interface to ROM BASIC Initialization microcode in the store loop adapter ROM chip replaces this interrupt vector so that interrupt 18H points to the RIPL microcode entry point This is accomplished by storing the RIPL entry point offset into memory address 0060H and storing the RIPL entry point segment into memory address 0062H This technique of replacing interrupt 18H also eliminates contention between two or more RPL adapters that might be installed in the system at the same time The secondary ROM scan process starts at the bottom of memory mapped I O space
186. LAN Local Area Network PC Network Transporter System Menu Initialization SSRT Terminal SSRT Utilities Store Controller IPL Store Controller Partial Dump Dump Formatter Trace Formatter System Log Scan Performance Report Start Trace Performance Problem Analysis Diskette Report Module Level Apply Software Maintenance Input Sequence Table Utility System Configuration Utility Print Configuration Utility Keyed File Utility Display Alter Utility Control File Build Utility File Distribution Utility Store Controller RAM Disk Remote Command Processor RCP Audible Alarm Host BSC Remote Change Management Server IBM ARTIC Adapter Host Async IBM ARTIC Communications Driver Print Spooler Streaming Tape Drive Streaming Tape Drive Utility File Compression Decompression 3270 Emulation in the Store Controller Remote System Function Application Loader Debug Adapter IBM ARTIC Adapter RCMS 3270 Emulation in the Point of Sale Terminal I O Processor Point o Point 0 Point 0 Remote Point 0 Point o Point 0 Point o Set Terminal Characte Point o Point 0 Point 0 Point o I h Hh Fh it Sale Terminal Sale Terminal f Sale Terminal File Services Services Timer O Access Method Sale Terminal Sale Terminal Sale Terminal Sale Terminal Sale Terminal Sale Terminal Sale Terminal Sale Terminal Cash Drawer Adapter Operator Display Alphanumeric Display Shopper Display Po
187. LER and INCORROUT At the active store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1 i 1 i Reconnect the active store controller to the store loop The problem is in the store loop wiring or the store loop receptacles for the 4683 xx1s Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 7 5 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0160 W772 Message 7 8 MAP 0160 W772 Message i The backup store 1 O The store loop is open up loop from the controller is not store controller receiving store loop 1 O A 4683 xx1 is failing up loop communications O The backup store controller is failing Revel The primary store controller is The backup store failing controller is sending iy lle The distance exceeds 4000 feet 1220 beacons but it is not meters between powered ON 4683 xxls on receiving beacons the store loop A i001 To display the terminal number press Sl type 7 and press S2 To display messages at a point of sale terminal when the keyboard OFFLINE light is ON press Sl type 2 and press 8S2 Note On the ANPOS Keyboard during some procedures and on the Enhanced Alphanumeric Keyboard Esc Sl and Enter 5S2 To display a system message at the store controller sign on at the store controller press System Request and th
188. LER and INCORROUT At the active store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1 i 1 i Reconnect the active store controller to the store loop The problem is in the store loop wiring between the active store controller and the last active 4683 xxl or in the store loop receptacle for the store controller or 4683 xxl Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1041 From step 012 Return to the 4683 displaying message W004 If it is a 4683 xx2 go to its partner 4683 xxl A 4683 xx2 displays the status of its partner 4683 xxl See the store loop layout chart Switch POWER OFF at the 4683 xxl Wait five seconds and switch power ON again Wait at least two minutes for the 4683 to become operational Is the keyboard OFFLINE light still ON Yes No i 042 i i 1 The 4683 is operating correctly now If the problem returns record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the active store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1 f i i At the 4683 press S1 type 2 and press S2 to display the OFFLINE Copyright IBM Corp 1993 74 5 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0120 W004 Message message Note On the ANPOS Keyboard during some procedures and
189. MENU C3 or MENU C4 Ho oo Table 37 MENU C1 i NEE VIEW ACTIVE CONFIGURATION A oe See See ee aes ee aces ee Oe CREATE CHANGE CONFIGURATION Pee seu Sho O O E EOI E ooo ees tsb eees BACKUP CONFIGURATION Peete ee ke See Se eet ee eee ee RESTORE CONFIGURATION PoSseeu be sss sees ese seule esse Sa5 Sea Se25 OPTIONAL SYSTEM UNIT CONFIGURATION Peake eee ae et eee a ee QUIT Ho Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 4 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu C1 5 4 2 Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu Cl VIEWING ACTIVE CONFIGURATION Allows you to view the currently active 4684 or 4683 configuration before any changes are made CREATE CHANGE CONFIGURATION Automatically configures both the 4684 system unit internal devices and option adapters as well as the external point of sale devices It allows you to manually change the configuration of the 4683 and 4684 point of sale devices if necessary f a multiprotocol communications adapter is configured you are allowed o change the protocol options Fh If a token ring network adapter is configured you may be asked to select the correct network data rate If a Real time Interface Coprocessor Multiport 2 ARTICm 2 or X 25 2 ARTICx 2 adapter is configured you are asked to select the correct transmit and receive clock settings There may be other option adapters configured that cause questions
190. O A OB Shared buffer error codes The alternate shared buffer failed See topic 5 8 4 SAS ESHE ia ida edades ii a ia a aera OC Shared buffer error codes The primary shared buffer failed i See topic 5 8 4 N a anon a oon R S N RR ii pi S 10 Device channel The system unit microprocessor was unable to adapter system status byte acquire the shared buffer for a software POR See topic 5 8 7 request Se ae ete a she RS Ss Se SSS Sa a i a a Teena SA 11 Device channel The software POR request failed adapter system status byte i i See topic 5 8 7 AS Scania a amc A ii a aon ae HERA NS O AOS a a sha 12 Device channel The system unit microprocessor was unable to adapter system status byte acquire the shared buffer for a Read EC Level See topic 5 8 7 request PaaS a HSS SRS SS SaaS Sa Sa hac tS An a Se is Sis ig Se SOR E See 13 Device channel The read EC level request failed i adapter system status byte i See topic 5 8 7 HSA AA Poseen DIR a en in RE Sena RSE 20 Device channel Timeout while waiting for a level 7 hardware adapter system status byte interrupt See topic 5 8 7 RSS HSS RSS Ss O SRS Sa SN 30 Device channel Timeout while waiting for a response from a l adapter system status byte request to acquire the shared buffer for a i See topic 5 8 7 software POR request hI PRS ao RAS SRA ROSAS AA ASA a Copyright IBM
191. O O O O O A NO O SAO TANIA AS O o RRPRRRRROCOJODSNnNR 0 3004 0UNROo wo N o N t N N NN A UY N ol N oy N N N 00 N W w o Ww ra w w Ww N w A w ol Ww Oy Store Systems Technical Reference Table of Contents Device Channel Message Format Device Channel Message Checking Device Channel Power On Initialization Topic 6 Store System Description Typical Store System Store Loop Description Configuration Store Loop Hardware Store Loop Wiring Concentrator Polls End of Poll Timeouts Beacons Cyclical Redundancy Check CRC Message Retransmit Store Loop Error Conditions and Error Messages Store Loop Error Recovery Procedures Topic 7 Store Loop Maintenance Analysis Procedures Store Loop MAPs MAP 0100 W001 Message MAP 0110 W003 Message MAP 0120 W004 Message MAP 0130 W005 Message MAP 0140 W762 Message MAP 0150 W764 Message MAP 0160 W772 Message Topic 8 Store Controller Reference Information Local Area Network LAN File Server Store Controller on the LAN Master Store Controller on the LAN Store Controller Backup Store Controller Backup Configurations Using the Supplemental Diskette to Recover from a PLD Displaying a Store Controller Message Message Description Message General Format Topic 9 Collecting Information About a Problem Requesting a Store Controller Storage Dump IBM Personal Computer AT or PS 2 Storage Dump 4684 Point of Sale Terminal Storage Dump Reque
192. OK Yes No 1020 Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring Correct the problem by exchanging the store loop cable attached to the 4683 1022 From step 014 Is the store loop cable plugged into the store loop adapter on the active store controller See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Yes No s 1 i 1023 Correct the problem by plugging the cable into the store loop adapter i i 1 i Disconnect the active store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle Display the system message at the active store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No o 1025 4 The problem is in the active store controller the store loop adapter or the store loop adapter cable Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 7 3 Rec Are t betwe Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0150 W764 Message Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the active store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages onnect the active store controller to the store loop here any powered OFF 4683 xxls connected to the store loop segment en the 4683 that you reconnected in Step 014 and the active store controller Yes One seg rec Aft No 027 The p
193. OT flag 1234H at memory address 40 72 and set the MR_Failed bit in the IPL_REASON flag byte if memory retention failed 4 Check for the RESUME flag at memory address 40 72 to determine if the application program should be resumed Skip BIOS data area setup extended BIOS data area setup and hardware diagnostics if RESUME is true Else take the Cold Start or Warm Start path to POST Stage II IML Ga Check for the RESUME flag at memory address 40 72 to determine if POST Stage II is already memory resident Skip IML and switch directly to shadow ROM POST Stage II if RESUME is true Else use the IML process to load Stage II into memory and then switch to shadow ROM 6 Check for the RESUME flag at memory address 40 72 to determine if Stage II diagnostics should be run Skip diagnostics and initialize planar hardware if RESUME is true Else run diagnostics first then initialize planar hardware 7 Shrink the size of the extended BIOS data area if required 8 Reinitialize option adapters by running secondary ROM scan 9 Check for the RESUME flag at memory address 40 72 to determine if the application program should be resumed Call the resume operating system BIOS function if RESUME is true Else take the cold start or warm start path through the bootstrap loader interrupt 19h Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 1 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Store Loop Adapter RIPL Initialization 3 3 2 Store Loop Adapter R
194. Oo wo Cash Drawer A Connector and Cable Cash Drawer B Connector and Cable Coin Dispenser Connector and Cable Display A Alphanumeric Operator or Shopper Connector and Cable Display B Alphanumeric Operator or Shopper Connector and Cable Optical Character Reader OCR Connector and Cable Point of Sale Keyboard A and B Connector and Long Cable Point of Sale Keyboard A and B Connector and Short Cable Enhanced A N Keyboard Connector and Cable 4684 4693 RS 232C Device Connector and Cable RS 232C or Current Loop Device Connector and Cable RS 232C Asynchronous Communications Port RS 232C Current Loop Wrap Plug RS 232C EIA Wrap Plug Scale Connector and Cable Special Attachment Cable Remote Alarm and Non IBM Cash Drawer Special Attachment Y Cable 1520 Model A02 and Dual Track MSR System Unit Printer Parallel Port 4684 and 4693 Serial I O Asynchronous Port 4693 4693 Serial I O Asynchronous Wrap Plug 3687 Point of Sale Scanner Model 002 Adapter Connector and Cable 4696 4697 Point of Sale Scanner Connector and Cable Point of Sale Printer Model 1 2 3 or 4 Connector and Cable 4680 4690 Store Loop Connector and Cable 4683 Video Display 5 inch Distributed Connector and Cable 4683 Video Display Except 5 Inch Connector and Cable 4684 4693 9 Inch Video Display Connector and Cable Point of Sale Terminal Connector and Cable Baseband Network Cable Adapter Baseband Network Cable and Connectors Baseband Net
195. PL Initial Program Load a Switch POWER OFF at the 4684 b Insert the reference diskette in the 4684 diskette drive c Switch power ON at the 4683 if attached d Switch power ON at the 4684 3 Power on self test runs automatically when power is switched ON The messages that normally display during the IPL process are as follows a The video display if present displays characters that represent the memory test progress b A series of Unnn messages display that represent the progress of the IPL C A reference diskette Copyright message displays d Message M0001 PRESS THE 1 KEY displays alphanumeric display only otherwise MENU M1 displays Press the 1 key on the primary keyboard e MENU M1 displays O If message M0101 is displayed answer YES MENU C2 is displayed after automatic configuration is run See MENU C2 at Creating or Changing Configuration in topic 5 4 1 O If an error number s is displayed note the number s and then press Sl Additional information or instructions are displayed to help continue problem determination Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 If the IPL does not continue after pressing S1 go to the IBM 4680 Store Messages Guide and follow the User Response for the displayed message s When MENU M1 is displayed you are prepared to start configuration To create or change configuration se
196. POST Test Device Channel Adapter Errors Press F1 and continue with the test Hwy Table 53 POST Device Channel i Errors Symptom Cause 14517 Multiple errors 4 4 1 14527 8051 POR errors 4 4 i 14537 Latch test errors 4 4 14547 Shared buffer errors 14557 CMOS test errors 4 4 14567 Dump latch errors 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 11 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4684 Memory Map 5 8 12 4684 Memory Map X FFFFFF S5 5 128 KB System ROM X FEOOOO t i 14 5 MB RAM Expansion Area i j i X60000 gt st i 384 KB Extended RAM X TO0000 128 KB ROM X E0000 l X DE000 Peres 1 1 I Adapter j 1 i i X D8000 X D0000 i X C4000 l X C0000 I i Video O T e EMS Window between X A4000 and X B3FFF X A0000 R a ca as required I 1 1 i i 1 i i 1 1 i i i i 640 KB System Memory RAM 1 i I 1 1 i i el 1 i i 1 1 i 1 1 i
197. RE Store Systems Technical Reference RS 232C or Current Loop Device Connector and Cable 232C or Current Loop Device Connector and Cable RS 232C or Current Loop Device Connector Sa di E E io E ii RS SE lg al ce ly E ig o SE yy ear lg ad E ay E ay mig al E am ya o CS A a ie a cl e rc al ja nl lr Sag dls ri Connector 4683 only Line Description 4 4 2521 Reserved 4 4 25 2 Transmit Data 4 4 25 3 Reserved 4 4 25 4 Receive Data 4 4 2555 Reserved 4 4 25 6 Request to Send 4 4 25 7 Reserved 4 4 25 8 Clear to Send 4 4 25 9 Transmit Data current loop 4 4 25 10 Data Set Ready 4 4 j 25 11 Signal Ground 4 25 12 Data Terminal Ready 4 4 25 13 Data Carrier Detect 4 4
198. Read PPC Status and Power On Events 4 10 1 3 Subfunction 05h Read PPC Status and Power On Events This subfunction returns the current PPC power on status and power on events On return Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit On return Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit OrRPNWH OO request block offset 1Ah contains the power on status Reserved Reserved Reserved Set if the Mode Control switch on event enabled power otherwise clear Set if the ring detect 2 power on event enabled power otherwise clear Set if the ring detect 1 power on event enabled power otherwise clear Set if the RTC alarm power on event enabled power otherwise clear Set if memory contents are known to be bad otherwise clear request block offset 1Bh contains the enabled power on events Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Set if the ring detect 2 power on event is enabled otherwise clear Set if the ring detect 1 power on event is enabled otherwise clear Set if the RTC alarm power on event is enabled otherwise clear Set if memory retention is enabled otherwise clear Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 10 1 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Subfunction 08h Register OS PLD Notification Pointer 4 10 1 4 Subfunction 08h Register OS PLD Notification Pointer This subfunction stores a double word pointer in the EBDA for calling the application during a PLD suspend resume sequence Request block offset
199. Return to the 4683 xxl and switch POWER OFF Service the 4683 base unit 1 i 1 i Return to the 4683 xxl and examine its store loop receptacle for damage Is the store loop receptacle OK Yes No l i i 1040 Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring if 1 i Correct the problem by exchanging the store loop cable attached to the 4683 1042 From step 034 The problem is in the store loop segment between the two powered ON 4683 xx1s Are there any powered OFF 4683 xxls connected to the store loop segment between the two powered ON 4683s Yes No 4 1043 4 The problem is in the store loop wiring or the store loop receptacles for the 4683 xxls Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring One at a time disconnect each powered OFF 4683 xxl from the store loop segment by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle After each 4683 is disconnected return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 2 5 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0100 W001 Message If all powered OFF 4683s have not been disconnected continue disconnecting them and displaying the system message at the active i store controller i SOP ee If al
200. S 485 interface using the POS I O device channel architecture protocol plus cash drawers Unless otherwise stated device support applies to all models of the 4693 Models 541 421 and 321 support one 4693 satellite to the base satellite socket socket 11 These 1 0 devices are supported by Models 541 421 321 and 202 POS printers socket 7 POS displays sockets 4A 4B 9A 9B 9C Hand scanners sockets 4B 9A 9B 9C POS keyboards sockets 5A 5B POS scanners socket 4B 9A 9B 9C Cash drawers sockets 3A 3B Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Operating System Software Compatibility 1 6 Operating System Software Compatibility The 4693 supports multiple operating systems The support is based on family and model PS 2 compatibility mode indicates that the system functions as a PS 2 like system with similar PS 2 1 0 device restrictions PS 2 keyboard displays printers Subtopics 1 6 1 Model 541 1 6 2 Models 421 and 321 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 541 6 1 Model 541 IBM DOS 5 02 POS I O supported by DOS Device Drivers DOS T5 0 V POS I O supported by DOS Drivers Drivers 4690 OS V1 OS 2 2 1 PS 2 compatible mode Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 6 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Models 421 and 321 6 2 Models 421 and 321 4690 OS V1 IBM DOS 5 02 POS I O supported by DOS device Drivers OS 2 2 1 Copyright IBM Cor
201. Store Systems Technical Reference Book Cover COVER Book Cover Store Systems Technical Reference Document Number SY27 0336 00 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 COVER 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Notices NOTICES Notices Note Before using this information and the products it supports be sure to read the general information under Notices in topic FRONT_1 Additional notices begin on page FRONT_1 2 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 NOTICES 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Edition Notice EDITION Edition Notice First Edition June 1993 This is the first edition of the Store Systems Technical Reference Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality Publications are not stocked at the address given below A form for readers comments appears at the back of this publication If the form has been removed address your comments to IBM Corporation Department E35A PO Box 12195 Research Triangle Park North Carolina Us Be As When you send information to IBM you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1993 All rights reserved Note to U S Government Users Documentation related to restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract
202. Technical Reference Interrupt 16h POS Keyboard BIOS 4 7 Interrupt 16h POS Keyboard BIOS The keyboard BIOS redirects keyboard BIOS functions to a SIO channel attached keyboard if the PS 2 keyboard is not attached to the 4693 This allows POST to continue in the event of a diagnostic error POS keyboard BIOS provides a standard keyboard interface for the reference diskette It is the responsibility of the operating system to redirect the interrupt 16h vector if this function is not desired See INT 15h AH 92h AL 00h in topic 4 6 2 for a way to disable this redirection feature The POS keyboard BIOS intercepts the following keyboard BIOS functions for interfacing to the SIO attached keyboard AH 00h Keyboard read AH Olh Keystroke status AH 10h Extended keyboard read AH 11h Extended keystroke status All of these functions operate the same as before except that they pass back the POS specific scan codes for the POS keyboard that is attached All other functions are not supported by the POS keyboard BIOS and return with no error Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Advanced Basic Input Output System ABIOS Routines 4 8 Advanced Basic Input Output System ABIOS Routines Access to the ABIOS is through a parameter block called the request block Within the request block are fields that identify the target device requested function and details of the request Thi
203. The following store loop maintenance analysis procedures MAPs were written for the 4680 store system Since store loop operation is the same for 4693 4684 and 4683 terminals they can be applied to either When reviewing these MAPs the various models of terminals may be interchanged according to the following chart 4684 XXX may also be 4693 541 4683 XX1 may also be 4693 421 or 4693 321 4683 X02 may also be 4693 202 This section contains information that can be used to learn more about the store loop and its failure modes O The following full page figures represent a typical store loop using the IBM loop wiring concentrator Each figure represents the same store loop each with the following conditions Store loop with an open condition in the top loop wiring concentrator Store loop with the primary store controller offline Store loop with an open condition in the bottom loop wiring concentrator Store loop with a failing point of sale terminal O Your store loop may not be wired like this but the position of your 4683s on the loop and the relationship to the store controller is similar O The 4683 P can also be a 4683 001 or 4683 A01 The 4683 002 can also be a 4683 A02 O The terminal numbers are shown in numeric order but they can be put in any order on your store loop O The store controller transmits data to the first 4683 down loop on the store loop This 4683 receives the data and passes it
204. Top Buttons Front Buttons Capacitor Connector J101 Paper Cutter Motor Connector J102 CR Motor Connector J103 Signals to Printer Card Connector J106 JNL Motion Sensor Connector J107 JNL Motor Connector J108 DI Front Sensor DI Top Sensor 4683 Power Supply Connector P11 4683 Power Supply Connector P12 4683 Power Supply Connector P13 4683 Power Supply Connector P14 Wiring Diagrams for the Model Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector Wiring Diagrams for the Model 3 or 4 P Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Model 3 or 4 Printer E
205. U l i Select one of the following 1 i 1 User defined text appears here 2 User defined text appears here 3 File Utilities 4 Installation and Update Aids 5 Problem Analysis Data Collection 6 Problem Analysis Reports 7 Command Mode 1 i Type your selection number then press ENTER _ i 1 i i Message line FIHELP F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 FOSIGNOFF i Status line i A A A ES ASE OE RE eee 5 On the PROBLEM ANALYSIS REPORT screen enter 4 Format Dump Data PROBLEM ANALYSIS REPORT Select one of the following Scan System Log Data Format System Trace Data Format Performance Data Format Dump Data Create Problem Analysis Diskette OS WNER Type your selection number then press ENTER Message line FIHELP F2 F3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Status line Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Requesting a Storage Dump Report On the FORMAT DUMP DATA screen enter 1 or 2 for the dump you want to format and then enter 1 display as the output destination Note To prepare the dump report to copy to a problem analysis diskette enter 3 File for destination FORMAT DUMP DATA Select one of the following 1 Terminal dump 2 Controller dump Type your selection number _ SELECT AN OUTPUT DESTINATION FROM THE FOLLOWING 1 Display default 2 Printer 3 File Type your selection number then press ENTER _ Message line FIHELP F2 F
206. V de aux return 4 4 4 P11 A POR 1 P11 9 5 V de internal return 4 4 4 4 P11 2 PDI P11 K 5 V de internal 4 4 4 4 P11 B i PDI P11 10 5 V de external return 4 4 4 4 P11 3 Save P11 L 5 V de external return 4 4 4 4 P11 C Save PIT 5 V de external P11 4 Not connected P11 M 5 V de external 4 4 4 4 P1 1 D Battery enable i p11 12 36 V de printer return 4 4 4 4 P11 5 Polarization key P11 N 36 V de printer return 4 4 4 4 P11 E Polarization key P11 13 36 V de 4 4 4 4 P11 6 Dump switch P11 P 36 V de 4 4 4 4
207. a ce en Ste ne pee Lp et cee Ns ip E EE cad setup equip_flag for printers and RS232 s ese A A A A AA en A enable hardware interrupt if 80387 present Mee eh ety Inte Oe Se a a ee e aes E E set kybd state flags check for change typamatic request enable keyboard timer interrupts read kybd id to initialize kybd and numlock check for second fixed disk not defined test for errors display 162 error message initialize printer alternate display device address line 0 15 failure Base 512k storage failure send failing pattern to mfg ports initialize the video subsystem initialize video controller program controller to allow load of character generator load of 8x16 character generator program controller for after character generator load blank video buffer initialize dac initialize cursor entry to sysinitl build gdt and idt tables switch to protected mode Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 2 3 Store Systems Technical Reference Checkpoint Codes BF exit to sysinitl set return address in double word 40 67 eee ae eae oo DS ee ee eet ee ee E Oe a a ae Saag E a E Cl Cache test E LE A A A A A A DA switch memory refresh control from backup to normal mode NES AS EA A AAA AAA AA AA A DB check for Resume enabled LA Pa a o a a o a a a DC check for memory refresh during Suspend id paa CNA A ee pel ee e a a e e A nt DD save memory data that could be destroyed by POST Resume E ete A
208. a pin Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J2 Signals to Extension Card 10 4 2 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J2 Signals to Extension Card dos a ea E mi di E a ely lg o o ij a y li e ds E a AN GE lg al IS ay eae A SN y lo E en E ma a E Sa AY GS aig ly CP A en Ca Se E o ay ll Ci li E a ze le et jas ii ee Printer Card Printer Card i Connector Line Description i Connector Line Description Hwy Y J2 1 36 V dc to JNL and CR motor J2 13 Journal motor signal 4 J2 2 36 V dc to cutter motor J2 14 Journal motor signal 4 J2 3 Cutter motor signal J2 15 Polarization key 4 4 4 4 J2 4 i Cutter motor signal 1 J2 16 unused 4 4 4 4 J2 5 Cutter motor signal J2 17 Pov de 4 4 4 4 J2 6 Cutter motor signal J2 18 5 V de return 4 4 4 4
209. a single unit See also file data structure The syntactic structure of symbolic expressions and their storage allocation characteristics data terminal equipment DTE 1 That part of a data station that serves as a data source data receiver or both 2 Equipment that sends or receives data or both data transfer 1 The result of the transmission of data signals from any data source to a data receiver 2 The movement or copying of data from one location and the storage of the data at another location data transfer rate The average number of bits characters or blocks per unit of time passing between equipment in a data transmission session The rate is expressed in bits characters or blocks per second minute or hour DBCS Double byte character set DCE Data circuit terminating equipment deactivation The process of taking any element out of service rendering it inoperative or placing it in a state in which it cannot perform the functions for which it was designed debug To detect diagnose and eliminate errors in computer programs default Pertaining to an attribute value or option that is assumed when none is explicitly specified delimiter 1 A character used to indicate the beginning or end of a character string 2 A bit pattern that defines the beginning or end of a frame or token on a LAN destination Any point or location such as a node station or particular terminal to which informa
210. able into the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i i 1048 Return to the 4683 xx1 and switch POWER OFF Service the 4683 base unit 1 i 1 i Return to the 4683 xxl and examine its store loop receptacle for damage Is the store loop receptacle OK Yes No i 1050 Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1 i i Correct the problem by exchanging the store loop cable attached to the 4683 1052 From step 016 Is the store loop cable plugged into the store loop adapter on the active store controller See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Yes No l 1053 Correct the problem by plugging the cable into the store loop adapter i 1 iJ Disconnect the active store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle Display the system message at the active store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 5 6 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0130 W005 Message The problem is in the active store controller the store loop adapter or the sto
211. ables the PPC hardware from generating a PDI when power is going away This function is used when the user wants to control the system unit power from the front panel Mode Control switch only Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 1 7 1 4 6 2 AH 92h The POS device control BIOS provides an application interface to the POS Store Systems Technical Reference AH 92h POS Device Control BIOS POS Device Control BIOS devices attached to the SIO channel This interface allows initialization The following functions are transmit receive and error handling for each POS device accessed by interrupt 15h with register 92h and register AL equal to the number below On return from these functions AL AL AL AL AL AL AL 00h 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 06h Initialize SIOC functions Add device to poll list Add device to poll list with receive routine pointer Remove device from poll list Transmit message to device includes broadcasts Receive message from device Transmit message status and device status register AH contains condition corrupted or missing SIOC EBDA data truncated Transmit Message to Device Includes Broadcasts codescolon 00h No error 01h Function call not valid 02h Input parameters not valid 03h Interface error 04h Device busy Resend command 05h Device poll list full 06h No receive data to return 07h Receive buffer ov
212. adapter or a program to indicate the result of an action command or operation 2 A code used to influence the execution of succeeding instructions 3 A value established by the programmer to be used to influence subsequent program action This value can be printed as output or loaded in a register ring latency In an IBM Token Ring Network the time measured in bit times at the data transmission rate required for a signal to propagate once around the ring Ring latency includes the signal propagation delay through the ring medium including drop cables plus the sum of propagation delays through each data station connected to the Token Ring Network ring network A network configuration in which a series of attaching devices is connected by unidirectional transmission links to form a closed path A ring of an IBM Token Ring Network is referred to as a LAN segment or as a Token Ring Network segment ring segment Any section of a ring that can be isolated by unplugging Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 20 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary connectors from the rest of the ring A segment can consist of a single lobe the cable between access units or a combination of cables lobes and or access units See cable segment LAN segment RIPL Remote IPL rms Root mean square ROM Read only memory root directory Highest or base level directory in a hierarchical file system Subdirectories branch off of the root d
213. ader SIO devices are not permitted to have addresses within the range X 78 through X 7F NVRAM 0078 0079 007A 007B 007 007D 007E OO7F This space is allocated to store configuration record header information for the master terminal Device Address Address N A N A N A N A Bit Bits Bit N A Bit Bit Bits N A Bit Bit Bits N A N A a st DA SS Device Type Reserved Reserved Reserved Master Terminal Workstation status 1 One or more SIO devices are present reserved 1 SIO configuration data was erased when the Reset switch was pressed during POST Video display status 1 A video monitor is present 1 A video monitor is configured reserved PS 2 keyboard status 1 A PS 2 keyboard is present 1 A PS 2 keyboard is configured reserved Record ID x 01 Record checksum Checksum of bytes 10H through Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 4 8 1 7EH Store Systems Technical Reference 0080 00EF Satellite Terminal SIO Configuration Data 2 16 5 0080 00EF Satellite Terminal SIO Configuration Data Subtopics 2 16 5 1 Keyboard Devices 2 16 5 2 Display Devices 2 16 5 3 Printer Devices 2 16 5 4 Readers and Scanning Devices 2 16 5 5 Monetary Devices 2 16 5 6 External Devices 2 16 5 7 Reserved Device Addresses 2 16 5 8 Satellite Terminal Configuration Record Header Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 5 1 Store Systems Technical Refere
214. agnetic stripe reader MSR or magnetic wand reader attached to the point of sale terminal magnetic stripe reader MSR A device that reads coded information from a magnetic stripe on a card such as a credit card as it passes through a slot in the reader maintenance analysis procedure MAP Deprecated term for procedure See procedure Manufacturing Automated Protocol MAP A broadband LAN with a bus topology that passes tokens from adapter to adapter on a coaxial cable MAP 1 Maintenance analysis procedure 2 Manufacturing Automated Protocol master store controller The store controller that maintains prime versions of system mirrored files and all compound files master terminal 1 An IBM point of sale terminal that controls a Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 14 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary satellite IBM point of sale terminal 2 An IBM point of sale terminal that keeps the terminal program load TPL so it can load the other terminals on the store loop Mb Megabit MB Megabyte media Plural form of medium medialess Not fitted with a direct access storage device such as a diskette drive or fixed disk drive as in some models of IBM point of sale terminals medium 1 A physical carrier of electrical or optical energy 2 A physical material in or on which data may be represented megabit Mb A unit of measure for throughput 1 megabit 1 048 576 bits megabyte MB
215. aired to resume normal operation Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 9 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference When the Beaconing 4683 is Not the First 4683 on the Store Loop 6 2 9 2 When the Beaconing 4683 is Not the First 4683 on the Store Loop Note This information is for reference only To resolve the problem described here see message W005 or message W760 1 Message W005 is displayed at the 4683 and W760 is displayed at the store controller 2 Disconnect the beaconing 4683 from the store loop If this action results in normal store loop operation the beaconing 4683 is failing It should be left off the store loop until it is repaired 33 If removing the beaconing 4683 does not resolve the store loop problem reconnect this 4683 to the store loop and disconnect the first active 4683 up loop from the beaconing 4683 from the store loop If normal store loop operation resumes with the 4683 removed the 4683 is failing It should be left off the store loop until it is repaired 4 If removal of the 4683 up loop from the beaconing 4683 does not resolve the problem the failure is in the store loop wiring segment between these two 4683s Normal operation cannot resume until this segment is bypassed or repaired Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 9 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference When the Store Controller Receives End of Poll Timeouts 6 2 9 3 When the Store Controller Receives End of Poll Timeouts Note This information
216. al consists of a base unit a keyboard and a display 4683 P11 This model has 1 megabyte of memory and is functionally equivalent to the 4683 001 It can be programmed to perform the user s point of sale functions To perform all available point of sale functions the 4683 P11 must be connected to a store loop and it must be communicating with a store controller on the store loop After the 4683 P11 has received a program load from the store controller some point of sale functions can be performed without communication with the store controller The 4683 P11 base card has pluggable memory modules that allow you to increase the base card memory by replacing the existing modules with larger capacity modules 4683 P21 This model has 2 megabytes of memory and is functionally equivalent to the 4683 A01 Except for the additional memory the 4683 P21 is the same as the 4683 P11 4683 P41 This model has 4 megabytes of memory Except for the additional memory the 4683 P41 is the same as the 4683 P11 4683 001 This model has 1 megabyte of memory and is functionally equivalent to the 4683 P11 The memory on this model is fixed and cannot be changed 4683 A01 This model has 2 megabytes of memory and is functionally equivalent to the 4683 P21 The memory on this model is fixed and cannot be changed 4683 002 To perform the user s point of sale functions each 4683 002 must be connected to a 4683 xx1 or a 4684 that is running the 4680
217. and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 75 4 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0130 W005 Message Reconnect the 4683 xxl to the store loop and continue at Step 043 From steps 017 and 033 Is the store loop cable plugged into socket 1 on this 4683 xxl base unit Yes No i 1037 Correct the problem by plugging the cable into socket 1 1 i j i Unplug the store loop cable from socket 1 on this 4683 xx1 base unit Attach shorting plug 1B to the 4683 end of the cable See Figure 29 in topic 7 1 Plug the other end of the cable into the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i l 1039 Return to the 4683 and switch POWER OFF Service the 4683 base unit 1 i 1 i Return to the 4683 xx1 and examine its store loop receptacle for damage Is the store loop receptacle OK Yes No i 1041 Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1 i i i Correct the problem by exchanging the store loop cable attached to the 4683 1043 From step 035 Are there any powered OFF 4683s co
218. and should not be purchased in bulk as spares No provision for testing the battery is available except through actual use Note These batteries are nickel cadmium type composition Because of country laws these batteries require special disposal procedures according to local country regulations Batteries cannot be disposed in landfills Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 5 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Battery Performance 1 1 5 4 Battery Performance The battery is rated for 4 years or 1000 recharge cycles whichever comes first when used in typical environments 25 C Recharge time is 6 hours for the 500 mah battery and 23 hours for the 3600 mah battery Battery performance is reduced by 20 when used at the upper supported ambient environments 40 C Refer to Table 8 for retention times at 25 C based on memory configurations 4 Table 8 Battery Run Times by Memory Configuration at i 259C PA a A A A A A e o oe Memory Size 500 mah Battery 3600 mah Battery 4 4 4 2 MB 10 MB 5 Hours 36 Hours A Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 5 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Power Supply Description 1 1 5 5 Power Supply Description Power requirements are supplied by a 177 Watt 4 output level switching regulated power supply It provides a 38 V de output for the printers and cash
219. anual configuration consists of two parts Deleting or removing a device from the configuration even though it is attached and has been previously configured Adding a device that is not attached and therefore cannot be automatically configured In all of the above cases the configuration information is not permanently saved until you select ACTIVATE NEW CONFIGURATION from MENU C2 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 2 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Primary Keyboards and Displays for the 4684 Terminal 5 3 3 Primary Keyboards and Displays for the 4684 Terminal A primary display and primary keyboard is assigned either automatically or by selecting CHANGE 4684 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION from MENU C4 O The primary display is where all messages appear while using the reference diskette O The primary keyboard is where all input is expected while using the reference diskette There can be only one primary display and one primary keyboard Initially the primary devices are assigned during automatic configuration They are assigned based on the devices that are attached and where they are attached Normally you have no reason to change the primary display and primary keyboard that are assigned automatically However if you need to change these assignments select CHANGE 4684 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION from MENU C2 MENU C4 displays a choice to change the primary assignments Be aware that the next time automatic configuration is run
220. at identifies a data set statement program or cataloged procedure n bit byte A string that consists of n bits NetView A host based IBM network management licensed program that provides communication network management CNM or communications and systems management C amp SM services NetView Distribution Manager NetView DM A component of the NetView family supporting resource distribution within Change Management and providing central control of software and microcode distribution and installation to processors in a distributed departmental SNA network system It allows a similar control of user data objects across the network and provides the facilities to support the remote initiation of command lists network 1 A configuration of data processing devices and software connected for information interchange 2 An arrangement of nodes and connecting branches Connections are made between data stations network architecture The logical structure and operating principles of a computer network See also systems network architecture SNA and open systems interconnect OSI architecture Note The operating principles of a network include those of services functions and protocols network management vector transport NMVT The portion of an alert transport frame that contains the alert message node 1 Any device attached to a network that transmits and or receives data 2 An end point of a link or a junction co
221. ate For example the keyboard does not accept input Describes a problem that is indicated by incorrect output Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 7 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Problem Data Collection Form An in memory buffer used by programs to exchange messages A task created by the operating system each time an application begins execution The process is defined to the system by the existence of a process descriptor record In memory disk files controller point of sale terminal or store A device that reads and interprets bar codes and generates signals corresponding to the bar code 1 i characters A E E ee EE The identification of a session where xx equals a value from 1 to 64 The session is established by the Operating System upon request to support communication between the store controller and one or more point of sale terminals A She ee ee ee te Shopper Display ee See ned ae eS ee eee tn E Dae E A ee E SS E Supervisor Call Poe See a A NO AA The function requested by pressing specially programmed 1 i keys the point of sale terminal or store controller keyboard collection of data exchanged between two points for a specified period of time Passes 2 Se 22 A ee ee ae ee ee eee Universal Product Code fe Stee ee A ee ea ee One Soe ee eee eee oe oe A call to user written code from the main application AR CER A RE Ee Nee E O A pe ee es Video Dis
222. ation for Standardization for managing synchronous code transparent serial by bit information transfer over a link connection Transmission exchanges may be duplex or half duplex over switched or nonswitched links The configuration of the link connection may be point to point multipoint or loop system In data processing a collection of people machines and methods organized to accomplish a set of specific functions See also data processing system and operating system Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 22 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary system board In a system unit the main circuit board that supports a variety of basic system devices such as a keyboard or a mouse and provides other basic system functions system configuration A process that specifies the devices and programs that form a particular data processing system system partition A protected portion of a fixed disk on an IML system unit that contains power on self test POST and Basic Input Output System BIOS code The system partition also contains system programs system programs Testing and utility programs that reside in the system partition of a fixed disk that are used to maintain the system Typically these programs are the same as those provided on the reference and diagnostic diskettes Systems Application Architecture SAA An architecture developed by IBM that consists of a set of selected software interfaces conventions a
223. axial cable using a carrier sense multiple access collision detection CSMA CD transmission method European article number EAN A number that is assigned to and encoded on an article of merchandise for scanning in some countries evaluation Reduction of an expression to a single value event 1 Processing unit containing price changes and item file updates All records in an event share common characteristics such as type of change and event due date 2 An occurrence of significance to a task for example the completion of an asynchronous operation such as an I O operation exception An abnormal condition such as an I O error encountered in processing a data set or a file See also overflow exception and underflow exception execution The process of carrying out an instruction or instructions of a computer program by a computer exit To execute an instruction or statement within a portion of a program in order to terminate the execution of that portion Note Such portions of programs include loops routines subroutines and modules expansion slot In an IBM Personal Computer one of several receptacles in the system board of the system unit or expansion unit into which a user can install an expansion board such as a memory expansion option IF j fault An accidental condition that causes a functional unit to fail to perform its required function FCC Federal Communications Commission feature A part
224. ay the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i i i 1031 Return to the 4683 xx1 and switch POWER OFF Service the 4683 base unit i i 1032 Return to the 4683 xxl and examine its store loop receptacle for damage Is the store loop receptacle OK Yes No i i 1033 Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 7 4 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0150 W764 Message Correct the problem by exchanging the store loop cable attached to the 4683 1035 From step 012 Is the store loop cable plugged into the store loop adapter on the active store controller See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Yes No i 1036 i 1 i i i Correct the problem by plugging the store loop cable into the store loop adapter 1 i 1 i Disconnect the active store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle Display the system message at the active store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No i 1038 i 1 i 1 The problem is in the active store controller the store loop adapter or the store loop adapter cable Record keywords CONTROL
225. blem Analysis Reports A A A ees EA AA SA AA A S SYSTEM MAIN MENU 1 i i Select one of the following 1 i 1 User defined text appears here 2 User defined text appears here 3 File Utilities 4 Installation and Update Aids 5 Problem Analysis Data Collection 6 Problem Analysis Reports 7 Command Mode 1 i i Type your selection number then press ENTER _ 1 i 1 i i Message line i F1HELP F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9SIGNOFF i Status line i es ms cap Mea mila A tng ec in Ay are ly te Pn ce ety tn is tr cl la a ere mi letra rc 5 On the PROBLEM ANALYSIS REPORTS screen enter 5 Create Problem Analysis Diskette 4 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O PROBLEM ANALYSIS REPORTS Select one of the following 1 i 1 Scan System Log Data 2 Format System Trace Data 3 Format Performance Data i 4 Format Dump Data 5 Create Problem Analysis Diskette 1 Type your selection number then press ENTER _ 1 i Message line i F1HELP F2 F3QUIT F4 ES F6 F7 F8 F9 r10 i Status line i 4 OO O O O O O O Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Creating a 4680 Problem Analysis Diskette Obtain a formatted diskette and insert it into the appropriate drive A or B On the CREATE PROBLEM ANALYSIS DISKETTE screen select the reports to be copied
226. bsequent phases of loading the terminal personality If RIPL is required it occurs automatically when the terminal Ready mode is switched to ON The loop RIPL code resides in ROM on the 4690 loop card along with the loop card diagnostic code The loop RIPL code builds a bootstrap load request sends it to the controller receives each load block stores it in the 4693 terminal RAM when it is the next block in sequence and gives control to the bootstrap program after completion of the load If a block of the bootstrap load is missed the loader requests the entire load again and resumes the load when the missed block is received The 4693 terminal must be on a working store loop that is attached to a controller supporting RIPL At the terminal the following is displayed U0O3 the bootstrap loader has control u004 the link has been established with the controller U004 xxxxxxxx the load is in progress Note xxxxxxxx is a count of the load blocks that have been loaded into the 4693 terminal The count increments with the progress of the loading If a block is missed the count stops incrementing and resumes when the needed block is received on a subsequent broadcast The loader support in the loop controller for loop RIPL must be able to receive and recognize a 1 byte load request X C1 open the terminal bootstrap file ADXLPBSL 286 for 4690 and broadcast the file non sequenced in 512 byte blocks to group address X C1
227. byte 2 14 1 microprocessor status codes 2 11 2 POST err rs 2 14 2 shared buffer request byte 2 13 shared buffer status byte 2 14 system status byte 2 12 device channel I O 4693 4680 device channel interface 1 1 4 5 device tests point of sale 4693 tests 2 3 4 diskette drive 4693 tests 2 6 3 display 4693 tests 2 6 3 displaying configuration See viewing configuration 4693 displaying messages See messages displaying 4683 4684 displaying terminal configuration 4683 4684 5 6 9 displaying the terminal number 4683 4684 5 6 11 E end of poll timeout 4680 store loop 6 2 5 entering the terminal number 4683 4684 5 6 13 error log 4684 5 6 6 Ethernet 4693 tests 2 6 3 2 8 3 8 4 aw a un NN Bo RR iS Ww F FCC information FRONT_1 2 features 4693 system 4680 feature support 1 1 2 media support 1 1 2 power control programmable 1 1 2 store networking 1 1 2 totals retention 1 1 2 file server store controller 8 1 1 file server store controller LAN backup store controller 8 2 1 file server controller 8 1 1 master controller 8 1 2 message description 8 2 5 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 INDEX 3 Store Systems Technical Reference Index reference information 8 2 fixed disk drive 4684 parking the heads 5 6 5 securing 5 6 5 fixed disk 4693 tests 2 6 3 form problem data collection See 4680 collecting problem information format message 8 2 6 formatting the fixed disk 4684 5 6 7 I IBM 4680 Stor
228. cations to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note The entire IBM 4680 Store System is designed to operate ina commercial environment When detached from a store loop the supported models of the IBM 5170 Personal Computer AT have been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B computing device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against radio frequency interference in a residential environment Canadian Department of Communications compliance statement This equipment does not exceed Class A limits per radio noise emissions for digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulation of the Canadian Department of Communications Operation in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception requiring the owner or operator to take whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference Avis de conformit aux normes du minist re des Communications du Canada Cet quipement ne d passe pas les limites de Classe A d mission de bruits radio lectr
229. cause an error Es Continue to the next step 1 Switch POWER OFF at the 4684 and insert the backup reference diskette 2 Switch power ON at the 4683 if attached 3 Switch power ON at the 4684 Wait for two tones 4 Locate the dump switch at the rear of the 4684 system unit press it momentarily and then release it You hear a tone and U004 is displayed 5 Switch POWER OFF at the 4684 6 Reconnect the keyboard if you unplugged it to create an error Wait five seconds 7 Switch the 4684 power ON One or more error messages display and you should hear two tones 8 Press S1 ESC on the enhanced A N keyboard 9 If message M0001 Press the 1 key displays press 1 Each error that was detected displays along with additional information about the error Press S1 ESC on the enhanced A N keyboard for each that displays The following message displays M0101 A Configuration Error has occurred Do you want to run configuration 10 Answer YES to this question The system unit devices and point of sale devices that are attached are automatically configured Depending on the devices that are attached you may be asked additional questions 11 Select ACTIVATE NEW CONFIGURATION and follow the instructions on the display Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Resetting the System Unit Configuration in the 4684 5 3 6 Resetting the System Unit Configuration in the 4684 This procedure should o
230. ce Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure Status Bytes 4 and 5 2 11 4 Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure Status Bytes 4 and 5 Table 21 defines the meaning of failure status bytes 4 and 5 of the device Channel adapter O Table 21 Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns postistoss Sec sss eses SSeS eee esses eee Sl SSS see Sass Sec ees eS Byte 4 Error Byte 5 Code Test Pattern Definition 4 4 4 00 00 No errors detected Ho 4 4 j 01 01 Data test pattern failed 4 i 02 02 Data test pattern failed j 03 04 Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 i 04 08 Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 j 1 05 10 Data test pattern failed 06 1 20 Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 l 07 40 Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 l 08 80 Data test pattern failed 4 4
231. ce channel The device channel adapter microprocessor was adapter system status byte not at a Ready and Not Enabled condition See topic 5 8 7 after initial POR was complete ASS pon 2 TSS et Sa Se SS SSeS PSS St SS Se Se AS Se SS Se SESS SS 06 Shared buffer request byte The system unit microprocessor was unable to See topic 5 8 8 return the shared buffer to the device channel i i adapter microprocessor after initial POR was complete tag oa AS she eect eg et POHAR o O RR O O A A 07 Device channel The system unit microprocessor was unable to adapter system status byte acquire the shared buffer for a software POR See topic 5 8 7 request dee SSeS TSS RSS es SS See SSS Sees aaa PSS SSS Sars SS SS Sa tee SSS ee SESS SS 08 Shared buffer request byte The system unit microprocessor was unable to i See topic 5 8 8 find the shared buffer after acquiring it for i i a software POR request Sa ae ai ES feos oS SSS SS aS See AS ABS SSS SSS Se SS a RS SS SS 09 Device channel A level 7 hardware interrupt was not received i adapter system status byte from a software POR request See topic 5 8 7 EROS SS eae ee SS SSeS ses hse Ses SSS See SS SSS Ses GS Sa Sa SSS OA Device channel The device channel adapter microprocessor adapter system status byte internal diagnostic test failed to complete i See topic 5 8 7 during the software POR PES Se SS RSS RS
232. ckpoint Exceptions During Protected Mode i is E a a Aa E BR a a eg eng SES a a ehh E a a Dd Sem a igh a i i Code Description Sia Poostosontoonstmttao eo 90 divide error tocata poo Se eo todas todoo tacto taba 91 single step Sa Pa ee 92 NMI system request for D1 Lar O eee 93 breakpoint Sato Polaciones ooo 94 into detect i biduan pee ep Eee eE 95 bound St Posa o y ee 96 invalid opcode Sebel se pont ta ssh st 97 processor ext not avail Sarna A 98 double exception abonan PRLS oS eo eS ee ST 99 processor ext segment err Ii po ts o ee 9A tss bad in gate transfer Lalola A 9B segment not present Sinto ER ee el 9C stack segment not present SOE politono cotton alto 9D general protection So e ee 9E page fault parodia Ponto noo tn tao 9F AF reserved sot BO processor extension error Bootes a eee Bl BD reserved Mi ey ey A A A A Bale Sh te cee Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 2 5 that can occur while Store Systems Technical Reference POST Interface Reference Information 3 3 POST Interface Reference Information Subtopics 3 1 Memory Retention Store Loop Adapter RIPL Initialization Boot Device Selection Feature Slot Setup POS Data Lookup Table QM UY Y uu WwW WWW uy 04 WN Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Memory Retention 3 3 1 Memory Retention Memory retention hardware saves the contents of memory while AC line volta
233. complete This procedure is used when the terminal number has never been entered 1 Switch power ON 2 Wait for message Z001 to display The Zxxx messages appear on the system display For a description of the default system display see Entering Terminal Numbers in the IBM 4680 Store System User s Guide EP Enter the terminal number 1xxx where xxx a number from 001 to 999 and then press 8S2 Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 If this is a 4683 xx2 the terminal number must be specified in the configuration record of the partner 4683 xx1 or 4684 4 When message Z010 displays press 8S2 5 Watch the display for a series of messages 6 Press S2 to view each message When message Z012 displays the operation is complete 7 Press S2 The terminal operating system is loaded if this is a 4683 xx1 or 4684 c If customer setup CSU has never been run it is automatically loaded and started 9 If CSU has been run the initial point of sale terminal application program is loaded Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 13 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Resetting the Terminal Number 5 6 14 Resetting the Terminal Number 1 Press S1 type 71 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 2 Wait approximately one minute for message Z002 to dis
234. controller until the problem has been resolved Wait 15 seconds and observe the keyboard lights on the 4683 displaying message W001 Did the OFFLINE light go OFF Yes No 1 1 4 1009 i 1 i Continue at Step 011 i i 1 i Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the backup store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1011 From steps 002 006 and 009 Display the system message at the active store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key A store controller is active when it is The only store controller on the store loop te ES The primary store controller and its status is Controlling Loop ey ee The backup store controller and its status is Providing Backup Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i 012i Continue at Step 018 1 i i i Note the information in the message and return to the 4683 displaying message W001 If it is a 4683 xx2 go to its partner 4683 xxl A 4683 xx2 displays the status of its partner 4683 xxl See the store loop layout chart The store controller transmits data down loop to the first 4683 xxl and to all the following 4683s on the store loop Each 4683 receives its data from the 4683 or store controller up loop from its position on the store
235. ct START UTILITIES 3 When the UTILITY MENU appears select the desired utility program See Utility Programs Summary in topic 2 5 Follow the instructions that are displayed or select from the next menu that is displayed See Flow of 4693 System Programs Menus in LOPLO 265 2 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Test Procedure Using Operating System Exercisers 2 9 Test Procedure Using Operating System Exercisers When the 4693 is running in the 4690 Store System environment you can download point of sale device exercisers from the store controller See IBM 4690 Store System Messages Guide for the procedure to load and run these exercisers Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 9 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Resetting Configuration and the Terminal Load 2 10 Resetting Configuration and the Terminal Load I 1 I 1 I 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 Th NV or pr De qu ap Ae eg dj ta a cl mg o a a Macy ag la ay yay ey ma o CE ii E ee ma le ep A St ls Pe a ey ret wily e Circ y Important i is procedure destroys the configuration record currently stored in RAM Use it only when the terminal system board has been exchanged when it seems necessary due to hang conditions undetermined oblems or an inoperative system i i pending on the installed option adapters you may be asked several estions regarding configuration Be prepared to select the propriate c
236. d Controller Storage Dump Controller Storage 04 UNA Type your selection number then press Enter Message line FIHELP F2 F3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Status line Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Requesting Store Controller Status This list describes the items on CONTROLLER STATUS Page 1 of 3 ITEM ON PAGE 1 of 3 INDICATES xx ID of the store controller Type Configured or Acting Master File server Alternate master Alternate file server Loop 1 or 2 Configured Store loop control Backup store loop Loop 1 or 2 Status Controlling loop Backup allowed Backup prevented Providing backup Receiving backup System Trace Active Inactive Performance Monitor Active Inactive Controller RAM disk Active Inactive Automatic Resume Active Inactive Press PgDn to view page 2 This is an example of CONTROLLER STATUS Page 1 Examples of CONTROLLER STATUS Page 2 and CONTROLLER STATUS Page 3 follow this one a py a ay alas eae ey Rg i yer ily la eg ye A ly Sep ma A E anya CONTROLLER STATUS Page 1 of 3 l TD ex Time 00 00 1 i Type Configured Master i File Server Acting Master i File Server 1 i Loop 1 Configured Store Loop Control Status Controlling Loop 1 i Loop 2 Configured Backup Store Loop Status Standby 1 i System Trace Inactive Performance Monitor Inactive Controller RAM Disk Inactive
237. d Extended Data Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 5 8 3 Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 The following table defines the meaning of failure status bytes 2 and 3 of the device channel adapter ti o St ss do ee Table 45 Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data A A ee oe ee seh ee ee ede ee pe sees sees Sees eet esas i Byte 2 i i Error Code Byte 3 Extended Data Definition Partene H A E a E a DR SR D a 00 00 No errors detected Siem ae Te Pgs So SSE RSS SS Se SR SS PBS SSS SSeS a SS SS SSA RSE i 01 Device channel The device channel adapter microprocessor was adapter system status byte not at a Ready and Not Enabled condition See topic 5 8 7 after initial POR was complete HAS AE PSSS SS Sage SS Sola A Se Se Se Se a eS Se eS SSeS 02 Device channel A level 7 software interrupt was not received i adapter interrupt flag byte when expected See topic 5 8 10 PSS SSeS Pea Se ae ee Bea SR SSS eae Sea ABS SSeS SSS Tee E aS 03 Device channel A level 7 hardware interrupt was not received i adapter system status byte when expected See topic 5 8 7 sos ec aa Pas Se SES SS SS hae E SSS 04 Shared buffer request byte The system unit microprocessor was unable to See topic 5 8 8 find the Shared Buffer after initial POR was i complete ER SS a E Se SS Se SSS eae Sse Se 05 Devi
238. d String From NVRAM With CRC check rite String To NVRAM With CRC check rite String To NVRAM Without CRC check Read Byte From NVRAM With CRC Check Write Byte To NVRAM With CRC Check Read Byte From NVRAM Without CRC Check Write Byte To NVRAM Without CRC Check Read String From NVRAM With CRC Check Write String To NVRAM With CRC Check Write String To NVRAM Without CRC Check Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 3 1 AH register AH contains condition code Store Systems Technical Reference AL 22h Read Byte From NVRAM With CRC Check 4 6 3 1 AL 22h Read Byte From NVRAM With CRC Check This function reads a byte of information from either the 32 KB or the 8 KB NVRAM areas The CRC code is checked to verify that it is good before a read operation from the 32 KB area is performed No checks are performed on the 8 KB RTC NVRAM area The read address is supplied in the BX register with bit 15 indicating the desired state of NMI upon exit of this call Control information is provided in the CH register with bit 7 indicating the 1 0 location for this operation and bit 6 indicating address incrementation On entry register BX contains the address to read Bits 0 through 14 Source address Bit 15 0 NMI is enabled on exit 1 NMI is disabled on exit On entry register CH contains control information Bit 6 1 Increment address Bit 7 0 32 KB NVRAM area location 1 8
239. d the 4683 IPLs 3 When the dump is complete notify the store programmer Note Message W052 is placed in the message queue at the store controller PICTURE 31 Figure 35 Location of 4683 Dump Switch Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Requesting a Storage Dump Report 9 3 Requesting a Storage Dump Report 1 Press System Request on the store controller keyboard 2 The SYSTEM KEYS screen displays 3 On the SYSTEM KEYS screen enter s Start New Application a e o is a A a e id tl a o a a e e o a e rd rl a o di a a do PAE YPE e A o a a o a pd to a as co id ST Sy De io a i a ay ad l SYSTEM KEYS i i Type one of the following letters or a function key 1 i m Access the System Messages Display screen i e Access the Store Control Functions screen b Access the Background Application Control screen s Start New Application Displays System Main Menu w Access the Window Control screen n Pass control to the next higher numbered window owned by this operator Next p Pass control to the next lower numbered window owned by this user Preceding a Access the Auxiliary Console Control screen 1 I i Message line i F1 F2 F3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9Disconnct i Status line i ty a o e o de e a des 4 On the SYSTEM MAIN MENU enter 6 Problem Analysis Reports A SA RA E AS A RAN PS AN AO E Y E E A RA EN A OE E A EA AA i E SYSTEM MAIN MEN
240. dates can be made to compound files or system mirrored files Note If Auto Resume was selected during configuration the following step is not needed Store loop control resumes automatically after IPL 3 Resume store loop control at the master store controller if the master has primary store loop responsibilities When the master store controller resumes control of the store loop for a short period of time the 4683s on the store loop is offline to the primary and backup store controllers During this time file reads from the 4683s such as price lookup cannot be performed Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 1 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Store Controller 8 2 Store Controller Use this section to find additional information about the store controller Subtopics 2 1 Backup Store Controller Backup Configurations Using the Supplemental Diskette to Recover from a PLD Displaying a Store Controller Message Message Description Message General Format 00 NNNN ND OOF WN Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Backup Store Controller 8 2 1 Backup Store Controller The 4680 Store System provides the capability for a backup store controller to take control of the store loop if the assigned primary store controller cannot function or is not available The backup store controller monitors the activity on the store loop while performing its other assigned duties The bac
241. de using a coded character set consisting of 7 bit coded characters 8 bits including parity check used for information interchange among data processing systems data communication systems and associated equipment The ASCII set consists of control characters and graphics characters American National Standards Institute ANSI An organization for the purpose of establishing voluntary industry standards analog Pertaining to data consisting of continuously variable physical quantities Contrast with digital ANPOS keyboard Alphanumeric point of sale keyboard ANSI American National Standards Institute APA all points addressable APAR Authorized program analysis report API Application program interface application program 1 A program written for or by a user that applies to the user s own work 2 A program written for or by a user that applies to a particular application 3 A program used to connect and communicate with stations in a network enabling users to perform application oriented activities application program interface API The formally defined programming language interface that is between an IBM system control program or a licensed program and the user of the program architecture A logical structure that encompasses operating principles including services functions and protocols See computer architecture network architecture Systems Application Architecture SAA Systems Network Architectur
242. de defines and controls the tasks requested by the application program The 1 0 driver code controls the 1 0 devices that are attached to the point of sale terminal This code is selected by the user A permanent record of which 1 0 code to load is kept in the system area of the nonvolatile RAM This code is loaded by the system code The application code establishes the procedures that the operator uses to do a job The application program components do this by assigning tasks to the hardware and to the operator in an ordered structure These components also supervise the interaction and information exchange between the operator tasks and the hardware tasks This code is also loaded by the system code The point of sale terminal needs the system 1 0 driver and application code immediately after the power on self test has completed successfully If storage retention was enabled 4683 xx1 only the storage contents are saved when the power is switched off Therefore RAM is kept active by either the battery or the wall power and no IPL is needed If storage retention was not enabled the point of sale terminal needs an IPL when the power is switched on Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 15 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Source of an IPL 5 6 15 2 Source of an IPL All system I O driver and application components reside in the store controller When the point of sale terminal needs an IPL it requests one through the store loop
243. different keyboards that may be attached to the 4693 terminal and all keyboards do not have the same control keys defined See 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Hardware Service Manual to identify the keyboards The system programs will prompt the user on which keys to use according to the type of keyboard Note When using keyboards that have a Ctrl key the S1 and S2 functions require a combination of two keys First press and hold the Ctrl key then press the S1 or S2 key Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 1 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4690 Store Loop Remote Initial Program Load RIPL 2 2 4690 Store Loop Remote Initial Program Load RIPL When a 4693 terminal Ready mode is switched to ON the power on self test POST runs to verify the hardware In turn the loop card diagnostic code is passed control by POST to verify the operation of the loop card When the diagnostic completes it passes control to a remote initial program load RIPL routine which contains a pointer to the bootstrap loader routine It returns control to the diagnostic code which returns control to POST POST selects RIPL if no disk is available or if RIPL has been specified as the primary load option via reference diskette on a 4693 terminal that has a disk When POST completes it executes a beginning IPL The first stage of 4690 RIPL is the bootstrap load The bootstrap program gives the terminal the initial intelligence required to continue with su
244. display the terminal number press S1 type 7 and press S2 To display messages at a point of sale terminal when the keyboard OFFLINE light is ON press Sl type 2 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS Keyboard during some procedures and on the Enhanced Alphanumeric Keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 To display a system message at the store controller sign on at the store controller press System Request and then press the M key Warning Switching POWER OFF at a 4684 affects operations at all point of sale terminals attached to it Before starting store loop problem determination obtain the filled in Terminal Identification Chart from the book IBM 4680 Store System Preparing Your Site E Obtain a store loop layout chart containing O The physical location of store controller s and point of sale terminals O The order of store controller s and point of sale terminals on the store loop O The terminal numbers Is there a backup store controller connected to this store loop Yes No 1 i i i 1002 Continue at Step 011 1 i i I At the backup store controller display the Backup Store Loop status Is the Backup Store Loop status Providing Backup Yes No i i 1004 i 1 i Continue at Step 008 if I 1 i At the primary store controller display the Store Loop Control status The primary store controller is the controller that has been d
245. drive interface is provided on the system board A 1 44 or 2 88 MB l inch slimline diskette drive is optional and is field installable The diskette drive is located behind the front access panel on the system unit The diskette opening can be locked by the system unit cover lock to prevent insertion or removal of a diskette The specifications for the diskette drive are shown in Table 5 Model 541 is enabled to support the PS 2 removable media security diskette drive subsystem H Table 5 4 0 MB 3 5 inch Diskette Drive A A SS eS es St Ee E ee Specification 1 0 MB Mode 2 0 MB Mode 4 0 MB Mode 4 4 4 Unformatted 1 0 MB diskette 2 0 MB diskette 4 0 MB diskette capacity 4 0 MB Drive Only 4 4 4 4 Formatted 720 1 44 2 88 capacity KBytes diskette MB diskette MB diskette Track density 130 TBL 1350 TPI 135 TPI tracks inch tracks inch i tracks inch 4 4 4 4 i Number of 80 00 79 per 80 00 79 per 80 00 79 per tracks side side side Number of heads 2 2 2
246. e Creating or Changing Configuration in topic 5 4 1 To backup the configuration see Backing Up the Configuration in topic 5 4 6 To restore configuration see Restoring the Configuration in opie 5 54 75 To view the active configuration see Viewing the Active Configuration in topic 5 4 8 Subtopics 5 4 1 Creating or Changing Configuration 4 2 Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu Cl Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu C2 Descriptions of Items in Configuration Menu C3 and Menu C4 Restrictions When Connecting Displays Backing Up the Configuration Restoring the Configuration Viewing the Active Configuration Using Optional 4684 System Unit Configuration aa aa a a a vo OANA OF WD Sok hop BR BR Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Creating or Changing Configuration 5 4 1 Creating or Changing Configuration To start configuration begin at Preparing to Run Configuration in topic 5 4 As Select START CONFIGURATION from MENU M1 2 Select CREATE CHANGE CONFIGURATION from MENU C1 3 The 4684 system unit devices that are attached are automatically configured 4 All POS devices that are attached and powered ON are automatically configured Note If you want to configure a device that will be attached at a later time you can select CHANGE 4684 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION or CHANGE 4683 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION from MENU C2 Then select ADD A DEVICE NOT ATTACHED from
247. e SNA ARTIC adapter A family of communications coprocessor adapters that with appropriate electrical interfaces can support a wide range of communication devices For the IBM Store System an ARTIC adapter provides communications support for ASYNC BSC SDLC and X 25 communications ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange assembler Computer program that translates assembly language statements into machine code async asynchronous asynchronous 1 Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon the occurrence of a specific event such as a common timing signal 2 Without regular time relationship unexpected or unpredictable with respect to the execution of program instructions 3 In Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI rings a type of data traffic that does not need bounded access delay to the medium and guaranteed throughput attach 1 To connect a device physically 2 To make a device a part of a network logically Compare with connect attaching device Any device that is physically connected to a network and can communicate over the network authorized program analysis report APAR A report of a problem caused by a suspected defect in a current unaltered release of a program BY background On a color display the part of the display screen that surrounds a character Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 2 Store Systems Technical Reference
248. e an application Can instruct a terminal to power off and either set a timer alarm clock feature or allow a ring indicate signal on one of the base RS 232C ports to power back on Note The RAM retention feature is only supported by 4690 OS and SDOS Models 541 421 and 321 include a memory subsystem to provide a feature similar to the 4683 that allows the terminal to be non operational yet retain the program load in memory As long as AC or battery power is available to the system power is provided to the memory subsystem With the proper operating system support this feature allows the system to have an instant on mode by eliminating the need to reload the operating system and application during each power sequence For Model 541 the operating system is given control within 15 seconds of restoration of power and within 10 seconds for Model 421 and Model 321 When the terminal is in a non operational mode that is not ON the memory retention feature does not power the installed PS 2 option adapters Therefore the 4693 does not support memory added with PS 2 memory option cards Whenever the terminal is powered ON from a non operational state for example as standby or backup the microchannel bus is reset Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 5 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference System States 1 1 5 2 System States The terminal has two basic modes operational and non operational The operational mode is defined as a fully
249. e Models 541 421 and 321 use the following types of memory Read only memory ROM Random access memory RAM Nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM Subtopics 1 1 3 1 ROM Subsystem 3 2 RAM Subsystem 3 3 NVRAM 3 4 1 Y Teg S 1 1 Memory Map Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference ROM Subsystem 1 1 3 1 ROM Subsystem The ROM subsystem consists of 256 KB of physical memory mapped in two 128 KB pages It is located at the top of the first and optionally at the last 1 MB of address space at power on time The ROM is socketed Once power on self test POST verifies proper functioning of the system RAM the basic input output system BIOS microcode is copied from ROM to RAM for faster BIOS operation shadow ROM The shadow RAM feature cannot be disabled Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 3 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference RAM Subsystem 1 1 3 2 RAM Subsystem All system boards have two single inline memory module SIMM sockets for low power SIMMs Each socket has the capability of supporting a 2 MB 4 MB or 8 MB low power SIMMs With two 8 MB SIMMs installed the maximum usable memory is 15999 KB Refer to Figure 1 for the system memory map Note Models 541 and 421 do not support standard PS 2 memory SIMMs or PS 2 memory option adapters in the PS 2 adapter slots PA AA P FUREY Ending Address 1 KB 128 KB System ROM FE0000 FDFFFF 896 KB w
250. e RIPL support by changing the RIPLDRVR SYS entry from N to Y as in the following example SUB DIRECTORY A diskette root directory FILE CONFIG SYS DOS configuration file ENTRY DEVICE 4684 RIPLDRVR SYS Y enables RIPL NOBE al o veep a Meh EE A gt N disables RIPL O For 4684 systems configured with a baseband LAN Only For each language you wish to support edit the EFEF ADF file on a backup copy of the 4684 version 3 00 reference diskette root directory and allow auto configuration to select Baseband RIPL as the default configuration choice per the following example SUB DIRECTORY FILE A EFEF ADF diskette root directory baseband configuration file NOTE Use an editor to relocate the desired default RIPL choice from the choice list to the first choice position within the file EXAMPLE NamedItem Prompt Type Memory Location Interrupt Level choice RPL Mem 2 Int 2 pos 0 1X10001Xb io 0620h 0627h int 2 mem 0D0000h OD7FFFh Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 7 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Operating Instructions 5 7 5 Operating Instructions When installing a 4684 Model 1xx 200 300 use the updated backup copy of the version 3 00 reference diskette to configure the 4684 As IPL the 4684 using the updated backup copy of the version 3 00 reference diskette Follow the menus to configure the 4684 This automatically ENABLEs the 4684 RIPL option Activate the
251. e System 4680 Store System 6 0 store loop 6 2 IBM configuration utilities 4684 configuration 5 3 configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 3 moving the 4684 5 6 5 parking the fixed disk heads 5 6 5 primary display 5 3 3 primary keyboard 5 3 3 securing the fixed disk 5 6 5 utilities 5 3 utilities 4684 reference diskette 5 3 IBM PC network 8 1 IML image 4693 description 2 1 3 indicators See controls and indicators 4693 See keyboard lights 4683 4684 initial program load IPL 4683 4684 description 5 6 15 1 source 5 6 15 2 interlock system operation 4693 1 1 6 1 internal modem 4693 tests 2 6 3 introduction to reference diskette 2 1 ISDN communications 4693 tests 2 6 3 K keyboard lights 4683 4684 message pending 5 6 10 5 6 10 3 offline 5 6 10 5 6 10 2 wait 5 6 10 5 6 10 1 keyboard 4693 differences 2 1 4 tests 2 6 3 L LAN 8 1 loading the system programs 2 6 1 local area network 8 1 local area network LAN 4680 8 0 logging errors 4684 5 6 6 M magnetic stripe reader 4693 tests 2 6 3 maintenance analysis procedures See MAP s store loop 4680 manual configuration 4684 reference diskette 5 3 2 2 MAP s store loop 4680 w001 message 7 W003 message w004 message w005 message W762 message W764 message W772 message 7 8 master store controller 8 1 2 medialess terminal support diskette 4693 See support diskette for medialess terminals 4693 memory dump 4680 store system See storage dump store syst
252. e Wire 4 4 4 f J102 1 i 36 V de Black f J102 2 36 V de Green J102 3 Polarization key No wire 4 4 4 J102 4 Motor Brown 4 4 4 f J102 5 Motor Red J102 6 Motor Orange 4 4 4 i J102 7 Motor Yellow 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 12 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J103 Signals to Printer Card 10 4 13 Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Connector J103 Signals to Printer Card Printer Card Connector Printer Card Connector i J103 1 36 V dc to JNL J103 12 Journal motor and CR motor signal 4 4 4 4 J103 2 36 V de to cutter J103 13 Journal motor motor signal 4 4 4 4 f J103 3 Cutter motor J103 14 Journal motor signal signal 4 4 4 4 f J103 4 Cut
253. e data rate The rate of data transmission over a telecommunications link link 1 In the IBM Store System the logical connection between nodes including the end to end link control procedures 2 The combination of physical media protocols and programming that connects devices on a network 3 In computer programming the part of a program in some cases a single instruction or an address that passes control and parameters between separate portions of the computer program 4 To interconnect items of data or portions of one or more computer programs 5 In SNA the combination of the link connection and link stations joining network nodes See also link connection Note A link connection is the physical medium of transmission for example a telephone wire or a microwave beam A link includes the physical medium of transmission the protocol and associated devices and programming it is both logical and physical link connection 1 All physical components and protocol machines that lie between the communicating link stations of a link The link connection may include a switched or leased physical data circuit a LAN or am X 25 virtual circuit 2 In SNA the physical equipment providing two way communication and error correction and detection between one link station and one or more other link stations 3 In the IBM Store System the logical link providing two way communication of data from one network node to one or more othe
254. e message See Displaying an Offline Message in topia DIO Zo O A system message See Displaying a System Message in COP RE Da Ga LOs PICTURE 13 Figure 16 50 key Keyboard Lights Subtopics 6 10 1 Displaying a Wait Message 10 2 Displaying an Offline Message 10 3 Displaying a System Message 10 4 Displaying a System Message Message Pending Light is Off 10 5 Displaying a System Message Message Pending Light is On aaa a y Oy OY OY OV Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 10 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Displaying a Wait Message 5 6 10 1 Displaying a Wait Message When the keyboard Wait light comes on the application running on the point of sale terminal is waiting for some action to be completed for example waiting for a program to load Only system function requests are accepted from the keyboard A message related to the wait condition can be displayed O If you display the message when the Wait light is ON the message indicates the reason for the current wait condition O If you display the message when the Wait light is OFF the message indicates the reason for a previous wait condition 1 Press S1 type 1 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 2 The wait message appears on the point of sale terminal system display Example of a wait message W321 PROCESSING WAIT FOR PROMPT 3 Find
255. e server and alternate file server mode control switch In the IBM 4693 point of sale terminal a momentary pushbutton that when activated causes the terminal to toggle between its operational and non operational modes modem MOdulator DEModulator A device that converts digital data froma computer to an analog signal that can be transmitted ina telecommunication line and converts the analog signal received to data for the computer module A program unit that is discrete and identifiable with respect to compiling combining with other units and load for example the input to or output from an assembler compiler linkage editor or executive routine module integrity value checksum A 3 byte value that is calculated for each module when a product control file is built The checksum is recalculated when activating the maintenance and is compared against the value in the product control file monitor 1 A functional unit that observes and records selected activities for analysis within a data processing system Possible uses are to show significant departures from the norm or to determine levels of utilization of particular functional units 2 Software or hardware that observes supervises controls or verifies operations of a system monochrome display See video display MSR Magnetic stripe reader Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 15 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary name An alphanumeric term th
256. e the backup store controller Return to normal store operation 1008 From step 004 Disconnect the backup store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 28 in tope efn Do not reconnect this store controller until the problem has been resolved Wait 15 seconds and observe the keyboard lights on the 4683 that was displaying message W762 Did the OFFLINE light go OFF Yes No 1 i 4 1009 i 1 i i Continue at Step 011 i i 1 i Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the backup store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1011 From steps 002 006 and 009 Display the system message at the active store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key A store controller is active when it is The only store controller on the store loop te ES The primary store controller and its status is Controlling Loop ey ee The backup store controller and its status is Providing Backup Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i 012i Continue at Step 015 1 i i i Did message W761 display also Yes No iJ 014 For message W760 go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store
257. ecture establishes a framework for coordinating the development of current and future standards for the interconnection of computer systems Network functions are divided into seven layers Each layer represents a group of related data processing and communication functions that can be carried out in a standard way to support different applications open systems interconnect OSI architecture Network architecture that adheres to a particular set of ISO standards that relates to open systems interconnect OSI open systems interconnect OSI reference model A model that represents Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 16 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary the hierarchical arrangement of the seven layers described by the open systems interconnect OSI architecture operating system Software that controls the execution of programs An operating system may provide services such as resource allocation scheduling input output control and data management Examples are IBM DOS and IBM OS 2 Operating System 2 0S 2 A set of programs that control the operation of high speed large memory IBM Personal Computers such as the IBM Personal System 2 computer Models 50 and above providing multitasking and the ability to address up to 16 MB of memory Contrast with Disk Operating System DOS operation 1 A defined action namely the act of obtaining a result from one or more operands in accordance with a rule that comple
258. ed to open automatically See till Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 4 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary CD Corrective diskette chain 1 Transfer of control from the currently executing program to another program or overlay 2 Referencing a data record from a previous data record channel 1 A functional unit controlled by a host computer that handles the transfer of data between processor storage and local peripheral equipment 2 A path along which signals can be sent 3 The portion of a storage medium that is accessible to a given reading or writing station channel attached 1 Pertaining to the connection of devices directly by data channels I O channels to a computer 2 Pertaining to devices connected to a controlling unit by cables rather than by telecommunication lines charge A sales transaction in which a customer has the partial or total value of purchased merchandise added to an account for later payment checkpoint A point at which information about the status of a job and the system can be recorded so that the job step can be restarted later checksum 1 The sum of a group of data associated with the group and used for checking purposes 2 On a diskette data written in a sector for error detection purposes A calculated checksum that does not match the checksum of data written in the sector indicates a bad sector Note The data is either numeric or other character strings regarded
259. efined by the nature number and chief characteristics of its functional units More specifically the term may refer to a hardware configuration or a software configuration See also system configuration configuration file The collective set of definitions that describes a configuration connect In a LAN to physically join a cable from a station to an access unit or network connection point Contrast with attach contention In a LAN a situation in which two or more data stations are allowed by the protocol to start transmitting concurrently and thus risk collision control character A character whose occurrence in a particular context initiates modifies or stops a control operation A control character may be recorded for use in a subsequent action and it may have a graphic representation in some circumstances controller A unit that controls input output operations for one or more devices conversation partner One of the two programs involved in a conversation conversation state The condition of a conversation that reflects what the past action on that conversation has been and that determines what the next set of actions may be converter In an IBM Token Ring Network a device that converts electronic signals to light pulses or vice versa for use in an optical fiber subsystem core The central region of an optical fiber through which light is transmitted corrective diskette CD A set of diskettes that contain
260. eives a poll from a store controller When the enabled backup store controller recognizes the backup request it takes control of the store loop and begins transmitting polls See Backup Store Controller in topic 8 2 1 If no failure is detected during the store controller store loop adapter wrap test the store controller continues to poll and monitor the receive side of the store loop Any beacon received at the store controller contains the number of the beaconing 4683 The location of the beaconing 4683 on the store loop indicates the approximate location of the store loop problem If no beacons are received the store controller indicates an EOP timeout The EOP timeout also indicates the approximate location of the store loop problem In this case the problem is in the store controller the last 4683 on the store loop or the store loop segment between the last 4683 on the store loop and the store controller Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Beacons 6 2 6 Beacons A beacon is a message that a 4683 transmits to indicate it is not receiving polls from the store controller A 4683 expects to continuously receive polls When a 4683 does not receive polls for a specified period of time a poll timeout occurs When a poll timeout occurs the 4683 automatically runs a wrap test of its store loop adapter If a failure is detected during the wrap test the 4683 drops its loop relay The 4683 is r
261. el adapter operational error 4 A Y l 15 through 17 Not valid A i 20 through 23 Operational error 4 4 l 24 through 70 Not valid 4 4 f 71 through 76 Self test error 4 4 l 77 through 80 Not valid 4 A l 81 through 84 Self test error 4 A Y l 86 through 8F Not valid A i 90 External wrap error 4 A 91 through FF Not valid A Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 11 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 2 11 3 Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 Table 20 defines the meaning of failure status bytes 2 and 3 of the device channel adapter 4 Table 20 Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data 5 55 7555 5 5 5 5 55 55 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 55 5555 55 5 Byte 2 Byte 3 Extended Error Code Data definition O i 00 00 No errors detected 4 4 4 01 D
262. el adapter soft Read Write POR 0 Reset the POR mechanism 4 4 i Bit 5 1 Requested a dump Read Write 0 Reset the dump mechanism 4 4 Bit 4 Reserved Read Only i A Y Bit 3 1 Enable the interrupt mechanism Read Write 0 Disable the interrupt mechanism 4 4 i Bit 2 1 Level 7 Interrupt is active Read Only 0 Level 7 Interrupt is inactive 4 4 Bit 1 1 Shared Buffer Access is complete Read Write 0 Shared Buffer Return is complete 4 4 Bit 0 1 Request ed Shared Buffer Access Read Write 0 Shared Buffer Return is complete 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 12 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Shared Buffer Request Byte 2 13 Shared Buffer Request Byte Table 25 describes the bits of the shared buffer request bytes This byte is updated by the system unit microprocessor after each access of the message buffer A A A a ga Wy ey A Sy gh A A Sa sey le ea Ay Ss al Se hn te Sg A Sa il i a Table 25 Shared Buffer Request Byte
263. el adapter tests Use Table 43 to find information on the device channel adapter failure status bytes Table 43 Failure Status Byte Information Byte 0 Error Code Failure Status Byte 0 in topic 5 8 1 i Microprocessor Status Codes Failure Status Byte 1 in topice 5 84 2 i Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data and Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 in topic 5 8 3 1 1 1 i 1 i i Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure and Status Bytes 4 and 5 in topic 5 8 4 1 1 i i i Byte 6 CMOS Error Codes Failure Status Byte 6 in topic 5 8 5 Byte 7 Dump Error Codes Failure Status Byte 7 in topic 5 8 6 i Contains the EC level of the device channel adapter microprocessor i Contains the EC level of the device channel adapter power on self test microcode in ROS Subtopics 8 1 Error Code Failure Status Byte 0 Microprocessor Status Codes Failure Status Byte 1 Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure Status Bytes 4 and 5 CMOS Error Codes Failure Status Byte 6 Dump Error Codes Failure Status Byte 7 Device Channel Adapter System Status Byte Shared Buffer Request Byte 9 Shared Buffer Status Byte 10 Device Channel Adapter Interrupt Flag Byte 11 POST Test Device Channel Adapter Errors 12 4684 Memory Map daa aa a a a a A 00
264. em 4680 memory map 4684 5 8 12 memory 4693 memory map 4693 SIOC subsystem 1 1 memory map Model 541 418 421 1 1 3 memory map models 541 and 421 1 1 3 RAM ROM NVRAM 1 1 3 menus reference diskette 2 6 2 menus system programs 2 6 2 message pending light 4683 4684 5 6 10 5 6 10 3 messages display store controller See store controller 4680 messages displaying 4683 4684 i i Y JO 04 UN 3 4 2 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 INDEX 4 Store Systems Technical Reference Index point of sale terminal offline message 5 6 10 2 point of sale terminal system message 5 6 10 3 point of sale terminal wait message 5 6 10 1 mode control switch See controls and indicators 4693 See power system 4693 model 202 4693 subsystem features model 202 1 2 2 system unit description model 202 1 2 MSR 4693 tests 2 6 3 multiple controller feature 8 1 multiprotocol adapter 4693 tests 2 6 3 N nonvolatile RAM Map 4693 configuration record 2 16 RTC NVRAM Memory Map 2 16 nonvolatile random access memory 4693 NVRAM See nonvolatile random access memory 4693 NVRAM Map 4693 See nonvolatile RAM Map 4693 o offline light 4683 4684 5 6 10 5 6 10 2 online tests 2 3 5 operating system exercisers 2 3 5 2 9 operating system messages 4680 command mode 8 2 5 2 event number description 8 2 6 format general 8 2 6 help level description 8 2 5 2 identifier message 8 2 6 severity level messages 8 2 6 SHELL error message 8 2 5 2 source nu
265. em Partition The system partition is a protected area on the fixed disk that contains the initial machine load IML image and the system programs Model 541 may have 0 1 or 2 fixed disks installed The fixed disk drive in the left position when viewed from the front contains the system partition If no fixed disk is present it is considered a medialess terminal and no system partition is assigned Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 1 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference IML Image 2 1 3 IML Image The 4693 uses the IML image to store the power on self test POST and Basic Input Output System BIOS code With IML some of the code stored in ROM is used for preliminary testing immediately after the Mode Control switch is pressed to switch Ready ON The balance of the POST and BIOS code Called the IML image is stored in the system partition The IML image is loaded on the fixed disk when the terminal is manufactured Note The IML code in the system partition must be at the same program revision level as the code in ROM on the system board In some instances replacing the system board may require an update of the code on the fixed disk If required use UPDATE SYSTEM PROGRAMS If a fixed disk is replaced use BACKUP RESTORE SYSTEM PROGRAMS to create the system partition on the new fixed disk Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 1 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Keyboard Differences 2 1 4 Keyboard Differences There are many
266. emoved Note The terminal does not operate without the battery or the interlock installed in the power supply However the battery does not have to be good in order for the terminal to operate Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 6 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Controls and Indicators for Models 541 421 and 321 1 1 7 Controls and Indicators for Models 541 421 and 321 The operator access areas for Models 541 421 and 321 are shown in Figure 3 and Figure 4 This area is accessible by opening the front access door on the front of the terminal Refer to Table 12 for the relationships between system state and indicator status Note No method is provided to test the LEDs for proper operation Mode Control Switch A single white momentary contact pushbutton located behind the access door on the front of the terminal Switch actuation Causes the terminal to toggle between the ready and non ready modes There is a marking adjacent to the switch open circle ISO DIS 6329 to identify this control Ready Indicator A green LED located adjacent to the Mode Control switch indicates the operational status of the terminal When the indicator is illuminated the power is applied to the terminal including 1 0 for normal operation When the indicator is off the terminal is not operational Fixed Disk Drive Access Indicator A yellow LED to the right of the Ready indicator indicates fixed disk drive access activity when illuminated
267. emoved from the store loop and store loop continuity is maintained Also when a 4683 is powered OFF the loop relay drops and this has the same effect f no failure is detected during the adapter wrap test the 4683 stays on he store loop and continuously transmits a beacon message containing its erminal number While the beacon is being transmitted the 4683 monitors he receive side of the store loop looking for polls att ty O If a beacon is received from another 4683 on the store loop the 4683 stops transmitting its own beacon and passes on the received beacon The store controller receives the beacon message containing the beaconing terminal number The location of the beaconing 4683 indicates the approximate location of the store loop problem The problem can exist in The beaconing 4683 The 4683 just prior to the beaconing 4683 on the store loop The store loop segment between these two 4683s If the beaconing 4683 is the first 4683 in the store loop the problem can exist in The beaconing 4683 The store controller The store loop segment between the store controller and the 4683 O If a 4683 receives its own beacon this means that the store controller is down The 4683 1 Stops beaconing 2 Transmits a backup request message notifying all 4683s on the store loop that the store controller is down Note The 4683 continues to transmit the backup request until it receives a poll from a store controller Wh
268. ems Technical Reference AL 2Ch Write String To NVRAM Without CRC Check 4 6 3 7 AL 2Ch Write String To NVRAM Without CRC Check This function writes a string of information to either the 32 KB or the 8 KB NVRAM areas No checks are performed on the 8 KB RTC NVRAM or the 32 KB NVRAM areas The starting address to write to is supplied in the BX register with bit 15 indicating the desired state of NMI upon exit of this call Control information is provided in the CX register with bit 15 indicating the I O location to read bit 14 indicating address incrementation and bits 13 0 indicating the number of bytes to write On entry register BX contains the address to write Bits 0 through 14 Target starting address Bit 1S 0 NMI is enabled on exit 1 NMI is disabled on exit On entry register CX contains control information Bits 0 through 13 Number of bytes to write 0 No operation Bit 14 1 Increment address Bist IS 0 32 KB NVRAM area location 8 KB RTC NVRAM area location On entry register DS contains the segment address of the source buffer and register SI contains the offset address of the source buffer On return register AH contains the return code 00h Completed successfully 03h Address in out of range 86h Function is not supported On return register BX contains the address modified based on bit 6 of register CH Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 3 7 1 Store Systems
269. en a poll is received this indicates system recovery has occurred and normal operation is resumed Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Cyclical Redundancy Check CRC Message Retransmit 6 2 7 Cyclical Redundancy Check CRC Message Retransmit The data format and error recovery method used for store loop traffic is designed to assure the data integrity of all messages received and transmitted by the store controller and each of the 4683s Each message transmitted to the store loop by the store controller or a 4683 contains a CRC code based on the transmitted data The receiving 4683 or store controller calculates the CRC code using the received data If the CRC code matches the CRC code in the received data the message is acknowledged to the sender as good If the CRC code does not match no acknowledgement is sent This results in the message being retransmitted by the originator The store controller records an entry in the system log when the number of messages received from a 4683 with CRC data errors CRC mismatch exceeds 1 of the total number of messages received from the 4683 The system log entry System message W000 B4 S008 or S009 E017 indicates that 1 of the messages received from 4683 xxx contained CRC data errors CRC mismatch O The store controller records an entry in the system log when the number of messages requiring retransmission to a 4683 exceeds 1 of the tota
270. en not expected Bit 0 0 4 4 j Bit 5 1 More than one interrupt occurred when only one was expected Bit l pO 1 4 Bit 4 Not used always zero 0 4 Bit 3 Not used always zero 0 A Bit 2 Not used always zero 0 4 Bit 1 1 A device channel adapter level 7 hardware interrupt has i occurred 4 Bit 0 1 A device channel adapter level 7 hardware interrupt is expected Sap enn ae Da aid po ae pa een ine ey ey a A merci Sal Du e o weap ange Oe ua a vo Day im en Mal iu ali iain Dd Oe pe A cd E a o y cl tc W We Zu ed Ai ad Dt a ear yeaah Da cd a eed AA id ad Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 14 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference POST Test Device Channel Adapter Errors 2 14 2 POST Test Device Channel Adapter Errors Press F1 and continue with the test A Y Table 28 POST Device Channel i Errors Symptom Cause 14517 Multiple errors 4 4 1 14527 8051 POR error
271. en press the M key Warning Switching POWER OFF at a 4684 affects operations at all point of sale terminals attached to it Before starting store loop problem determination obtain the filled in Terminal Identification Chart from the book IBM 4680 Store System Preparing Your Site ist Cpe as Obtain a store loop layout chart containing O The physical location of store controller s and point of sale terminals O The order of store controller s and point of sale terminals on the store loop O The terminal numbers Display the system message at the primary store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key The primary store controller is the controller that has been designated to control the store loop It is supported by the backup store controller Did any current message display Yes No i 1002 i 1 i Continue at Step 010 1 1 i Did message W760 display Yes No i 1 i f 1004 f The failure symptom has changed Follow the User Response for the message in the IBM 4680 Store System Messages Guide OI Follow the Repair Action for the symptom 1 1 i Is the terminal number 000 in the W760 message Yes No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0160 W772 Message Go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and follow the procedures for St
272. en the main menu appears select START TESTS 3 When the test menu appears select the desired test RUN POS DEVICE TESTS RUN SYSTEM UNIT TESTS RUN VERIFICATION TESTS 4 Follow the instructions that are displayed or select from the next menu that is displayed Note If a device that you want to test does not appear in the list of devices to be tested MENU TEST 4 OR MENU TEST 6 switch Ready mode OFF and then load the reference diskette and run AUTO CONFIGURATION If the device still fails to appear in the test menu it is failing to communicate Go to Start Here in 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Hardware Service Manual to help isolate the 1 0 device problem Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 6 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Configuration Procedure 2 7 Configuration Procedure T Load the system programs See Loading the System Programs in topic 2e Gia 2 When the MAIN MENU appears select START CONFIGURATION 3 When the CONFIGURATION MENU appears select the desired configuration function See Configuration Programs Summary in topic 2 4 Follow the instructions that are displayed See Flow of 4693 System Programs Menus in topic 2 6 2 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Utilities Procedure Using System Programs 2 8 Utilities Procedure Using System Programs T Load the system programs See Loading the System Programs in topic 2 e Gia Les When the MAIN MENU appears sele
273. ence FCS to check the validity of each message it receives An invalid message is discarded When either the operating system or the device sends an information message an acknowledgment is expected from the receiving end If an acknowledgment is not received in a specific time out period the message is retransmitted If all units connected to the channel are operating normally there should be very few CRC errors on the channel Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 10 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device Channel Power On Initialization 5 10 6 Device Channel Power On Initialization During each terminal power on sequence diagnostics run automatically While diagnostics are running no devices on the channel are polled When the ROS code in the terminal takes control a check is made to determine if the diagnostics have uncovered any faults that would prevent the terminal from operating If the ROS code determines that it can activate the terminal polling is started by the master microprocessor when the ROS code passes a polling list to it and initializes operation Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 10 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Topic 6 Store System Description 6 0 Topic 6 Store System Description This topic contains a description of the store system including typical store loops and their operation Store loop theory and operation is the same for 4693 4684 and 4683 point of sale terminals The following discussi
274. erflow 08h Duplicate device found 09h Device being transmitted not online Subtopics 4 6 2 1 AL 00h Initialize SIOC Functions 4 6 2 2 AL 01h Add Device to Poll List 4 6 2 3 AL 02h 4 6 2 4 AL 03h Remove Device From Poll List 4 6 2 5 AL 04h 4 6 2 6 AL 05h Receive Message From Device 4 6 2 7 AL 06h Transmit Message Status and Device Status Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 2 1 AH Add Device to Poll List With Receive Routine Pointer Store Systems Technical Reference AL 00h Initialize SIOC Functions 4 6 2 1 AL 00h Initialize SIOC Functions This function initializes the serial I O channel hardware On entry register BX enables or disables the following functions Bit 0 0 Disable SIOC interface 1 Enable SIOC interface Bit 1 0 Do not change device poll list 1 Remove all devices from poll list Bit 2 0 Disable interrupt 10h video redirection 1 Enable interrupt 10h video redirection Bit 3 0 Disable interrupt 16h keyboard redirection 1 Enable interrupt 16h keyboard redirection Bit 4 0 Do not reset SIOC hardware 1 Reset SIOC hardware On entry if video or keyboard redirection is selected as a device register CX contains a wait parameter If the wait parameter 0 the wait is disabled Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 2 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 01h Add Device to Poll List
275. erminal Operations Guide SA27 3704 IBM 4680 Store System and IBM 4683 4684 Point of Sale Terminal Problem Determination Guide SY27 0330 IBM 4684 Point of Sale Terminal Maintenance Summary Card SX27 3885 IBM 4680 Store System Terminal Test Procedures Reference Summary GX27 3779 IBM 4683 4684 Point of Sale Terminal Maintenance Manual SY27 0295 IBM Store Systems Hardware Service Manual for Input Output Devices SY27 0339 IBM 4693 4684 4683 Point of Sale Terminals Parts Catalog S131 0097 4680 Store System Library IBM 4680 Store System Planning and Configuration Guide GC30 3532 IBM 4680 Store System Selecting Hardware and Software Components GA27 3691 IBM 4680 Store System Preparing Your Site GA27 3692 IBM 4680 BASIC Language Reference SC30 3356 IBM 4680 Store System User s Guide SC30 3518 IBM 4680 Store System Display Manager User s Guide SC30 3404 IBM 4680 Store System Programming Guide SC30 3517 IBM 4680 Store System Terminal Test Procedures Reference Summary GX27 3779 IBM 4680 Store System and IBM 4683 4684 Point of Sale Terminal Problem Determination Guide SY27 0330 IBM Personal System 2 Store Loop Adapter A Installation and Setup Instructions SK2T 0318 IBM 4680 Store System Messages Guide SC30 3521 IBM Store Systems Hardware Technical Reference SY27 0336 4690 Store System Library IBM 4690 Store System Planning Configuration and Installation Guide Copyright
276. ers Video standard Model 321 This model functions as an intelligent point of sale terminal providing power to its own attached 1 0 devices and can provide point of sale support for one cable attached Model 202 terminal Model 321 contains 386SX processor Logic circuitry and the power supply An I O attachment panel tailgate for connecting point of sale devices Card sockets for installing two IBM PS 2 option adapters Video optional Model 202 As the non intelligent model or the satellite terminal Model 202 is dependent on a Model 541 a Model 421 or a Model 321 for operation Each of the other models provide a satellite socket as a standard feature The Model 202 does not provide for any feature expansion capabilities for video It does provide two RS 232C ports as a standard feature Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Features 1 1 2 Features Features of the 4693 include Front access to internal components The internal components of the system unit can be easily installed or removed from the front of the system unit This allows easy installation of features after system installation with minimal disturbance to the checkout stand O IBM Personal System 2 compatibility Applications written for a Personal System 2 should run with no change on Models 541 421 and 321 assuming that operating system I O configuration requirements are met O Programmable power control The
277. esignated to control the store loop It is supported by the backup store controller Is the Store Loop Control status Controlling Loop Yes No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0120 W004 Message 1 i i 1006 Disconnect the primary store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 i Do not reconnect this store controller until the problem has been i resolved Continue at Step 011 1 i 1 I Both store controllers are trying to control the store loop This condition is caused by attaching an active store controller to the store loop when another active store controller is on the store loop Disable the backup store controller Wait 15 seconds and enable the backup store controller Return to normal store operation 008 From step 004 Disconnect the backup store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in tope 7 Do not reconnect this store controller until the problem has been resolved Wait 15 seconds and observe the keyboard lights on the 4683 displaying message W004 Did the OFFLINE light go OFF Yes No 1 1 4 1009 i 1 i Continue at Step 011 i i 1 i Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the backup store contr
278. essage by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No l i 1058 i If all powered OFF 4683s have not been disconnected continue disconnecting them and displaying the system message at the active i store controller i OE If all powered OFF 4683s have been disconnected the problem is in the store loop wiring between the active store controller and the 4683 xxl or in the store loop receptacle for the store controller or 4683 xxl Reconnect all 4683s and report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring i i 1059 Unplug the store loop cable from socket 1 on the 4683 xx1 that you just disconnected from the store loop Attach shorting plug 1B to the 4683 end of the cable See Figure 29 in topie als Plug the other end of the cable into the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i i i 1060 Return to the 4683 xx1 and switch POWER OFF Service the 4683 base unit 1 I i 1061 Return to the 4683 xxl and examine its store loop receptacle for damage Is the store loop receptacle OK Yes No i i 1062 Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring C
279. evice channel The device channel adapter i i adapter system microprocessor was not at a Ready status byte See and Not Enabled condition after topie 24127 initial POR was complete Device channel level 7 software interrupt was not adapter interrupt 1 i f l l eceived when expected i i 1 i K Pp flag byte See COPIE 2r Tae Ea Device channel adapter system status byte See BOpie 2 12 i level 7 hardware interrupt was not eceived when expected i I 1 i K S i Shared buffer The system unit microprocessor was request byte See unable to find the shared buffer opie 2013 after initial POR was complete i Device channel The device channel adapter adapter system microprocessor was not at a Ready status byte See and Not Enabled condition after LECO 2 12 initial POR was complete i 06 Shared buffer The system unit microprocessor was request byte See unable to return the shared buffer to Eopte 2 13 the device channel adapter microprocessor after initial POR was complete 4 4 4 f 07 Device channel The system unit microprocessor was status byte See for a software POR request i adapter system unable to acquire the shared buffer i 1 i i i i topic 2 12 i 08 Shared buffer The syste
280. exit 1 Press S1 type 71 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 2 Wait approximately one minute for message Z002 to display The Zxxx messages appear on the system display For a description of the default system display see Entering Terminal Numbers in the IBM 4680 Store System User s Guide Eo Enter the new terminal number 1xxx where xxx a number from 001 to 999 and then press S2 4 If this is a 4683 xxl or 4684 continue at step 5 If this is a 4683 xx2 message Z004 displays Switch POWER OFF and continue at Entering the Terminal Number in topic 5 6 13 5 When message Z010 displays press S2 6 Watch the display for a series of messages 7 Press S2 to view each message When message Z012 displays the operation is complete 8 Press S2 The terminal operating system loads if this is a 4683 xx1l or 4684 is If customer setup CSU has never been run it is automatically loaded and started 10 If CSU has been run the initial point of sale terminal application program is loaded Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 12 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Entering the Terminal Number 5 6 13 Entering the Terminal Number The terminal number must be entered before the point of sale terminal can operate on the store loop If the number has never been entered message Z001 displays after the power on self test is
281. ey Did message W761 display Yes No i 1031 4 Reconnect the 4683 xxl to the store loop and continue at Step 033 1033 From step 031 Go to the next powered ON 4683 xxl up loop from this 4683 See the store loop layout chart Disconnect this 4683 from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No 1 1 1034 4 i 1 I i i i Reconnect the 4683 xxl to the store loop and continue at Step 042 i i 1 i Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 2 4 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0100 W001 Message From steps 017 029 and 032 Is the store loop cable plugged into socket 1 on this 4683 xx1 base unit Yes No i i i 1036 Correct the problem by plugging the cable into socket 1 1 i 1 i Unplug the store loop cable from socket 1 on this 4683 xx1 base unit Attach shorting plug 1B to the 4683 end of the cable See Figure 29 in topic u Is Plug the other end of the cable into the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i 1 f 1038 i
282. ffline light is ON the operator should press Sl type 2 and press S2 at the 4683 keyboard to display the message and further define the reason for the offline condition Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 SYSTEM MESSAGE AVAILABLE is displayed at the store controller A system message is waiting to be displayed Press System Request and then type M at the store controller keyboard to display the message Note Point of sale terminals that have not yet been loaded with the terminal operating system are not able to provide the operator support necessary to display the message that defines the offline condition A 4683 that is in the process of receiving an IPL across the store loop displays progress messages U001 thru U0O08 vu003 A 4683 that is displaying message U003 is not receiving store loop polls from the store controller When a 4683 is not receiving store loop polls it transmits a beacon message containing its terminal number If a 4683 has not been configured with a terminal number it cannot beacon A 4683 displays message U003 whether it has or has not been configured with a terminal number The external indications at the 4683 are the same for either situation until the 4683 has completed the IPL If the 4683 is beaconing the 4683s down loop and the store controller indicates this in the normal manner U003 can be caused by a failure in
283. fies a register a particular part of storage a data source or a data link The value is represented by one or more characters 3 To refer to a device or an item of data by its address 4 The location in the storage of a computer where data is stored address space The complete range of addresses that is available to a programmer addressing 1 The assignment of addresses to the instructions of a program 2 In data communication the way in which a station selects the station to which it is to send data ADF adapter description file administrative operations Store operations other than direct selling usually performed by supervisors and managers Advanced Data Communications for Stores ADCS An IBM licensed product that functions at the host processor to permit host to store communication alert 1 An error message sent to the system services control point SSCP at the host system 2 For IBM LAN management products a notification indicating a possible security violation a persistent error condition or an interruption or potential interruption in the flow of data around the network See also network management vector transport 3 In SNA a record sent to a system problem management focal point to communicate the existence of an alert condition 4 In the NetView program a high priority event that warrants immediate attention This data base record is generated for certain event types that are designed by user con
284. for attaching additional SCSI devices Additional SCSI devices Can be attached by installing a PS 2 SCSI option adapter in an available option adapter slot A diskette drive is required with a fixed disk drive Model 541 supports the 80 MB and 160 MB 2 inch fixed disk drives Factory installed drives are pre configured by location The first drive is always located in the left position when viewed from the front This drive is assigned SCSI ID 6 LUN 0 The second drive is assigned SCSI ID 5 LUN 0 The SCSI ID numbers can be changed using the reference diskette utilities The selectable boot drive feature is also supported which allows selection of the default drive The default boot drive is the diskette drive followed by the drive with SCSI ID 6 The first fixed disk drive has the system partition that contains the reference diskette function The system partition uses 3 MB of available disk space The file characteristics are detailed in Table 6 Table 6 2 1 2 inch Fixed Disk Drive Specifications Plasencia anti Ss Seer aan ob ope e ee Type 80 MB 160 MB BIOS Capacity 80 MB 160 MB l Bytes Sector 512 512 Sectors Track 47 1 47 1
285. functioning system with power applied to the attached 1 0 devices The non operational mode appears as non functioning The non operational mode has five different states plus two fault conditions depending on the hardware and software conditions which are defined in Table 7 A A A A eee ee oe A Table 7 System States A a a E E a ee E ee i i i i i Main Ready i State AC 5CONT 5PPC 5LM Converter LED O T LED O C LE Sa aaa ant ea a hase A ts poe Ser Sie Fosa n Porro ss hosts 22 A iia Fannen ON Present ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF Fully Operational hes ea ea ie i EPA LASA A RE A tas Hao ci PORTS RA PARA aaa POWER DOWN Absent OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Mem Ret disabled or i i i battery power i i i i i absent i i i i i i i a ei pi horas haser possess sas in E Panas otal ii a e ia Posa INTERLOCK SHUTDOWN Absent ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF Interlock or or i i i i i i battery absent Present i i i REE DEN E panna Fonn on ae Posh rs RR HARO HE Pos SE AAR N OFF Present ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Mem retention disabled i i He pos Herp de tn a ii a Fasa o ind SR iia PaaS BACKUP Absent ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Mem Retention Enabled battery i i i i i power present i i i i i i i i PS E T assiSns li HSpR n noes 35252 a ie Posa R6S a ia a ad STANDBY Present ON ON ON
286. ge is missing or main power is turned off This feature makes it possible to suspend the application program when power is lost or turned off and to resume the application program when power returns The system goes through the following sequence of events to make this process work 1 Application program and operating system software are suspended when a power loss is imminent This is accomplished by a hardware interrupt 2 The software execution environment and application context are saved 3 The microprocessor is halted while power goes off 4 Some time later power returns to the system 5 The software execution environment and application context are restored This is done in two stages a POST reinitializes common hardware functions and recreates a generic software execution environment without destroying the operating system and application programs b Basic Input Output System BIOS routines restore customized hardware functions and data areas to their original state 6 Application program and operating system software are resumed at the next sequential instruction Subtopics 3 3 1 1 POST Memory Retention Support 3 3 1 2 External Dependencies BIOS 3 3 1 3 PLD Recovery Code Path Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference POST Memory Retention Support 3 3 1 1 POST Memory Retention Support Memory retention support function in POST is as follows Lo The code path is structured t
287. ges in the file by using the function keys described on the screen To display a system message at the store controller E Sign on to the store controller using the store procedures 2 Press System Request then type M 33 The system messages are displayed on the screen If a new message is received while you are looking at this screen the new message is not displayed until you press one of the function keys 4 Press QUIT to return to the screen that was displayed when you pressed System Request 5 Find the message in the IBM 4680 Store System Messages Guide Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 2 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Message Description 8 2 5 Message Description Subtopics 8 2 5 1 4680 BASIC Language Messages 8 2 5 2 4680 Operating System Messages Command Mode Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 2 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4680 BASIC Language Messages 8 2 5 1 4680 BASIC Language Messages The 4680 BASIC language Can issue error messages while it is compiling and link editing The following kinds of messages can be displayed Compiler error messages Link86 error messages Runtime error messages Lib86 error messages Stack error messages See the IBM 4680 BASIC Language Reference for these messages Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 2 5 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4680 Operating System Messages Command Mode 8 2 5 2 4680 Operating System Messages Command Mode The 4680 Opera
288. ght IBM Corp 1993 2 10 1 Store Systems Technical Reference POS I O Device Channel Adapter Failure Status Bytes 2 11 POS I O Device Channel Adapter Failure Status Bytes The device channel adapter failure status bytes appear on the screen when the device channel adapter tests detect a failure XX represents a FAILURE STATUS BYTE It may be any number depending on the type of adapter failure that occurred The device Channel adapter failure status bytes are numbered as follows XX XX XX XX XX XX 0 XX 6 1 XX 7 2 XX 8 3 XX g 4 5 The tables on the following topics define the meaning of the device channel adapter failure status bytes These bytes are displayed only when a failure is detected by the device channel adapter tests Use Table 17 to find information on the device channel adapter failure status bytes A Table 17 Failure Status Byte Information Porto st it ee For Go to i ponia A Byte 0 Error Code Failure Status Byte 0 in topic 2 11 1 Poo as ae a E te ie a ee Byte 1 Microprocessor Status Codes Failure Status Byte 1 in i EOpte 201152 4 A Byte 2 Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data and Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 in topic 2 11 3 Byte 3 i i A Byte 4 Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure and Status Bytes 4 and 5 in topic 2 11 4 Byte 5 i i AS partie E See ee ee ee eS Byte 6 CMOS Error Codes
289. ghts on the 4683 that was displaying message W005 Did the OFFLINE light go OFF Yes No 1 i 4 1009 i 1 i Continue at Step 011 1 i 1 I Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the backup store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1011 From steps 002 006 and 009 Display the system message at the active store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key A store controller is active when it is The only store controller on the store loop ee A A The primary store controller and its status is Controlling Loop 22 on eS The backup store controller and its status is Providing Backup Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i 1012 Continue at Step 018 if I 1 i Note the information in the message and return to the 4683 displaying message W005 If it is a 4683 xx2 go to its partner 4683 xxl A 4683 xx2 displays the status of its partner 4683 xxl See the store loop layout chart The store controller transmits data down loop to the first 4683 xxl and to Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 5 2 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0130 W005 Message all the following 4683s on the store loop Each 4683 receives its data from the 4683 or store controller up loop from its posit
290. gram an object program 4 To translate a program written in a high level programming language into a machine language program compiler A program that decodes instructions written as pseudo codes and produces a machine language program to be executed at a later time Contrast with interpretive routine Synonymous with compiling program compiling program Synonym for compiler component 1 Any part of a network other than an attaching device such as an IBM 8228 Multistation Access Unit 2 Hardware or software that is part of a functional unit compound files Files that are kept on the master store controller the alternate master store controller and all other eligible store controllers computer architecture The organizational structure of a computer system including hardware and software concentrator 1 In data transmission a functional unit that permits a common transmission medium to serve more data sources than there are channels currently available within the transmission medium 2 Any device that combines incoming messages into a single message Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 5 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary concentration or extracts individual messages from the data sent in a single transmission sequence deconcentration See also access unit and wiring concentrator configuration The group of devices options and programs that make up a data processing system or network as d
291. h Write Byte To NVRAM Without CRC Check 4 6 3 4 AL 29h Write Byte To NVRAM Without CRC Check This function writes a byte of information to either the 32 KB or the 8 KB NVRAM areas No checks are performed on the 8 KB RTC NVRAM or the 32 KB NVRAM areas The address to write to is supplied in the BX register with bit 15 indicating the desired state of NMI upon exit of this call Control information is provided in the CH register with bit 7 indicating the 1 0 location for this operation and bit 6 indicating address increments On entry register BX contains the address to write Bits 0 through 14 Target address Bitols 0 NMI is enabled on exit 1 NMI is disabled on exit On entry register CH contains control information Bit 6 1 Increment address Bit 7 0 32 KB NVRAM area location 1 8 KB RTC NVRAM area location On entry register CL contains the data to write On return register AH contains the return code 00h Completed successfully 86h Function not supported On return register BX contains the address modified based on bit 6 of register CH Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 3 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 2Ah Read String From NVRAM With CRC Check 4 6 3 5 AL 2Ah Read String From NVRAM With CRC Check This function reads a string of information from either the 32 Kb or the 8 KB NVRAM areas The CRC code is checked to verify that it is good before a
292. hdog i check 8042 for last command accepted xxx error 105 displayed here maybe i additional read write storage test must run in protected mode i set es and ds to memory block display size count for memory lt 640k i point to next 64k block display size count for memory gt 640k memory tests done back to real mode i keyboard test Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 2 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Checkpoint Codes Pi e is e a e a a not a manufacturing mode test kybd A A pees A il ae Soom SA ee check kybd clock ERA O eS O es check for stuck keys pe yaa pe AE pe ap A A Ra eh e eT A Be en oe print stuck key scan code on screen pees eee weet eee ee ee ee a ee ee es test auxiliary device mouse A REA AAA initialize 8042 to honor keylock PILA A ee Be a ee a et setup hardware interrupt vectors level 8 15 vectors start at int 70h turn drive 0 motor on display 601 error message enable timer interrupts check CMOS battery and checksum and card id mismatch error test clock updating display 163 error message check memory size determined CMOS display 164 error message check for CRT adapter error display 2401 error message initialize floppy for drive type check for second floppy RPL ROM scan if bad battery CMOS CRC error or Card ID mismatch Feature card ROM scan ROM at C000 gt E000 setup printer_base setup rs232_base he eee ape eee
293. he cause of failure processor In a computer a functional unit that interprets and executes instructions programmed I O PIO In an IBM Personal Computer a method of accessing an input or output port with specific instructions prompt A character or word displayed by the operating system to indicate that it is ready to accept input protocol 1 A set of semantic and syntactic rules that determines the behavior of functional units in achieving communication 2 In SNA the meanings of and the sequencing rules for requests and responses used for managing the network transferring data and synchronizing the states of network components 3 A specification for the format and relative timing of information exchanged between communicating parties Ps Presentation space Qi queue A line or list formed by items in a system waiting for service for example tasks to be performed or messages to be transmitted in a message routing system R radio frequency RF Any frequency in the range within which radio waves may be transmitted from about 10 KHz to about 300 000 MHz RAM Random access memory random access An access mode in which specific logical records are obtained from or placed into a mass storage file in a nonsequential manner Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 19 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary random access memory RAM A computer s or adapter s volatile
294. he following functions are accessed by interrupt 15h with register 42 and register AL AL AL AL AL AL AL AL AL AL AL AL On return from these functions 00h 01h 02h 03h 04h Subtopics 4 6 1 1 A 4 6 1 2 A 4 6 1 3 A 4 6 1 4 A 4 6 1 5 A 4 6 1 6 A 4 6 1 7 A 20h 21h 22h 23h 24h 25h 26h 27h 28h 29h 2Ah 2Bh AL equal to the number below Reserved Suspend system Set the power on events Reserved Reserved Read PPC status and power on events Reserved Diagnosis PPC hardware Reserved Enable PDI and use direct NMI to the processor Enable PDI and use channel check NMI Disable PDI No error Function call not valid Input parameters not valid Interface error Device L Li Li Ly Li L Li 21 22 25 27 29 2A 2B DPP o a busy Suspend System PPC hardware not responding Resend command Set the Power On Event Read PPC Status and Power On Events Diagnosis PPC Hardware Enable PDI and Use Direct NMI to the Processor Enable PDI and Use Channel Check NMI Disable PDI Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 1 1 AH register AH contains condition code Store Systems Technical Reference AL 21h Suspend System 4 6 1 1 AL 21h Suspend System This function sets the 4693 power to off When this command is issued to the PPC hardware an NMI is generated at least 4 ms before the system po
295. he store controller program Did the active store controller load the store controller program successfully Yes No i i 1031 i 1 I i The failure symptom has changed Follow the User Response for the message in the IBM 4680 Store System Messages Guide SOE gt Follow the Repair Action for the symptom 1 i 1 i From step 029 Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the active store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 3 4 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0120 W004 Message 7 4 MAP 0120 W004 Message The 4683 is receiving store loop communications from the store controller but no responses are being received for messages that the 4683 has sent to the store controller i he store loop is open down loop from he 4683 displaying message W004 4683 xx1 is failing down loop he 4683 xxl store loop cable is ailing he 4683 base unit is failing he primary store controller is ailing 1 i i i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i i i he backup store controller is failing he distance exceeds 4000 feet 1220 eters between powered ON 4683 xxls on he store loop The 4683 keyboard OFFLINE light is ON CB HAHAHA H HH PtH The store controller can be communicating with other 4683s on the store loop 1001 To
296. he store loop receptacle for the store controller or 4683 xxl Reconnect all 4683s and report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1 I 1 i Unplug the store loop cable from socket 1 on the 4683 xx1 xx1 that you just disconnected from the store loop Attach shorting plug 1B to the 4683 end of the cable See Figure 29 in topic Li Plug the other end of the cable into the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i i 1061 Return to the 4683 xx1 and switch POWER OFF Service the 4683 base unit 1 i i i Return to the 4683 xxl and examine its store loop receptacle for damage Is the store loop receptacle OK Yes No i i 1063 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 5 7 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0130 W005 Message Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1 i 1 Correct the problem by exchanging the store loop cable attached to the 4683 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 5 8 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0140 W762 Message 7 6 MAP 0140 W762 Message he 4683 may be powered OFF terminal umber displayed in message W762 he 4683 may be offline terminal umber displayed in message W7
297. hout additional installation and maintenance considerations 4684 configurations without a VGA attached video display and PS 2 Subtopics aaa aa y ST NN NNN 1 oof WN Installation and Maintenance Hardware Configuration Installation Instructions Operating Instructions Theory of Operation Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Installation and Maintenance 5 7 1 Installation and Maintenance RIPL can be installed and used on a 4684 1xx 200 300 if maintenance limitations are taken into consideration Diskette drive required for 4684 reference diskette functions Configuration Diagnostic tests PS 2 VGA video display and PS 2 Enhanced Keyboard required for Es Token Ring RIPL progress indicators on video RIPL failure problem determination via video keyboard Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 7 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Hardware 5 7 2 Hardware Hardware RIPL support for the 4684 differs depending on the 4684 model the type of network adapter used and the style of adapter used 4684 1xx O The 4684 1x0 models do not have baseband LAN integrated on the system planar board O The 4684 1x1 models have baseband LAN including RIPL ROM integrated on the system planar board O The 4684 1x0 and 4684 1x1 models cannot have a baseband LAN adapter installed in an option adapter slot O The 4684 1x0 and 4684 1x1 models can have one or two token ring adap
298. ializing option adapters 7 On Warm Starts and PLD Recoveries POST protects the integrity of adjacent memory by not moving or re creating the EBDA Gx IPL reason codes dump reason codes and similar problem determination data are stored in NVRAM Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference External Dependencies BIOS 3 3 1 2 External Dependencies BIOS POST memory retention functions have the following dependencies on BIOS routines 1 BIOS routines store the RESUME flag 5678H into memory address 40 72 before power is lost to indicate the application should be resumed when power returns 2 BIOS routines restore hardware operating parameters that are customized for specific operating system or application program requirements 3 BIOS routines restore memory data destroyed by POST during the RESUME process Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 1 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference PLD Recovery Code Path 3 3 1 3 PLD Recovery Code Path The 4693 runs with memory retention enabled most of the time Following is an overview of the PLD recovery path through POST 1 Program the BIC chip to re enable memory 2 Read hardware status to determine if memory retention is ON Take the Cold Start or Warm Start code path if memory retention is OFF Else assume this is a PLD Recovery 3 Scan memory for parity errors to determine if memory retention was successful Store the WARMBO
299. ical Reference Glossary EIA interface An industry accepted interface for connecting devices having voltage related limits element 1 In a set an object entity or concept having the properties that define a set 2 A parameter value in a list of parameter values emulation 1 The imitation of all or part of one computer system by another primarily by hardware so that the imitating system accepts the same data executes the same programs and achieves the same results as the imitated computer system 2 The use of programming techniques and special machine features to permit a computing system to execute programs written for another system enabled 1 On a LAN pertaining to an adapter or device that is active operational and able to receive frames from the network 2 Pertaining to a state of a processing unit that allows the occurrence of certain types of interruptions 3 Pertaining to the state in which a transmission control unit or an audio response unit can accept incoming calls on a line end user The ultimate source or destination of data flowing through an SNA network An end user can be an application program or a workstation operator error condition The condition that results from an attempt to use instructions or data that are not valid error message A message that is issued because an error has been detected Ethernet network A baseband LAN with a bus topology in which messages are broadcast on a co
300. ical Reference Backup Configurations 8 2 2 Backup Configurations There are several options in connecting the store controllers and the store loops depending on requirements Figure 32 in topic 8 2 1 shows four possible configurations The four examples are O Two store controllers with one having primary responsibility for a store loop and one serving in a backup capacity O Two store controllers each one operating its own store loop and giving backup support for the other O Three store controllers one has no primary responsibility for a store loop but it gives backup support for the other two store controllers O Three or more store controllers arranged so that each one controls its own store loop and gives backup support for one other Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 2 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Using the Supplemental Diskette to Recover from a PLD 8 2 3 Using the Supplemental Diskette to Recover from a PLD A loss of electrical power is referred to as a power line disturbance PLD Although the 4680 Operating System can recover from most PLDs PLDs can occur when the operating system is performing certain fixed disk functions that are not recoverable For example the store controller Cannot recover when a PLD occurs while the 4680 Operating System is writing to The disk files The subdirectories The file allocation table FAT sectors that are mandatory for IPL When the store controller fails to recover
301. ically loaded and started If CSU has been run the initial point of sale terminal application program is loaded Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 9 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Displaying 4683 xx2 Configuration 5 6 9 2 Displaying 4683 xx2 Configuration Note This procedure assumes that the 4683 xx2 is up and running at the time the request is made When Displaying 4683 xx1 Configuration in topic 5 6 9 1 is performed the 4683 xx2 displays message Z001 10 Press S1 type 71 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 Wait approximately one minute for message Z002 to display If you have more than one display attached to the point of sale terminal the Zxxx messages display on the system display See Entering Terminal Numbers in the IBM 4680 Store System User s Guide for a description of the default system display Key the current terminal number 1xxx where xxx a number from 001 to 999 and then press S2 Do not enter a new terminal number If the terminal number you entered in does not equal the current 4683 xx2 terminal number message Z004 displays If this message is displayed ensure that you are entering the correct terminal number When message Z010 displays press S2 Messages in the range of Z014 through Z024 are displayed The text associated with these messages indicates the socket number and whether a
302. ice in which the transmission circuits are housed twisted pair A transmission medium that consists of two insulated conductors twisted together to reduce noise U underflow exception A condition caused by the result of an arithmetic operation having a magnitude less than the smallest possible nonzero number See also overflow exception uninterruptible power supply UPS A device connected between the electric utility power and a user s equipment Its output supplies constant electrical power in the event of power line fluctuations or a complete loss of utility power for a limited time universally administered address The address permanently encoded in an adapter at the time of manufacture All universally administered addresses are unique Contrast with locally administered address universal product code UPC An encoded number that can be assigned to and printed on or attached to an article of merchandise for scanning unnumbered U frame A frame in unnumbered format used to transfer unnumbered control functions See also information frame supervisory frame UPC Universal product code up loop The position of a terminal or store controller on the store loop in relation to the direction of data flow on the store loop For example Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 24 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary each terminal or store controller receives loop data from the next terminal up lo
303. ice in a data processing system by which data can be received from the system Synonymous with output unit output unit Synonym for output device overflow exception A condition caused by the result of an arithmetic operation having a magnitude that exceeds the largest possible number See also underflow exception owner In relation to files an owner is the user that creates the file and therefore has complete access to the file PY packet assembler disassembler PAD A functional unit that enables data terminal equipments DTEs not equipped for packet switching to access a packet switched network PAD Packet assembler disassembler page 1 The portion of a panel that is shown on a display surface at one time 2 To move back and forth among the pages of a multiple page panel See also scroll 3 In a virtual storage system a fixed length block that has a virtual address and is transferred as a unit between main storage and auxiliary storage panel The complete set of formatted information that appears in a single display on a visual display unit Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 17 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary parallel port 1 A port that transmits the bits of a byte in parallel along the lines of the bus one byte at a time to an I O device 2 On a personal computer it connects a device that uses a parallel interface such as a dot matrix printer to the computer Contra
304. ice list that the bootstrap loader uses instead of the default list resident in ROM The selectable boot device list can specify up to four boot devices SCSI devices and logical drives on a LAN are acceptable choices for selectable boot devices No new functions are required in the 4693 POST code to support this feature Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 3 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Feature Slot Setup 3 3 4 Feature Slot Setup The feature slot setup functions in POST add more automation to hardware configuration and reduce much of the dependency on the reference diskette when hardware configuration changes are made In the 4693 setup data for uninstalled features is stored in NVRAM POST automatically reconfigures the hardware when option adapters are added removed and relocated In current PS 2 products card setup data is stored in the feature slot POS data area of NVRAM This data structure contains an entry for every architectured card slot that a PS 2 can have even though some may not actually exist Entries in the data structure are assigned sequentially to specific card slots and cannot be reassigned POST keeps this data structure without alteration to maintain downward compatibility with PS 2 products The feature slot POS data area contains installed option adapter setup data only A Table 35 Feature Slot POS Data Area PS A A ee ee e do e ee AE NVRAM Address Descri
305. ignifies permission to transmit over the network It consists of a starting delimiter an access control field and an end delimiter The frame control field contains a token bit that indicates to a receiving device that the token is ready to accept information If a Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 23 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary device has data to send along the network it appends the data to the token When data is appended the token then becomes a frame See frame token ring A network with a ring topology that passes tokens from one attaching device node to another A node that is ready to send can Capture a token and insert data for transmission token ring network 1 A ring network that allows unidirectional data transmission between data stations by a token passing procedure over one transmission medium so that the transmitted data returns to and is removed by the transmitting station The IBM Token Ring Network is a baseband LAN with a star wired ring topology that passes tokens from network adapter to network adapter 2 A network that uses a ring topology in which tokens are passed in a circuit from node to node A node that is ready to send can capture the token and insert data for transmission 3 A group of interconnected token rings TP Transaction program trace 1 A record of the execution of a computer program It exhibits the sequences in which the instructions were executed 2 A reco
306. ing Switching POWER OFF at a 4684 affects operations at all point of sale terminals attached to it Before starting store loop problem determination obtain the filled in Terminal Identification Chart from the book IBM 4680 Store System Preparing Your Site Ls eras Obtain a store loop layout chart containing O The physical location of store controller s and point of sale terminals O The order of store controller s and point of sale terminals on the store loop O The terminal numbers If the 4683 displaying message W003 is a 4683 xx2 go to its partner 4683 xxl Ensure the store loop cable is plugged into socket 1 on the 4683 xx1 displaying message W003 and that the other end of the cable is plugged into the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 and Figure 29 in topic 7 1 On this 4683 is the store loop cable plugged into socket 1 and into the store loop receptacle Yes No 4 1002 o i 1 i 1 i i Correct the problem by plugging the cable into socket 1 and the store loop receptacle 1 i i i Is this the only powered ON 4683 xxl connected to the store loop Yes No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0110 W003 Message poses 1004 pons Continue at Step 008 Unplug the store loop cable from socket 1 on this 4683 xxl base unit Attach shorting plug 1B to the 4683 end of the cable See Figure 29 in topie Pals At the 4683
307. ing or portable microcomputer that usually consists of a system unit a display a keyboard one or more diskette drives internal fixed disk storage and an optional printer PCs are designed primarily to give independent computing power to a single user and are inexpensively priced for purchase by individuals or small businesses Examples include the various models of the IBM Personal Computers and the IBM Personal System 2 computer phase The relative timing position of periodic electrical signals physical unit PU In SNA the component that manages and monitors the resources of a node such as attached links and adjacent link stations as requested by a system services control point SSCP through an SSCP SSCP session PIO Programmed I O pipe A sequential file in a memory buffer that passes messages from one program to another PLD Power line disturbance plug 1 A connector for attaching wires from a device to a cable such as a store loop A plug is inserted into a receptacle or plug 2 To insert a connector into a receptacle or socket pointer 1 An identifier that indicates the location of an item of data in memory 2 A data element that indicates the location of another data element 3 A physical or symbolic identifier of a unique target point of sale terminal 1 The IBM 4683 Point of Sale Terminal A unit that provides point of sale transaction data collection credit authorization price look up and
308. int of Sale Terminal Video Display Adapter Managers Keylock Optical Character Reader OCR Adapter Point of Sale Scanner Single Track Magnetic Stripe Reader Dual Track Magnetic Stripe Reader Scale Adapter Coin Dispenser Adapter Totals Retention Point of Sale Terminal Keyboard Tone Serial Port Adapter Magnetic Wand Adapter 1520 Hand Held Scanner Model A02 Hand Held Bar Code Reader Point of Sale Terminal RAM Disk SSRT Store Controller See the IBM 4680 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 Store Loop Device Channel Adapter IPL Partial Dump ristics Printer Matrix Keyboard 50 Key Keyboard Alphanumeric or ANPOS Keyboard Store System 8 2 6 2 Messages Guide Store Systems Technical Reference Topic 9 Collecting Information About a Problem 9 0 Topic 9 Collecting Information About a Problem This topic can be used to help gather information about a store system problem When a store system consists of 4693 point of sale terminals the operating system in use determines most of the information gathering procedures Refer to the Operating System manual for your system This topic includes the 4680 Store System procedures for collecting and reporting system hardware information The store system is an 4680 Store System when the 4680 Operating System is running in the store controller This information can then be used to analyze problems Subtopics 1 Requesting a Store Controller Storage Dump Requesting a 4683 S
309. ion on the store loop Is this the first powered ON 4683 xx1 down loop from the active store controller Yes No 4 1014 i i i i Continue at Step 023 1 i 1 i 1015 Disconnect this 4683 xxl from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No 4 1016 i 1 i Reconnect the 4683 xx1 to the store loop and continue at Step 052 1 I 1 i 1018 From step 012 Is the store loop cable plugged into the store loop adapter on the active store controller See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Yes No i i i 1019 Correct the problem by plugging the cable into the store loop adapter 1 i 1 i Return to the 4683 xx1 displaying message W005 On this 4683 is the store loop cable plugged into socket 1 and into the store loop receptacle Yes No i i 021 Correct the problem by plugging the cable into socket 1 and the store loop receptacle Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the active store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1023 From steps 014 025 and 030
310. iques pour les appareils num riques telles que prescrites par le Reglement sur le brouillage radio lectrique tabli par le ministere des Communications du Canada L exploitation faite en milieu r sidentiel peut entrainer le brouillage des r ceptions radio et t l ce qui obligerait le propri taire ou l op rateur prendre les dispositions n cessaires pour en liminer les causes Copyright IBM Corp 1993 FRONT_1 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Laser Product Identification FRONT_1 3 Laser Product Identification IBM Point of Sale Scanners and the IBM 1520 Hand Held Scanner are laser products Where required the scanner has a label that identifies its classification The information on the label in the U S A is shown below Class II Laser Product Avoid Long Term Viewing of Direct Light Copyright IBM Corp 1993 FRONT_1 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Information about Translated Safety Notices FRONT_1 4 Information about Translated Safety Notices The following table provides a listing of translated safety brochures for non English languages De Veiligheidsinstructies voor Belgi kunt u vinden in het boekje met het referentienummer GB11 7869 Vous trouverez les Instructions de S curit pour la Belgique dans la petite brochure num ro de r f rence GB11 6669 Vous trouverez la traduction des consignes de s curit dans la brochure portant la r f rence GA09 0521 Sikkerhedsforskrif
311. irectory routine Part of a program or a sequence of instructions called by a program that may have some general or frequent use RPL Remote program load runtime error Error occurring during program execution iS SAA Systems Application Architecture satellite 1 A computer that is under the control of another computer and performs subsidiary operations 2 An offline auxiliary computer SBCS Single byte character set scan To pass an item over or through the scanner so that the encoded information is read See also wanding scanner A device that examines the bar code on merchandise tickets credit cards and employee badges and generates analog or digital signals corresponding to the bar code scroll To move all or part of the display image vertically or horizontally to display data that cannot be observed within a single display image See also page 2 SCSI Small computer system interface SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control sector A 512 byte area of the control unit diskette the amount of data that is transferred at one time to or from the diskette segment See cable segment LAN segment ring segment serial port On personal computers a port used to attach devices such as display devices letter quality printers modems plotters and pointing devices such as light pens and mice it transmits data one bit at a time Contrast with parallel port server 1 A device program or code
312. is ON AO i001 To display the terminal number press Sl type 7 and press S2 To display messages at a point of sale terminal when the keyboard OFFLINE light is ON press Sl type 2 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS Keyboard during some procedures and on the Enhanced Alphanumeric Keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 To display a system message at the store controller sign on at the store controller press System Request and then press the M key Warning Switching POWER OFF at a 4684 affects operations at all point of sale terminals attached to it Before starting store loop problem determination obtain the filled in Terminal Identification Chart from the book IBM 4680 Store System Preparing Your Site we Jon Es Obtain a store loop layout chart containing O The physical location of store controller s and point of sale terminals O The order of store controller s and point of sale terminals on the store loop O The terminal numbers Ensure the store loop cable is plugged into socket 1 on the 4683 xx1 displaying message W005 and that the other end of the cable is plugged into the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 and Figure 29 in topic 7 1 Is there a backup store controller connected to this store loop Yes No i 002 Continue at Step 011 1 i 1 i At the backup store controller display the Backup Store Loop status Is the Backup Sto
313. is ON meters between powered ON 4683 xxls on the store loop l 1001 To display the terminal number press S1 type 7 and press S2 To display messages at a point of sale terminal when the keyboard OFFLINE light is ON press Sl type 2 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS Keyboard during some procedures and on the Enhanced Alphanumeric Keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 To display a system message at the store controller sign on at the store controller press System Request and then press the M key Warning Switching POWER OFF at a 4684 affects operations at all point of sale terminals attached to it Before starting store loop problem determination obtain the filled in Terminal Identification Chart from the book IBM 4680 Store System Preparing Your Site e Spies Obtain a store loop layout chart containing O The physical location of store controller s and point of sale terminals O The order of store controller s and point of sale terminals on the store loop O The terminal numbers Ensure the store loop cable is plugged into socket 1 on the 4683 xx1 displaying message W001 and that the other end of the cable is plugged into the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 and Figure 29 in topic 7 1 Is there a backup store controller connected to this store loop Yes No 1 1 i i 1002 Continue at Step 011 1 i i I At the backup st
314. is configured with a terminal number entered in its totals retention If the 4683s are offline because of an open store loop Down loop from the open store loop condition O The first active 4683 down loop beacons 0 Message W005 is placed in the message queue of the beaconing 4683 O The active 4683s down loop from the beaconing 4683 indicate that a 4683 up loop is beaconing and they pass the beacon on to the next 4683 O Message W007 is placed in the message queue of each active 4683 down loop from the beaconing 4683 O The store controller receives the beacon from the beaconing 4683 and log message W760 in the system message log Up loop from the open store loop condition O The 4683s do not beacon because they receive store loop polls O They do not see the beacon from the beaconing 4683 O If a 4683 responds to a poll with a message the message does not reach the store controller O Eventually the 4683 goes offline because the store controller failed to respond to the message 0 Message W004 is placed in the message queue of each active 4683 up loop from an open store loop condition If no active 4683s are down loop from an open store loop condition The store controller does not receive the expected end of poll The store controller does not receive a beacon An end of poll timeout occurs at the store controller Message W764 is logged in the system message log at the store controller If a 4683 detects an ope
315. is pressed and AC power is present Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 10 1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Subfunction 02h Set the Power On Event 4 10 1 2 Subfunction 02h Set the Power On Event This subfunction setups a future event for automatically turning the 4693 power on These power on events remain in effect until changed by the application or AC and battery power is lost On entry the power on events are defined in request block offset 1Bh Bit 7 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 3 Ring detect 2 Bit 2 Ring detect 1 Bit 1 Clock alarm Bit 0 Reserved Setting the appropriate bit enables the corresponding power on event Multiple bits may be set for any combination of power on events If no power on event bits are set the system powers on when the Mode Control switch is pressed The Mode Control switch is always enabled as a power on event Note The 4693 does not switch to ready mode power on if AC power is not present On entry if the clock alarm event is selected as a power on event the following request block offsets must be loaded with the alarm day and time 12h Hour Hour is in 24 hour BCD format Valid values are 00h through 23h 13h Minute Minute is in BCD format Valid values are 00h through 59h 18h Day Day is the day of the month Valid values are Olh through 31h Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 10 1 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Subfunction 05h
316. isplayed on the system display See Entering Terminal Numbers in the IBM 4680 Store System User s Guide for a description of the default system display Enter the current terminal number 1xxx where xxx a number from 001 to 999 and then press S2 Do not enter a new terminal number Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 When message Z010 displays press S2 Messages in the range of Z014 through Z024 are displayed The text associated with these messages indicates the socket number and whether a device is configured or attached to that socket For a list of point of sale terminal device IDs see Device IDs for the Point of Sale Terminal in topic 5 6 8 Press S2 after each message is displayed O If a socket has no device configured or attached its message is not displayed O An error message may be displayed when you IPL the point of sale terminal if a socket has a device configured but not attached When message Z025 displays press S2 When message Z012 displays this indicates the operation is complete If an error was discovered 0 The configuration must be corrected at the store controller See the IBM 4680 Store System User s Guide to correct the configuration Us op S O The correct device must be connected to the correct socket at the point of sale terminal Press S2 If customer setup CSU has never been run it is automat
317. it Configuration in the 4684 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference MENUS for Configuration Procedures 5 3 1 MENUs for Configuration Procedures PICTURE 11 Figure 13 Flow Chart of MENUs for Configuration Procedures Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Understanding the Configuration Process 5 3 2 Understanding the Configuration Process The configuration process Can be done in two ways automatic configuration and manual configuration Subtopics 5 3 2 1 Automatic Configuration 5 3 2 2 Manual Configuration Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Automatic Configuration 5 3 2 1 Automatic Configuration Automatic configuration is a process that determines the internal devices option adapters and POS devices that are attached and where they are connected This process occurs under two circumstances When you answer yes to the question M0101 A CONFIGURATION ERROR OCCURRED DO YOU WANT TO RUN CONFIGURATION 1 YES 0 N0 When you select CREATE CHANGE CONFIGURATION from MENU Cl The automatic configuration process may cause some questions to be asked concerning attached devices The configuration information is not permanently saved until you select ACTIVATE NEW CONFIGURATION from MENU C2 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 2 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Manual Configuration 5 3 2 2 Manual Configuration M
318. ith save RAM active i i i 13 MB only 1K is reserved at System RAM top of 16 MB for system ROM otherwise 128 KB 100000 OFFFFF 128 KB System ROM DE0000 ODFFFF 128 KB Adapter i 1 0 QUCO000 OBFFFF 128 KB Video RAM i 0A0000 O9FFFF 640 KB System RAM i i Beginning Address gt 000000 Figure 1 Model 541 and 421 Memory Map Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 3 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference NVRAM 1 1 3 3 NVRAM Models 541 421 and 321 each have 40 KB NVRAM 32 KB is in the NVRAM section and 8 KB is included in the real time clock RTC chip 4 KB is reserved for by hardware system Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 3 4 Memory Map Refer to Figure 2 for the SIOC space usage 2000 0800 O7FF Beginning Offset gt 0000 Store Systems Technical Reference Memory Map subsystem memory map for adapter memory 8 KB NVRAM Optional Figure 2 4693 SIOC Subsystem Memory Map Ending Offset The base address is configurable to any of the following addresses 0Cc0000 0Cc8000 0D0000 0D8000 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 3 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Port Interface and Storage Devices 1 1 4 Port Interface and Storage Devices Subtopics 1 1 4 1 PS 2 Keyboard Aux Device 1 1 4 2 Video Support 1 1 4 3 Type 4 Serial Asynchronous Port
319. kettes There are three diskettes available to support the 4693 family of terminals IBM 4693 Point of Sale Terminal Reference Diskette SX27 3918 IBM 4693 Point of Sale Terminal Diagnostic Diskette SX27 3928 IBM 4693 Point of Sale Terminal Support Diskette for Medialess Terminals SX27 3929 The reference and diagnostic diskettes commonly referred to as system diskettes are not shipped with each terminal They reside in the system partition of the fixed disk on a 4693 Model 541 The support diskette for medialess terminals is shipped as part of the bill of materials for store controller or LAN server machines The programs on these diskettes called system programs are used to configure test and run utilities on 4693 terminals The preferred method of operation on a Model 541 is to run the system programs from the system partition If there is a fixed disk failure you Can use the system diskettes For Models 421 and 321 medialess terminals the image of the support diskette is downloaded from the store controller or network server when requested at the medialess terminal The instructions for installation and use of the support diskette at the store controller or network server are in a README DOC file present on each diskette Each medialess terminal that requires the diskette image must be defined at the controller or server Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference System Partition 2 1 2 Syst
320. ks and Service Marks FRONT_1 1 Trademarks and Service Marks The following terms used in this publication denoted by an asterisk are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States and or other countries IBM PS 2 Proprinter PC DOS Personal Computer AT Personal System 2 OS 2 Operating System 2 NetView 0s 400 AIX Copyright IBM Corp 1993 FRONT_1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Electronic Emission Notices FRONT_1 2 Electronic Emission Notices Federal Communications Commission FCC Statement Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may Cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifi
321. kup reference diskette Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 4 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Restore Configuration 5 3 4 5 Restore Configuration This option allows you to retrieve the 4684 and 4683 configuration data from the backup reference diskette and make it the current configuration The configuration data is saved in the 4684CONF file by the backup configuration process Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 4 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Resetting the POS Configuration in the 4684 5 3 5 Resetting the POS Configuration in the 4684 This procedure should only be used when O A POS configuration conflict or problem cannot be resolved with the normal configuration process O You are adding a new POS option or feature to the 4684 system unit This procedure resets the configuration data allowing you to configure only those devices attached to the 4684 or the 4683 If you have not had an error detected during the power on self test this procedure does not work You know if an error is detected during power on self test POST if you hear two short tones If no errors are detected you hear only one tone If you hear the two short tones during the POST continue at step sige If no errors are detected during the POST do the following a Switch POWER OFF at the 4684 Warning Switching POWER OFF at a 4684 affects operations at all point of sale terminals attached to it b Unplug one of the keyboards to
322. l adapter interrupt flag byte This byte is updated by the software interrupt service routine when a level 7 hardware interrupt occurs ty ay gpa aia ey i age Hi A A a ag Hoe yy yi A Sa ig i Hs nny A A Sg A ep ig ilo iy Say ek hry ay ly Table 52 Device Channel Adapter Interrupt Flag Byte E a gl A o Dj eS ne PW apy ae Yard pm oe lt ey SU PE EEE PON Se py ae ir OE de e eB cd do Oe us 9 Wes enya Lo ia OE eee may nanny wes Panny eg Bit Definition 4 A Bit 7 1 The level 7 interrupt is not from the device channel adapter 4 4 Bit 6 1 An interrupt occurred when not expected bit 0 0 4 A Bit 5 1 More than one interrupt occurred when only one was expected l bit 0 1 4 Bit 4 Not used always zero 0 4 A Lo Bat 3 Not used always zero 0 4 A Bit 2 Not used always zero 0 4 4 Bit 1 1 A device channel adapter level 7 hardware interrupt has i i occurred A y Bit 0 1 A device channel adapter level 7 hardware interrupt is i i expected pr A A E A A a a AA IO A Bt Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 10 1 Store Systems Technical Reference POST Test Device Channel Adapter Errors 5 8 11
323. l number of messages transmitted to the 4683 The system log entry System message W000 B4 S008 or S009 E018 indicates that 1 of the messages transmitted to 4683 xxx were not acknowledged and were retransmitted Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Store Loop Error Conditions and Error Messages 6 2 8 Store Loop Error Conditions and Error Messages It is important to understand the terms down loop and up loop when dealing with store loop failures These terms are defined as the position of a 4683 or store controller relative to the direction of data flow on the store loop ple The store controller transmits data to the first 4683 down loop on the store loop Lis This 4683 receives the loop data accepts or adds data and passes the data on to the next 4683 down loop from its own position on the store loop 3 This continues with each 4683 receiving data from the 4683 immediately up loop from its position on the store loop and passing the data to the next 4683 down loop 4 The last 4683 down loop passes the data back to the store controller A 4683 is offline from the store controller A 4683 is offline when it is not receiving store loop polls or responses to messages Many conditions can cause a 4683 to be offline These conditions can exist in the 4683 in the store controller or in the store loop wiring When a 4683 is offline the 4683 keyboard Offline light comes ON When the O
324. l powered OFF 4683s have been disconnected the problem is in the store loop wiring or the store loop receptacles for the 4683 xx1s Reconnect all 4683s and report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1 i 1 I Unplug the store loop cable from socket 1 on the 4683 xx1 that you just disconnected from the store loop Attach shorting plug 1B to the 4683 end of the cable See Figure 29 in topic Vu Ls Plug the other end of the cable into the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No 1 f 1047 f i Return to the 4683 xxl and switch POWER OFF Service the 4683 base unit 1 i 1 i Return to the 4683 xxl and examine its store loop receptacle for damage Is the store loop receptacle OK Yes No l i 1049 Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1 I 1 i Correct the problem by exchanging the store loop cable attached to the 4683 1051 From steps 016 and 028 Is the store loop cable plugged into the store loop adapter on the active store controller See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Yes No I i 1052 Correct the problem by plugging the cable into the store loop adapter 1 1 i
325. le in binary coded decimal notation that uses the weights 8 4 2 1 the number twenty three is represented by 0010 0011 In the pure binary numeration system its representation is 10111 binary synchronous communication BSC A form of telecommunication line control that uses a standard set of transmission control characters and control character sequences for binary synchronous transmission of binary coded data between stations Contrast with synchronous data link control SDLC BIOS Basic Input Output System bit Either of the binary digits a 0 or 1 bits per second bps The rate at which bits are transmitted per second Contrast with baud Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 3 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary bootstrap 1 A sequence of instructions whose execution causes additional instructions to be loaded and executed until the complete computer program is in storage 2 A technique or device designed to bring itself into a desired state by means of its own action For example a machine routine whose first few instructions are sufficient to bring the rest of itself into the computer from an input device bps Bits per second Bps Bytes per second broadband A frequency band divisible into several narrower bands so that different kinds of transmissions such as voice video and data transmission can occur at the same time Synonymous with wideband Contrast with baseband broadcast Simultaneo
326. leted successfully 02h NVRAM data is corrupt 32 KB area only 86h Function not supported On return register BX contains the address modified based on bit 6 of register CH Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 3 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 28h Read Byte From NVRAM Without CRC Check 4 6 3 3 AL 28h Read Byte From NVRAM Without CRC Check This function reads a byte of information from either the 32 KB or the 8 KB NVRAM areas No checks are performed on the 8 KB RTC NVRAM or the 32 KB NVRAM areas The read address is supplied in the BX register with bit 15 indicating the desired state of NMI upon exit of this call Control information is provided in the CH register with bit 7 indicating the 1 0 location for this operation and bit 6 indicating address incrementation On entry register BX contains the address to read Bits 0 through 14 Source address Bitols 0 NMI is enabled on exit 1 NMI is disabled on exit On entry register CH contains control information Bit 6 1 Increment address Bit 7 0 32 KB NVRAM area location 1 8 KB RTC NVRAM area location Il On return register AH contains the return code 00h Completed successfully 86h Function not supported On return register BX contains the address modified based on bit 6 of register CH and register CL contains the data read Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 3 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 29
327. ls O The order of store controller s and point of sale terminals on the store loop O The terminal numbers Is there a backup store controller connected to this store loop Yes No 1 i i i 1002 Continue at Step 011 1 i i I At the backup store controller display the Backup Store Loop status Is the Backup Store Loop status Providing Backup Yes No i i 1004 i 1 i Continue at Step 008 if I 1 i At the primary store controller display the Store Loop Control status The primary store controller is the controller that has been designated to control the store loop It is supported by the backup store controller Is the Store Loop Control status Controlling Loop Yes No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0140 W762 Message i i 1006 Disconnect the primary store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 28 in topic 7 1 i Do not reconnect this store controller until the problem has been i resolved Continue at Step 011 1 i 1 I Both store controllers are trying to control the store loop This condition is caused by attaching an active store controller to the store loop when another active store controller is on the store loop Disable the backup store controller Wait 15 seconds and enabl
328. ly Connector P13 A A yay are mig A PMs Ay A er a aE E mi O lea ere ig Power Supply Power Supply Connector Line Description Connector Line Description P13 1 5 V de internal P13 J Reserved P13 A 5 V de internal P13 9 Reserved 4 4 4 4 i P13 2 5 V de internal return P13 K Reserved 4 4 4 4 P13 B 5 V de internal return P13 10 Reserved 4 4 4 4 P13 3 12 V de return P13 L Reserved 4 4 4 4 P13 C 12 V de return P 13 1 1 Address sense 4 4 4 4 P13 4 12 V de P13 M Reserved 4 4 4 4 P13 D 12 V de P13 12 Reserved 4 4 4 4 21375 Polarization key P13 N Reserved 4 4
329. m message appears on the point of sale terminal system display Example of a system message 1 W008 PROGRAM IS BEING LOADED 1 I 3 Find the message in the IBM 4680 Store System Messages Guide 4 To clear the message press Clear Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 10 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Displaying a System Message Message Pending Light is On 5 6 10 5 Displaying a System Message Message Pending Light is On When the Message Pending light comes ON the point of sale terminal has a If received a message that you have not seen The light stays ON until you display the message you display the message when the light is ON you see the message that I caused the Message Pending light to come ON This is the most current message More messages can be waiting to be displayed You can display these messages by repeating the keying sequence until message W204 is displayed This indicates that you have seen all the queued messages you continue displaying messages beyond this point the display sequence starts over The most current message is displayed again and then the remainder of the queued messages are displayed again Ey Press Sl type 3 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 The system message appears on the point of sale terminal system display Example of a system message
330. m unit microprocessor was request byte See unable to find the shared buffer l Topaz 213 after acquiring it for a software POR request Ho o 09 Device channel level 7 hardware interrupt was not RO i i adapter system status byte See 1 i i eceived from a software POR request 1 i g i Device channel The device channel adapter adapter system 1 i i i i microprocessor internal diagnostic status byte See topic 2 12 test failed to complete during the software POR Shared buffer error codes See topic 2 11 4 Shared buffer i error codes See topire 2ZeL1 4 Device channel adapter system status byte See i The system unit microprocessor was unable to acquire the shared buffer for a software POR request 1 l Device channel adapter system status byte See 1 i l Device channel The system unit microprocessor was adapter system unable to acquire the shared buffer status byte See for a read EC level request Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 11 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 topic 2 12 13 Device channel The read EC level request failed adapter system i i status byte See i topic 2 12 a ia faa ARS SS SS Se SS SRS Se o SS o a 20 Device channel Timeou
331. mat Valid values are 00h through 23h CL Minute Minute is in BCD format Valid values are 00h through 59h DL Day Day is the day of the month Valid values are 01h through 31h Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 1 2 1 4 6 1 3 AL Store Systems Technical Reference AL 25h Read PPC Status and Power On Events 25h Read PPC Status and Power On Events This function returns the current PPC power on status and power on events On return Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit On return Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit OrRPNWHA WO Reserved Reserved Reserved Set if the clear Set if the clear Set if the clear Set if the Set if register BH contains the power on status Mode Control switch on event enabled power otherwise ring detect 2 power on event enabled power otherwise ring detect 1 power on event enabled power otherwise RTC alarm power on event enabled power otherwise clear memory contents are known to be bad otherwise clear Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved the ring detect 2 power on event is enabled otherwise clear the ring detect 1 power on event is enabled otherwise clear the RTC alarm power on event is enabled otherwise clear memory retention is enabled otherwise clear Set if Set if Set if Set if register BL contains the enabled power on events Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 1 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference
332. mber definition 8 2 6 system log entries description 8 2 6 system log section definition 8 2 6 operating system software compatibility 4693 1 6 operating system tests 2 3 5 option adapter and I O support 4693 adapters models 541 421 321 1 3 POS I O support 1 5 PS 2 Model 57 1 0 models 541 421 321 1 3 1 PS 2 option adapters models 541 421 321 1 3 option diskette 4684 reference diskette 5 6 2 optional adapter 4693 tests 2 6 3 P parallel I O port 4693 pinout assignments 1 1 4 4 parallel port pinout assignments 4693 1 1 4 4 parking the 4684 fixed disk heads 5 6 5 PC network 8 1 pinout assignments 4693 keyboard aux device pinout assignments 1 1 4 1 1 1 4 2 video pinout assignment 1 1 4 2 polling 4680 store loop 6 2 4 POS printer 4693 tests 2 6 3 POS scanner scale 4693 tests 2 6 3 POST 2 3 1 POST errors checkpoints 4693 checkpoints checkpoints during power on self test POST 3 2 codes and description 3 2 continuous beep 3 1 no beeps 3 1 one beep 3 1 one long and one short beep 3 1 one long and two short beeps 3 1 repeating beeps short 3 1 power line disturbance PLD See store controller 4680 power supply connectors 4683 4684 See cable and wiring diagrams 4683 4684 power system 4693 auxiliary power requirements 1 1 5 7 battery operation 1 1 5 2 internal system loads 1 1 6 mode control switch 1 1 5 5 1 1 7 mode modes 1 1 5 2 output voltages and currents 1 1 5 6 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 INDEX 5
333. me was selected during configuration the following step is not needed Store loop control resumes automatically after IPL 4 Resume store loop control at the file server if the file server has primary store loop responsibilities When the file server resumes control of the store loop for a short period of time the 4683s on the store loop are offline to the primary and backup store controllers During this time file reads from the 4683s such as price lookup cannot be performed Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Master Store Controller on the LAN 8 1 2 Master Store Controller on the LAN If the master store controller becomes permanently disabled there is a possibility that data can be lost Examples of the data that can be lost are O Any information in the spool file of the failing master store controller that has not been copied to the alternate master store controller O Any information in the I O buffers of the failing master store controller When the configured master store controller is brought back up after being down the following steps should be taken Ty If the alternate master store controller has been activated as acting master deactivate the alternate acting master 2 Activate the configured master as acting master store controller Between the deactivation and activation of the master store controller there is a time when there is no master During this time no up
334. me the computer s power is switched on presentation space PS In 3270 emulation the image of the 3270 screen data that is held in random access memory This screen appears on the store controller or the terminal display when 3270 emulation is used in operator console mode it is the virtual screen for applications using the 3270 emulator API The presentation space is fixed as 24 lines of 80 characters on the display primary adapter In a personal computer that is used on a LAN and that supports installation of two network adapters the adapter that uses standard or default mapping between adapter shared RAM adapter ROM and designated computer memory segments The primary adapter is usually designated as adapter 0 in configuration parameters Contrast with alternate adapter primary store controller The store controller designated to control the store loop under normal conditions problem determination The process of determining the source of a problem as being a program component a machine failure a change in the environment a common carrier link a user supplied device or a user error procedure 1 A set of related control statements that cause one or more programs to be performed 2 In a programming language a block with or without formal parameters whose execution is invoked by means of a procedure call 3 A set of instructions that gives a service representative a step by step procedure for tracing a symptom to t
335. mmon to two or more links in a network Nodes can be processors controllers or workstations Nodes can vary in routing and other functional capabilities 3 In a network a point where one or more functional units interconnect transmission lines noise 1 A disturbance that affects a signal and that can distort the information carried by the signal 2 Random variations of one or more characteristics of any entity such as voltage current or data 3 Loosely any disturbance tending to interfere with normal operation of a device or system nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM Random access memory that retains its contents after electrical power is shut off NVRAM nonvolatile random access memory oO OCR Optical character recognition OEM Original equipment manufacturer office See work area offline Operation of a functional unit without the control of a computer or control units online Operation of a functional unit that is under the continual control of a computer or control unit The term also describes a user s access to a computer using a terminal open 1 To make an adapter ready for use 2 A break in an electrical circuit 3 To make a file ready for use open systems interconnect OSI 1 The interconnection of open systems in accordance with specific ISO standards 2 The use of standardized procedures to enable the interconnection of data processing systems Note OSI archit
336. mory expansion adapter Reserved Reserve 4684 feature card and memory expansion adapter Baseband network Models 111 131 and 161 only Device channel Fixed disk Models 130 131 160 and 161 only 4684 Device List For Option Slots 1 8 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 4 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Using Optional 4684 System Unit Configuration 5 4 9 Using Optional 4684 System Unit Configuration This special program is provided for situations when the normal 4684 system unit configuration functions are inadequate to configure the system unit It can be invoked when it is necessary to have a full function change or view configuration for the 4684 system unit To use this procedure the following requirements must be met O An enhanced A N or ANPOS keyboard must be attached and configured as the primary keyboard O A video display must be attached and configured as the primary display To start this program MENU C1 must be displayed Then select OPTIONAL SYSTEM UNIT CONFIGURATION Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 4 9 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Introduction to Utilities 5 5 Introduction to Utilities BACKUP REFERENCE DISKETTE Allows you to make a backup copy of the original reference diskette Once you have a copy backup reference diskette store the original in a safe place and use the copy COPY OPTION DISKETTE TO REFERENCE DISK Allows you to copy files from an option diskette p
337. mputer s memory where specific data is stored Registers are used in the actual manipulation of data values during the execution of a program 2 A storage device having a specified storage capacity such as bit byte or computer word and usually intended for a special purpose 3 In the IBM Store System a term that refers to the point of sale terminal remote change management server RCMS The IBM Store System function that interfaces with the host DSX program for file transmission remote program load RPL A function provided by adapter hardware components and software that enables one computer to load programs and operating systems into the memory of another computer without requiring the use of a diskette or fixed disk at the receiving computer remove 1 To take an attaching device off a network 2 To stop an adapter from participating in data passing on a network response The information the network control program sends to the access method usually in answer to a request received from the access method Some responses however result from conditions occurring within the network control program such as accumulation of error statistics retransmit To repeat the transmission of a message or a segment of a message retry In data communication sending the current block of data a prescribed number of times or until it is entered correctly and accepted return code 1 A value usually hexadecimal provided by an
338. ms Technical Reference Monetary Devices 2 16 4 5 Monetary Devices Cash Drawers connect to the 4693 via tailgate sockets 3A and 3B NVRAM Device Device Address Address Type 0050 50 Reserved 0051 51 Reserved 0052 52 Reserved 0053 53 Reserved 0054 54 Cash Drawers 0055 55 Reserved 0056 56 Reserved 0057 57 Reserved 0058 58 Reserved 0059 59 Reserved 005A 5A Reserved 005B 5B Reserved 005C 5C Reserved 005D 5D Reserved 005E 5E OEM 005F 5F OEM Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 4 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference External Devices 2 16 4 6 External Devices NVRAM Device Device Address Address Type 0060 60 Reserved 0061 61 Reserved 0062 62 Reserved 0063 63 Reserved 0064 64 Reserved 0065 65 Reserved 0066 66 Reserved 0067 67 Reserved 0068 68 Reserved 0069 69 Reserved 006A 6A Reserved 006B 6B Reserved 006C 6C Reserved 006D 6D Reserved 006E 6E Scale 006F 6F OEM Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 4 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Reserved Device Addresses 2 16 4 7 Reserved Device Addresses This range of SIO addresses is reserved for future 1 0 devices NVRAM Device Device Address Address Type 0070 70 Reserved 0071 71 Reserved 0072 72 Reserved 0073 13 Reserved 0074 74 Reserved 0075 Ta Reserved 0076 76 Reserved 0077 77 Reserved Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 4 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Master Terminal Configuration Record Header 2 16 4 8 Master Terminal Configuration Record He
339. n store loop condition and the 4683 has not been configured with a terminal number The 4683 cannot beacon because it does not have a terminal number Message W001 is placed in the 4683 message queue The active 4683s down loop from this 4683 if any beacon If there are no active 4683s down loop from this 4683 7 An end of poll timeout occurs at the store controller Message W764 is logged in the system message log at the store controller If a 4683 beacons and then receives its own beacon O The 4683 stops beaconing and transmit a backup request message to notify all active 4683s on the store loop that the store loop is intact but that the store controller is down 0 Message W003 is placed in the message queue of all active 4683s on the store loop If an open store loop is detected at the store controller Message W760 or message W764 is logged at the store controller After the open store loop is resolved message W761 is logged at the store controller If a 4683 fails to respond to a message from the store controller after a retry attempt the store controller logs message W762 in the System Message Log Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 8 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Store Loop Error Recovery Procedures 6 2 9 Store Loop Error Recovery Procedures The following is intended to provide a better general understanding of the store loop for personnel responsible for resolving store loop problems Each store mus
340. nal Name 4 4 4 l i 1 1 j TX l 6 6 TX 9 9 RX l i 5 i 5 i RX E PICTURE 59 Figure 63 Baseband Network Cable and Connectors Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 30 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Baseband Network Cable and Data Connector 10 1 31 Baseband Network Cable and Data Connector A Y 4684 Connector Data Connector j Position i Position Signal Name 4 4 4 1 Red TX i 4 4 4 i 6 Green j TX 9 Orange RX 4 4 4 i 5 Black RX i A PICTURE 60 Figure 64 Baseband Network Connector and Cable Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 31 1 Store Systems Technical Reference PS 2 Cable to Data Connector 10 1 32 PS 2 Cable to Data Connector A Wire Connector RJ11 Data Connector i Number Wire Color Position Position Signal Name 1 Orange 4 Green TX 4 4 4 4 4 T1 Orange White 3 Red i TX 4
341. nce Keyboard Devices 2 16 5 1 Keyboard Devices SIO Keyboards connect to the 4693 via tailgate sockets 5A and 5B NVRAM 0080 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 008A 008B 008 008D 008E 008F RR Device Address Address Device Type 50 Key 5A or operator keyboard 50 Key 5B Alphanumeric 5A Alphanumeric 5B Reserved Reserved 4680 matrix 5A 4680 matrix 5B 4682 PIN pad PLU keyboard ANPOS 5A ANPOS 5B RPOS Keyboard 5A RPOS Keyboard 5B OEM OEM Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 5 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 2 16 5 2 Display Devices Display Devices SIO Displays connect to the 4693 via tailgate sockets 4A 4B UE NVRAM 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0099 009A 009B 009 009D 009E 009F Device Address Address 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F Device Type A N Fluorescent 4A A N Fluorescent 4B Reserved Reserved Retail Shopper 4A Retail Shopper 4B Reserved Reserved Character graphics Character graphics Character graphics Character graphics OEM OEM 9A 9B 9C A N Operator in Keyboard 5A A N Operator in Keyboard 5B 9A 1 1 2 2 9B 9C operator customer operator customer Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 5 2 1 9A 9B and Store Systems Technical Reference Printer Devices 2 16 5 3 Printer Devices SIO Printers connect to the 4693 via tailgate socket
342. nd protocols and that serves as a common framework for application development portability and use across different IBM hardware systems Systems Network Architecture SNA The description of the logical structure formats protocols and operational sequences for transmitting information units through and controlling the configuration and operation of networks Note The layered structure of SNA allows the ultimate origins and destinations of information that is the end users to be independent of and unaffected by the specific SNA network services and facilities used for information exchange system unit 1 A part of a computer that contains the processing unit and may contain devices such as disk and diskette drives 2 In an IBM Personal Computer the unit that contains the processor circuitry read only memory ROM random access memory RAM and the 1 0 channel It may have one or more disk or diskette drives 3 In an IBM 4683 4684 terminal the part of the terminal that contains the processing unit ROM RAM disk and diskette drives and the I O channel iT j tailgate The area of a computer or control unit where I O cables are connected task A basic unit of work terminal In data communication a device usually equipped with a keyboard and a display capable of sending and receiving information over a communication channel terminal number A number assigned to a terminal to identify it for add
343. nector J109 DI Top Sensor Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J1 I O Interface Cable 10 4 1 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J1 1 0 Interface Cable A Printer Card Printer Card i Connector Line Description Connector Line Description J1 1 5 V de J1 9 36 V dc return 4 4 4 J1 2 5 V de return J1 10 36 V de 4 4 4 4 J1 3 5 V de J1 11 36 V de return 4 4 4 4 J1 4 5 V de return JISIT 36 V de 4 4 4 4 J1 5 5 V de I J1 13 36 V dc return J1 6 5 V de return J1 14 36 V de 4 4 4 4 J1 7 Serial I O B d1i 15 36 V de return 4 4 4 4 J1 8 Serial I O A J1 16 36 V de 4 PICTURE 71 Figure 75 Printer Card Connector Wiring The polarization key is counted as
344. new configuration when requested to do so The 4684 restarts re IPLs to activate the new configuration Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 7 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Theory of Operation 5 7 6 Theory of Operation Update a backup copy of the 4684 reference diskette version 3 00 or higher any language by editing the CONFIG SYS file token ring and baseband LAN and EFEF ADF file baseband LAN ONLY as noted earlier Each time the 4684 is configured using the updated backup copy of the version 3 00 reference diskette the RIPL configuration option is enabled or disabled according to the parameters specified in the CONFIG SYS file The RIPL option remains in effect until the next time the 4684 is reconfigured Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 7 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 4684 Device Channel Adapter Failure Status Bytes 5 8 4684 Device Channel Adapter Failure Status Bytes The device channel adapter failure status bytes appear on the screen when the advanced diagnostics detect a failure XX represents a FAILURE STATUS BYTE It may be any number depending on the type of adapter failure that occurred The device Channel adapter failure status bytes are numbered as follows XX 0 XX 6 XX 1 XX 7 XX 2 XX 8 XX 3 XX g XX 4 XX 5 The tables on the following pages define the meaning of the device channel adapter failure status bytes These bytes are displayed only when a failure is detected by the device chann
345. nly be used when A system unit configuration conflict or problem cannot be resolved with the normal configuration process O You are adding a new system unit option or feature to the 4684 This procedure resets the configuration data allowing you to configure only those devices attached to the 4684 If you have not had an error detected during the power on self test this procedure does not work You know if an error is detected during power on self test POST if you hear two short tones If no errors are detected you hear only one tone If you hear two short tones during the POST continue at step 1 If no errors are detected during the POST do the following a Switch POWER OFF at the 4684 Warning Switching POWER OFF at a 4684 affects operations at all point of sale terminals attached to it b Unplug one of the feature option cards or any POS device to cause an error Che Continue to the next step 1 Switch POWER OFF at the 4684 and insert the backup reference diskette 2 Switch power ON at the 4683 if attached 3 Switch power ON at the 4684 Wait for the two tones 4 Locate the dump switch at the rear of the 4684 system unit press it momentarily and then release it You hear a tone and U004 displays F If message M0001 Press the 1 key displays press 1 Each error that was detected displays along with additional information about the error Press S1 ESC on the enhanced A N keyboard for each error that display
346. nn IBM 4680 Operating System Xnnn Debug Ynnn System Utilities Znnn Set Terminal Characteristics Message Text System Log Section Indicator Bl Store controller hardware errors B2 Point of sale terminal hardware errors B3 Point of sale terminal events B4 Store controller events B5 System events B6 Application events The Source Code of the Originator of the Message S002 IPL Command Processor S004 File Services S006 X 25 Driver S008 Store Controller First Store Loop Adapter S009 Store Controller Second Store Loop Adapter S010 Host ASYNC Driver S011 Host BSC Driver S012 Common Communications S013 Communications amp Systems Management S014 Host Command Processor HCP S015 SDLC Driver S016 SNA Driver S017 Shared I O Access Method S020 DDA 021 Token Ring PC Network Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 2 6 1 EXXX S022 S022 S024 S026 S027 S030 S031 S032 S033 034 S035 S036 S037 S038 S039 S04 S04 S04 S04 S04 S04 S04 S04 S04 S04 o 0 3004 0N Aa ie S050 S054 S052 S053 S054 S055 S056 S057 S058 S059 S064 S068 S069 S070 S072 S074 S076 S078 S080 S082 S084 S085 S086 S090 S091 S092 S093 S094 S095 S096 S097 S098 S S S S S S S Event Code 100 102 104 108 109 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 124 125 126 Store Systems Technical Reference Message General Format
347. nnected to the store loop segment between the two powered ON 4683s Yes No i 1044 i i i i J l The problem is in the store loop wiring or the store loop receptacles for the 4683 xxls Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1 i i i One at a time disconnect each powered OFF 4683 xxl from the store loop segment by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle After each 4683 is disconnected return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 5 5 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0130 W005 Message Yes No i 1046 If all powered OFF 4683s have not been disconnected continue disconnecting them and displaying the system message at the active store controller i SOB If all powered OFF 4683s have been disconnected the problem is in the store loop wiring or the store loop receptacles for the 4683 xx1s Reconnect all 4683s and report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1 I i 1047 Unplug the store loop cable from socket 1 on the 4683 xx1 that you just disconnected from the store loop Attach shorting plug 1B to the 4683 end of the cable See Figure 29 in topic mals Plug the other end of the c
348. nter printer connector and cable 10 1 5 printer printer printer extension card extension card extension card connector J101 10 4 11 10 4 12 connector J106 10 4 14 connector J107 10 4 15 RS 232C current loop wrap plug 10 1 13 RS 232C EIA wrap plug 10 1 14 RS 232C Asynchronous Communications Port 10 1 12 RS 232C device connector and cable 10 1 10 RS 232C or current loop device connector and cable 10 1 11 scale connector and cable 10 1 15 serial I O Port 4693 10 1 19 special attachment cable 1520 model A02 and dual track MSR special attachment cable remote alarm and non IBM cash drawer store loop connector and cable 10 1 24 system unit printer connector 10 1 18 cash drawer 4693 tests 2 6 3 change configuration 4684 reference diskette changing configuration 2 4 3 changing configuration 4684 reference diskette changing the terminal number 4683 4684 5 6 12 communication adapters 4684 port assignment 5 9 configuration backup store controller 8 2 2 configuration record 4683 4684 backup configuration 5 3 4 4 create change configuration 5 3 4 2 description and location 4683 and 4684 5 3 4 1 restore configuration 5 3 4 5 O21727 10 1 16 5 4 1 5 4 2 configuration record NVRAM 4693 See nonvolatile RAM Map 4693 configuration 4684 automatic 5 3 2 1 backup 5 4 2 5 4 6 changing 5 4 1 5 4 2 creating 5 4 1 5 4 2 manual 5 3 2 2 optional 5 4 9 preparing to run 5 4 restoring 5 4 2 5 4 7
349. o resume the application program as quickly as possible 2 The POST process is power line disturbance PLD fault tolerant also But POST does not resume at the next sequential instruction following a PLD POST is restarted This allows the system to recover from multiple PLDs that occur in a short time span 3 The system is NOT halted for non critical errors Note A memory retention failure is classified non critical Should one occur however POST forces the system to re IPL 4 Hardware functions initialized by PLD Recovery Warm Start and Cold Start code paths are the same 5 Modified memory data is restricted to 2 areas during PLD recovery a Specific offsets in the first 1 280 bytes of memory X 0000 through X 0500 This area contains microprocessor interrupt vectors the POST stack and the BIOS Data Area b Specific offsets in the extended BIOS data area EBDA POST allocates this data area below the 640K memory address boundary on Cold Starts but it is relocatable The segment address is stored in the BIOS Data Area at memory address X 040E The operating system can relocate the extended BIOS data area on almost any 1K boundary between 1K and 639K 6 Some option adapters steal system memory for their use by growing the EBDA This can occur near the end of the POST process when option adapters are being initialized To prevent EBDA overgrowth POST restores the EBDA to its original size before reinit
350. ocedure that causes an operating system to begin operation input device Synonym for input unit input output device See I O device input output I O 1 Pertaining to a device whose parts can perform an input process and an output process at the same time 2 Pertaining toa functional unit or channel involved in an input process output process or both concurrently or not and to the data involved in such a process input sequence table Defines all input data that is expected by the application from the keyboard OCR device point of sale scanner and wand on the IBM point of sale terminal The table allows the terminal 1 0 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 11 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary processor to recognize operator input and organize it into a form the application expects input unit A device in a data processing system by means of which data can be entered into the system Synonymous with input device insert To make an attaching device an active part of a LAN instruction In a programming language a meaningful expression that specifies one operation and identifies its operands if any integrated Arranged together as one unit integrated disk An integral part of the processor that is used for magnetically storing files application programs and diagnostics Synonymous with disk Integrated services digital network ISDN A digital end to end telecommunications network that supports m
351. ocess in such a way that it can be resumed 3 In data communication to take an action at a receiving station that causes the sending station to end a transmission 4 A means of passing processing control from one software or microcode module or routine to another or of requesting a particular software microcode or hardware function interrupt level The means of identifying the source of an interrupt the function requested by an interrupt or the code or feature that provides a function or service I O Input output I O device Equipment for entering and receiving data from the system I O processor Equipment that receives data from processes data and sends data to one or more I O devices IPL Initial program load ISDN Integrated services digital network Iso International Organization for Standardization item 1 One member of a group 2 In a store one unit of a commodity such as one box one bag or one can Usually an item is the smallest unit of a commodity to be sold LJ jumper A connector between two pins on a network adapter that enables or disables an adapter option feature or parameter value Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 12 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary Koi K When referring to storage capacity a symbol that represents two to the tenth power or 1024 Kb Kilobit KB Kilobyte keyboard A group of numeric keys alphabetic ke
352. oller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1011 From steps 002 006 and 009 Display the system message at the active store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key A store controller is active when it is The only store controller on the store loop te ES The primary store controller and its status is Controlling Loop ey ee The backup store controller and its status is Providing Backup Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i 012i Continue at Step 041 1 i i i Did message W760 display Yes No iJ 1014 Continue at Step 016 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 74 2 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0120 W004 Message Go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and follow the procedures for Store Loop Problems 1016 From step 014 Return to the 4683 displaying message W004 If it is a 4683 xx2 go to its partner 4683 xxl A 4683 xx2 displays the status of its partner 4683 xxl See the store loop layout chart A 4683 is considered active if it has a terminal number is powered ON and attached to the store loop Is this the last active 4683 xx1 on the store loop Yes No l 1 i 1017 i Go to the last active 4683 xxl on the store loop See the
353. on of the store loop can be used as reference for store loops consisting of either 4693 4684 or 4683 point of sale terminals When reading this topic the various models of terminals may be interchanged according to the following chart 4684 xxx may also be 4693 541 4683 xx1 may also be 4693 421 or 4693 321 4683 x02 may also be 4693 202 Subtopics 6 1 Typical Store System 6 2 Store Loop Description Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 0 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Typical Store System 6 1 Typical Store System The 4680 Store System includes a store controller and point of sale The 4683 xxl terminals are connected to the store controller terminals The 4683 xx2 terminals are directly connected to through the store loop a 4683 xx1 or 4684 PICTURE 14 Figure 18 Typical 4693 4680 Store System In this figure the 4683 P can also be a 4683 001 or 4683 A01 The 4683 002 can also be a 4683 A02 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Store Loop Description 6 2 Store Loop Description Use this section to find additional information about the store loop The following information is provided to assist you in understanding normal store loop functions You can use it as an aid in developing store loop recovery and problem determination procedures unique to your store loop configuration The store loop is a Cable over which data is transmitted between the store controller and the point of
354. onfiguration for this terminal i O A a a E A O O SEA E IR PONE r A E Use the store procedures to stop any application programs that are running Switch Ready mode OFF at the 4693 terminal The Ready indicator will be OFF Press the Reset switch to disable storage retention Indicators 1 and 2 will remain ON Note When you switch Ready mode ON in the next step start looking for the cursor to appear in the upper right corner of the display TE will display for only 3 seconds approximately and during this period of time you must press and release the Reset switch to cause the configuration record to clear Switch Ready mode ON Look for the cursor or minus to appear in the upper right of the display When the cursor appears press and immediately release the Reset switch on the operator panel This enables the terminal to clear the configuration record The system programs load then several error messages are displayed These messages are expected messages after clearing the configuration record and should be ignored Follow the displayed prompts to exit each error message When message M0101 is displayed answer YES The configuration program reconfigures the terminal Follow the displayed prompts and answer any questions that appear After reconfiguration the terminal restarts and loads the operating system To take an operating system program dump see the documentation for your operating system Copyri
355. op from its position on the store loop and it transmits loop data to the next terminal down loop from its position on the store loop See down loop UPS Uninterruptible power supply usability The quality of a system program or device that enables it to be easily understood and conveniently employed by a user user 1 Category of identification defined for file access protection 2 A person using a program or system utility program 1 A computer program in general support of the processes of a computer for instance a diagnostic program a trace program a sort program 2 A program designed to perform an everyday task such as copying data from one storage device to another LOVOR vector One or more related fields of data in a specified format A quantity usually characterized by an ordered set of numbers version A separate IBM licensed program based on an existing IBM licensed program that usually has significant new code or new function video display 1 An electronic transaction display that presents visual information to the point of sale terminal operator and to the customer 2 An electronic display screen that presents visual information to the display operator VPD Vital product data Wy waiting time Synonym for latency wand A commercially available device used to read information encoded on merchandise tickets credit cards and employee badges wanding
356. operating system in the 4683 xx1 to send traffic to devices on the 4683 xxl or to send traffic to devices on the 4683 002 The group address X 11 selects 4683 xx1 devices X 22 selects 4683 002 devices This address is not transmitted on the channel but is only used by the master microprocessor to select the correct channel A poll address requests messages from the specific device addressed This address always has the high order data bit set to 1 one Each device is capable of detecting its poll address its receive address and a broadcast address Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 10 4 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Polling 5 10 4 2 Polling The operating system manages message flow on the device channel by transmitting a poll frame that lets the device with that address transmit A device cannot start to transmit unless it is polled by the master microprocessor in the 4683 xx1 The master microprocessor continuously polls using a poll list given to it by the operating system Any device on the channel that needs to send a message can send it after its specific poll has been detected If a device does not have any data response or status to transmit when it detects its poll the device must respond with an end of poll EOP character Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 10 4 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device Channel Message Checking 5 10 5 Device Channel Message Checking The terminal uses a frame check sequ
357. opyright IBM Corp 1993 7 2 7 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0100 W001 Message 1063 Correct the problem by exchanging the store loop cable attached to the 4683 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 2 8 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0110 W003 Message 7 3 MAP 0110 W003 Message The 4683 xx1 is not receiving store loop communications he store controller is powered OFF he store controller is disconnected rom the store loop he store controller store loop cable s failing he store controller is failing he 4683 xxl is disconnected from the tore loop he 4683 xxl store loop cable is ailing he 4683 xxl base unit is failing It beaconed and then received its own beacon Its store loop adapter test was run automatically and it detected no problems HMAHUHHEHEHAHH Its keyboard OFFLINE light is ON The 4683 xxls are now signaling that the store controller is not communicating on the loop message W003 The store loop appears to be OK To display the terminal number press Sl type 7 and press 8S2 To display messages at a point of sale terminal when the keyboard OFFLINE light is ON press Sl type 2 and press 8S2 Note On the ANPOS Keyboard during some procedures and on the Enhanced Alphanumeric Keyboard Esc Sl and Enter 5S2 To display a system message at the store controller sign on at the store controller press System Request and then press the M key Warn
358. or 2 Printer Card Connector J6 Capacitor 10 3 7 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J7 1 0 Interface Cable 10 3 8 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J8 Journal Emitter Sensor 10 3 9 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J9 Customer Receipt Document Insert Motor 10 3 10 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J10 Transport Motor 10 3 11 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J11 Journal Ribbon Motor 10 3 12 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J12 10 3 13 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J13 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J1 Print Head 10 3 1 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J1 Print Head de ip my dy E a y eb e leg lo a pcp ti y li mg is a ii AN E re mig la E alg a CE PC en id E EN ea do a ii dy es pi di cent Printer Card Printer Card i Connector Line Description Connector Line Description J1 1 Print wire 5 J1 7 36 V de 4 4 4 4 J1 2 Print wire 7 J1 8 36 V de 4 4 J1 3 Print wire 9 J1 9 Print wire 4 4 J1 4 Print wire 8 J1 10 Print wire 2 4 4
359. or example 1 is section Bl 2 is B2 and so forth SYSTEM LOG REPORT Select one of the following i i 1 i 1 i 1 l l Controller Hardware Errors Terminal Hardware Errors Terminal Events i Controller Events i System Events i Application Events 1 i 1 i i i 1 i i i i 1 i i E i 1 i URDU BWNEHE All of the above reports Type your selection number then press ENTER _ Message line FIHELP F2 F3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Status line As the next screens appear make selections to do the tasks you want To get the System Log Report ready to copy to a 4680 Problem Analysis Diskette enter 3 File ps N ds es AAA a E a T A e SS MA A a i i SYSTEM LOG REPORT XXXXXXXXXXXXX LOG Type the necessary information 1 i START SCAN Date mm dd yy 01 01 86 Time hh mm 00 00 i STOP SCAN Date mm dd yy 12 31 99 Time hh mm 2399 1 i CONTROLLER ID TERMINAL NUMBER i SOURCE NUMBER i DESTINATION 1 1 Display 2 Printer 3 File FORMAT MODE 1 1 Long 2 Short 3 Both 1 i i When complete press ENTER 1 i i Message line F1HELP F2 F3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 i Status line i A A NT Note XXXXXXXXXXXXX LOG indicates the log being displayed When the display indicates that report creation is complete press Esc to return to the PROBLEM ANALYSIS REPORT screen Note You can return to the SYSTEM MAIN MENU by
360. or method designed to transfer data between main storage and I O units without intervention of the processing unit directory 1 A table of identifiers and references that correspond to items of data 2 An index that a control program uses to locate one or more blocks of data that are stored in separate areas of a data set in direct access storage disabled 1 Pertaining to a state of a processing unit that prevents the occurrence of certain types of interruptions 2 Pertaining to the state in which a transmission control unit or audio response unit cannot accept incoming calls on a line disk A round flat plate coated with a magnetic substance on which computer data is stored See also integrated disk fixed disk diskette A thin flexible magnetic disk permanently enclosed ina protective jacket A diskette stores information for processing diskette drive The mechanism used to seek read and write data on diskettes Disk Operating System DOS An operating system for computer systems that use disks and diskettes for auxiliary storage of programs and data display 1 A visual presentation of data 2 A device that presents visual information to the point of sale terminal operator and to the customer or to the display station operator distributed Physically separate but connected by cables Distributed Systems Executive DSX An IBM licensed program available for IBM host systems that allows the host system to ge
361. ore Loop 6 2 9 2 When the Beaconing 4683 is Not the First 4683 on the Store Loop 6 2 9 3 When the Store Controller Receives End of Poll Timeouts Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 9 1 Store Systems Technical Reference When the Beaconing 4683 is the First 4683 on the Store Loop 6 2 9 1 When the Beaconing 4683 is the First 4683 on the Store Loop Note This information is for reference only To resolve the problem described here see message W005 or message W760 1 Message W005 is displayed at the 4683 and message W760 is displayed at the store controller 2 Disconnect the first 4683 from the store loop If normal operation resumes leave this 4683 off the store loop and have it repaired 3 If removing the first 4683 from the store loop does not result in the esumption of normal operation reconnect the 4683 to the store loop K Disconnect the store controller from the store loop If the result of this action is an Offline message W003 at the 4683 the failure is in the store controller Normal operation cannot be re established u p nless a backup store controller takes over the store loop or the rimary store controller is repaired If removing the store controller does not result in the condition described in the previous step reconnect the store controller to the store loop The problem is in the store loop wiring segment between the store controller and the first 4683 on the store loop This wiring must be bypassed or rep
362. ore Loop Problems 1007 Disconnect the backup store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 28 in topic Tal Display the system message at the primary store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No 1 l 1008 i i i 1 l For message W760 go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and follow the procedures for Store Loop Problems i OA For message W764 follow MAP 0150 W764 Message in topic 7 7 1 i 1 i The backup store controller is failing Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the backup store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1010 From step 002 Disconnect the backup store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 28 in topic 7 1 Display the system message at the backup store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W774 display Yes No i 1011 4 i 1 i 1 The backup store controller is failing Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the backup store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test er
363. ore controller display the Backup Store Loop status Is the Backup Store Loop status Providing Backup Yes No i i 1004 i 1 i Continue at Step 008 if I 1 i At the primary store controller display the Store Loop Control status The primary store controller is the controller that has been designated to control the store loop It is supported by the backup store controller Is the Store Loop Control status Controlling Loop Yes No Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0100 W001 Message 1 i i 1006 Disconnect the primary store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 i Do not reconnect this store controller until the problem has been i resolved Continue at Step 011 1 i 1 I Both store controllers are trying to control the store loop This condition is caused by attaching an active store controller to the store loop when another active store controller is on the store loop Disable the backup store controller Wait 15 seconds and enable the backup store controller Return to normal store operation 008 From step 004 Disconnect the backup store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in tope 7 Do not reconnect this store
364. ormation messages Status messages The point of sale terminal keeps the last five system messages it received When you display the system messages the most current message displays first and the least current message displays last The least current message is deleted if a new message increases the number of messages beyond five You can display these messages when The Message Pending light is OFF See Displaying a System Message Message Pending Light is Off in topic 5 6 10 4 The Message Pending light is ON See Displaying a System Message Message Pending Light is On in topic 5 6 10 5 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 10 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Displaying a System Message Message Pending Light is Off 5 6 10 4 Displaying a System Message Message Pending Light is Off If the Message Pending light is OFF when you display a message the message you see is the last message queued You can continue displaying the messages by repeating the keying sequence until message W204 is displayed W204 indicates that you have seen all the queued messages If you continue displaying messages beyond this point the display sequence starts over The most current message is displayed again and then the remainder of the queued messages are displayed again 1 Press S1 type 3 and press S2 Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc S1 and Enter S2 Za The syste
365. orp 1993 2 16 4 2 1 9A 9B Store Systems Technical Reference Printer Devices 2 16 4 3 Printer Devices SIO Printers connect to the 4693 via tailgate socket 7 NVRAM 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036 0037 0038 0039 003A 003B 003C 003D 003E 003F Device Address Address 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 at 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F Device Type 4680 Printer Model 2 Reserved Reserved Reserved 4680 Printer Model 3 Reserved Fiscal Printer Model 2 SRJ Printer Fiscal Printer Model 3 Reserved 25 character R J 2 30 character R J 2 5956 Kanji R J 5957 compact R J OEM OEM Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 4 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Readers and Scanning Devices 2 16 4 4 Readers and Scanning Devices Readers and scanners connect to the 4693 via tailgate sockets 4B 5A 5B 9A 9B and 9C NVRAM 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 PAUVUADPOAINIHDA YO BRWNFO Device Address Address SAD kh A KABA KR BR BB BR BBO YPHAUVUADPOAINHAOBWNEHO Device Type l track MSR 1 track MSR PIN Pad Reserved OCR 9A OCR 9B 2 track MSR 2 track MSR 3 track MSR 3 track MSR 5A or MSR on 5B 5A 5B 5A or MSR on 5B or MSR on Checkout scanner 4B 9A Hand held scanner 4B Reserved Reserved OEM OEM 9A keyboard keyboard keyboard 9B 9C 9B 9C Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 4 4 1 Store Syste
366. ovides power to the I O and handles the serial I O communication with the main system unit Model 202 does not have an application processing capability The application running in the intelligent system unit Model 543 Model 421 or Model 321 sees the Model 202 1 0 as a second set of attached I O Model 202 is controlled by the microcode in the two 805X processors on the system unit logic card One processor acts as the primary interface to the intelligent system units and also controls access to the hard totals cash drawers and power control functions The other processor handles the RS 232C communications Subtopics 1 2 1 Implementation Overview 2 2 Subsystem Features 2 3 Internal System Loads 2 4 Controls and Indicators for Model 202 her Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Implementation Overview 1 2 1 Implementation Overview 2 12Mhz Intel 805X processors 32K NVRAM 4K reserved for hardware Programmable power through Model 541 Model 421 Model 321 89mm high system unit 4680 device channel support 468X I O devices Ten POS I O ports 2 RS 232C ports 9 pin D shell style No DASD support No PS 2 keyboard mouse parallel printer support No PS 2 speaker support No video support Not upgradeable No feature expansion options Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 2 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Subsystem Features 1 2 2 Subsystem Features Subtopics 1 2 2 1 Prog
367. p 1993 1 6 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Topic 2 4693 Configuration Tests and Utilities 20 TOPLC 2 4693 Configuration Tests and Utilities DANGER Never work on equipment or connect or disconnect signal cables during periods of lightning activity CAUTION For your safety connect equipment requiring electrical power to a properly wired and grounded outlet Subtopics 2 1 Introduction 2 2 4690 Store Loop Remote Initial Program Load RIPL 2 3 Test Programs Summary 2 4 Configuration Programs Summary 2 5 Utility Programs Summary 2 6 Using the System Programs 2 7 Configuration Procedure 2 8 Utilities Procedure Using System Programs 2 9 Test Procedure Using Operating System Exercisers 2 10 Resetting Configuration and the Terminal Load 2 11 POS 1 0 Device Channel Adapter Failure Status Bytes 2 12 Device Channel Adapter System Status Byte 2 13 Shared Buffer Request Byte 2 14 Shared Buffer Status Byte 2 15 Device IDs for the 4693 Point of Sale Terminal 2 16 4693 Real Time Clock Nonvolatile Random Access Memory Map Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 0 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Introduction 2 1 Introduction Subtopics 2 1 1 Reference Diagnostic and Support Diskettes 2 System Partition 3 IML Image 4 Keyboard Differences NNN her Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Reference Diagnostic and Support Diskettes 2 1 1 Reference Diagnostic and Support Dis
368. play 3 Type 1000 and then press S2 4 If this is a 4683 xx1 or 4684 continue at step 5 If this is a 4683 xx2 the terminal number is reset to 000 and message Z004 displays Switch POWER OFF 5 The terminal number is reset to 000 the display clears the point of sale terminal starts the load process and messages U001 through U0O7 are displayed If the point of sale terminal is to be removed from the store loop switch POWER OFF at the base unit The terminal number remains reset to 000 until a new number is entered If another terminal number is to be entered continue at Entering the Terminal Number in topic 5 6 13 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 14 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Initial Program Load IPL 5 6 15 Initial Program Load IPL Subtopics 5 6 15 1 Description of an IPL 5 6 15 2 Source of an IPL Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 15 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Description of an IPL 5 6 15 1 Description of an IPL An IPL is a group of program and data components that are loaded into the point of sale terminal read write random access storage RAM An IPL contains three major components System Code Input output 1 0 driver code Application code These components are selected by the user to make the hardware perform the tasks needed by the point of sale terminal operator The system code is loaded at power on time by code that resides in the read only storage ROS The system co
369. play E A A E A IA O IS A A PE 1520 Hand Held Scanner Model A01 esas A A A ee ee ee A A eee 1520 Hand Held Scanner Model A02 A A S EE ae a a aa 3687 Checkout Scanner Model 2 fe AA ae Ae ea E ee hn pete O Model Pxl A A O BP DO NR th OB ea Bt el eB Model 001 Pa eas ie o oe ee Se eee ee ee ee eee eee ee o Model 002 bias a Soe AE AR ARA Model A01 trees ses A E SES O EE E ETE Model A02 Copyright IBM Corp 9 7 3 1993 Store Systems Technical Reference Topic 10 Cables and Wiring Diagrams 10 0 Topic 10 Cables and Wiring Diagrams CAUTION For your safety connect equipment requiring electrical power to a properly wired and grounded outlet DANGER During periods of lightning activity do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation maintenance or reconfiguration Subtopics 10 1 Wiring Diagrams for 4693 4684 and 4683 Cables 10 2 Wiring Diagrams for the 4683 Base Unit Power Supply Connectors 10 3 Wiring Diagrams for the Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connectors 10 4 Wiring Diagrams for the Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connectors Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 0 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Wiring Diagrams for 4693 4684 and 4683 Cables 10 1 Wiring Diagrams for 4693 4684 and 4683 Cables Subtopics O UA OA E O O O AO AO OI DIS O SIA A G O O OO 10 OANA FWD 20 eed 22 423 24 229 20 oad 28 29 30 aod 32 33 34 eS 36 1 0 3004 0UNR
370. ply condition The indicator is illuminated when an overcurrent condition is detected and is controlled by the control voltage circuitry in the power supply After the overcurrent condition is corrected actuating the Mode Control switch resets the power supply overcurrent circuit Reset Switch A momentary contact pushbutton switch is located ina recess on the operator panel access door provides a method to reset the hardware to a known state An adjacent symbol identifies the Reset switch Actuating the switch causes a non maskable interrupt NMI to be generated The system s handling of the NMI depends on the system s state when the NMI occurs O If the system is not operational power is removed to the memory subsystem disable RAM retention and disables any programmed power on condition O If the actuation occurs during POST when the indicator on the cursor is on the right side of the display video or POS display the system is reset to a default state NVRAM is cleared and the reference diskette is automatically invoked O If the system is operational without software trapping of the interrupt the system performs a warm boot procedure Mechanical Keylock Model 541 only The keylock is available as a feature to provide security for diskette drive media and fixed disks Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 7 1 keylock also prevents removal of the system unit front access cover Store Systems Technical Reference Con
371. ption 4 4 i OOOOH 0022H POS data for feature slot 1 4 A Y 0023H 0045H POS data for feature slot 2 Y i 0046H 0068H POS data for feature slot 3 A 0069H 008BH POS data for feature slot 4 4 4 008CH OOQAEH POS data for feature slot 5 A Y OOAFH 00D1H POS data for feature slot 6 Y i 00D2H OOF4H POS data for feature slot 7 4 4 OOF5H 0117H POS data for feature slot 8 A Y 0118H 013AH POS data for feature slot 9 possides pare eea e ee ee ee ee O13BH 015DH POS data for feature slot 10 Pot pastor tos A pee eee a ee ee O15EH 0160H Reserved for expansion memory growth yora ie e n yaaa r a a a a 0161H 0162H Configuration CRC A Subtopics 3 3 4 1 POS Data Record Structure Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 3 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference POS Data Record Structure 3 3 4 1 POS Data Record Structure Feature slot POS data records are formatted as follows 1 Feature adapter card ID low byte high byte 2 One byte of information that contains the number of POS data bytes required for this feature Allowable values can range from 0 to 32 bytes
372. r log entries and allows you to clear the log data Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 5 10 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Enter Print Vital Product Data 2 5 11 Enter Print Vital Product Data This utility allows entry and printing of the vital product data See 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Hardware Service Manual Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 5 11 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Using the System Programs 2 6 Using the System Programs After loading the system programs there are three procedures available test configuration and utilities Read the notes below before beginning and then use the appropriate procedure Notes Ty If a power on password is active you have to either enter the correct password or remove the power on password See the procedure to remove the password jumper in 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Hardware Service Manual 2 When using any of the retail point of sale RPOS keyboard family of keyboards or some of the older 4680 type keyboards the Sl and S2 functions require a combination of two keys If your keyboard has a Ctrl key first press and hold the Ctrl key then press the S1 or S2 key 3 When more than one keyboard is attached only one the primary keyboard is defined for use when running system programs In this situation if the keyboard you try does not work try the other keyboard 4 System programs load automatically under certain error conditions detected during POST
373. r network nodes listing A printout usually prepared by a language translator that Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 13 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary lists the source code load In computer programming to enter data into memory or working registers load image An image ready for transmission to a communication controller that contains multiple images for example a combination of a configuration image with on or more application program images or a combination of configuration image with one or more customized images lobe receptacle In the IBM Token Ring Network an outlet on an access unit for connecting a lobe local area network LAN A computer network located on a user s premises within a limited geographical area Note Communication within a LAN is not subject to external regulations however communication across the LAN boundary may be subject to some form of regulation locally administered address An adapter address that the user can assign to override the universally administered address Contrast with universally administered address logging The chronological recording of events occurring in a system or a subsystem for accounting or data collection purposes logical unit LU 1 In SNA a port through which an end user accesses the SNA network in order to communicate with another end user and through which the end user accesses the functions provided by system services control point
374. r status To refresh the status press f9 1 i i Message line Fl F2 F3QUIT F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9Refresh i Status line i i a i yagi ey we gers ee VEEE ny cag ny cy ea ee i ec my AE ig E nl oF EN cna E mag OE A om at ey asa Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 6 3 Store Systems Technical Reference Problem Data Collection Form 9 7 Problem Data Collection Form Date Time Store Number Controller Number__ Terminal Number Message that you received Symptom that you observed Describe the Problem What were you trying to do Can you make the problem happen again Y Yes N No What else was happening in the store Choose keywords from the list on the other side of this form Primary keywords Additional keywords Il Component ID MAKE COPIES OF THIS FORM FOR FUTURE USE A l Primary Keywords Description Pecos eS pose rot ees ee eee ee eee AB ABEND Peace es Puree eee ae a ee ee ee ee a ADRS Address Displacement Offset yen en E Poor oS ee e ee Sole Shee ee see See eee es DEVS Device Type and Model dia A A A A it y a FLDS Fields Label Name poe se sso eS Pura to ii tdt eee ee See ees L LVLS Levels Potrtcodiiass A a MSG Message pus tosses ee ports toa e a ss o ee a Sat OPCS OP Codes I O Command Codes T P OP Codes Request Codes A ovs Overlaid Core 4
375. ram Load IPL 6 16 Power On Self Test for the Point of Sale Terminal 7 Remote IPL RIPL for Token Ring and Baseband LAN Ta Installation and Maintenance Tag Hardware TAB Configuration 7 4 Installation Instructions Tad Operating Instructions 7 6 Theory of Operation 8 4684 Device Channel Adapter Failure Status Bytes 8 1 Error Code Failure Status Byte 0 8 2 Microprocessor Status Codes Failure Status Byte 1 83 Shared Buffer Latch Error Codes and Extended Data Failure Status Bytes 2 and 3 8 4 Shared Buffer Error Codes and Test Patterns Failure Status Bytes 4 and 5 8 5 CMOS Error Codes Failure Status Byte 6 8 6 Dump Error Codes Failure Status Byte 7 8 7 Device Channel Adapter System Status Byte 8 8 Shared Buffer Request Byte 8 9 Shared Buffer Status Byte 8 10 Device Channel Adapter Interrupt Flag Byte 8 11 POST Test Device Channel Adapter Errors 8 12 4684 Memory Map 9 4684 Communication Adapters Port Assignments 9 42 IBM Dual Asynchronous Adapter 93 IBM Multiprotocol Communication Adapter 10 4683 Serial Input Output Channel Device Channel 10 1 Device Channel Configuration 0 2 Device Channel Interface 1073 Device Channel Byte Format Copyright IBM Corp 1993 CONTENTS 2 ooo Nos 00 J0040uN a N NOP UN Ra YDOBWNRFPFPRFPONNNNNNNFKFEFOCHOIDUGUBWNHKRONNNNNNNNNNEFOKRHE O 0 10 O KO KO O 1O LO LO DAWA CO VO CO CO VO 00 00 00 JJ N JAVA OOOO 0101010101 OY Or 01 0 WI STD DS O O SO NO OTO O I
376. rammable Power Control 1 2 2 2 Serial Asynchronous Port 1 2 2 3 Power Supply and Auxiliary Power Source Requirements Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 2 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Programmable Power Control 1 2 2 1 Programmable Power Control Model 202 supports the programmable power control function provided by the Model 541 Model 421 and Model 321 system When the Model 541 Model 421 or Model 321 powers down for any event Mode Control switch activation software shutdown or a fault condition or powers up timer on or Mode Control switch activation the attached Model 202 system by default follows the same sequence The Model 202 Mode Control switch can also control the system unit s operational state Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 2 2 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Serial Asynchronous Port 1 2 2 2 Serial Asynchronous Port Model 202 provides serial communication ports using a 16450 UART for asynchronous data transfers up to 9600 bps The external interface uses a standard 9 pin D shell connector and pinout defined for RS 232C The voltage levels are EIA only on the RS 232C interface The serial ports are designated Serial A and Serial B for identification The connector pinout assignments are detailed in Table 13 for a DTE device H Y Table 13 Serial Port Pinout Assignments x2 po o lt Pin Signal Name Signal Direction 4 4 f
377. rd of the frames and bytes transmitted on a network transaction 1 The process of recording item sales processing refunds recording coupons handling voids verifying checks before tendering and arriving at the amount to be paid by or to a customer The receiving of payment for merchandise or service is also included in a transaction 2 In an SNA network an exchange between two programs that usually involves a specific set of initial input data that causes the execution of a specific task or job Examples of transactions include the entry of a customer s deposit that results in the updating of the customer s balance and the transfer of a message to one or more destination points transaction program TP A program that processes transactions in or through a logical unit LU type 6 2 in an SNA network Application transaction programs are end users in an SNA network they process transactions for service transaction programs and for other end users Service transaction programs are IBM supplied programs that typically provide utility services to application transaction programs transfer rate See transfer data rate transition See state transition transmission The sending of data from one place for reception elsewhere transmit To send information from one place for reception elsewhere transmitter 1 A circuit used in data communication applications to send information from one place for reception elsewhere 2 The dev
378. rds have the same format Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Topic 3 4693 Power On Self Test POST 2 0 TOPprC 3 4693 Power On Self Test POST The Power On Self Test POST uses the speaker subsystem to communicate to the user when an error is being reported All error codes are written to the primary display which is the video display if present or is the alphanumeric display configured as the primary system display Subtopics 3 1 Power On Self Test and the Meaning of Beeps 3 2 Checkpoint Codes 3 3 POST Interface Reference Information 3 4 BIOS Data Areas Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 0 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Power On Self Test and the Meaning of Beeps 3 1 Power On Self Test and the Meaning of Beeps The POST code uses the speaker to communicate the results of some tests The following describes what the beeps mean and which device or devices are involved in the failing test A failing component could cause a following test to fail The following definitions are accurate for most POST detected errors No Beeps If POST completes and no beeps are heard the speaker is failing or the planar board is failing One Beep The normal POST completion No errors were detected Two Beeps An error was detected during POST Most POST errors are two beeps Continuous Beep The system planar board is failing or the speaker subsystem is failing Repeating Short Beeps A
379. re Loop status Providing Backup Yes No 1004 i 3 i i Continue at Step 008 1 i 1 At the primary store controller display the Store Loop Control status The primary store controller is the controller that has been designated to Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0130 W005 Message control the store loop It is supported by the backup store controller Is the Store Loop Control status Controlling Loop Yes No i 1006 I 1 i 1 Disconnect the primary store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle i Do not reconnect this store controller until the problem has been i resolved Continue at Step 011 1 i 1 i Both store controllers are trying to control the store loop This condition is caused by attaching an active store controller to the store loop when another active store controller is on the store loop Disable the backup store controller Wait 15 seconds and enable the backup store controller Return to normal store operation 1008 From step 004 Disconnect the backup store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Do not reconnect this store controller until the problem has been resolved Wait 15 seconds and observe the keyboard li
380. re Systems Technical Reference Index display B alphanumeric operator or shopper optical character reader OCR connector and cable 10 1 6 parallel port 4684 and 4693 10 1 18 point of sale keyboard A and B connector and long cable 10 1 7 point of sale keyboard A and B connector and short cable 10 1 8 point of sale printer model 1 2 3 or 4 connector and cable 10 1 23 point of sale terminal connector and cable 10 1 28 power supply connector P11 10 2 power supply connector P12 10 2 power supply connector P13 10 2 power supply connector P14 10 2 printer model 1 or 2 printer card connector J printer card connector J printer card connector J11 10 3 11 printer card connector J12 10 3 12 printer card connector J13 10 3 13 printer card connector J2 10 printer card connector J3 10 printer card connector J4 10 printer card connector J5 10 printer card connector J6 10 LG 8 10 9 10 Ss UNER 1 10 371 TO 190235140 printer card connector J printer card connector J printer card connector J printer model 3 or 4 printer card connector Jl printer card connector J printer card connector J printer card connector J printer card connector J printer card connector J2 printer card connector J3 printer card connector J4 printer card connector J5 printer card connector J6 7 8 WWWW WW Y Ww OANA FWD 10 4 10 4 10 10 10 10 10 4 10 4 9 A A A A printer card connector J card connector J card connector J9 pri
381. re loop adapter cable Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the active store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1 i j i Reconnect the active store controller to the store loop Are there any powered OFF 4683 xxls connected to the store loop segment between the 4683 displaying message W005 and the active store controller Yes No i i 1057 The problem is in the store loop wiring between the active store controller and the 4683 xx1 or in the store loop receptacle for the store controller or 4683 xxl Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1 i i i One at a time disconnect each powered OFF 4683 xx1 from the store loop segment by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle After each 4683 is disconnected return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No i i 1059 i 1 i 1 If all powered OFF 4683s have not been disconnected continue disconnecting them and displaying the system message at the active store controller i SOP ee If all powered OFF 4683s have been disconnected the problem is in the store loop wiring between the active store controller and the 4683 xxl or in t
382. re vital product data and real time clock date and time It is kept active by the battery when the system is powered off If the stored data is lost because of a depleted or removed battery the data can be restored by running restore configuration or Automatic configuration from the reference diskette When you switch the power ON the terminal uses this information as it performs the power on self test Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 4 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Create Change Configuration 5 3 4 2 Create Change Configuration This option of the configuration process automatically configures both the system unit s internal devices and options as well as it s external point of sale devices It creates the configuration data record that reflects the hardware configuration Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 4 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Activate New Configuration 5 3 4 3 Activate New Configuration This option activates the new or changed configuration by saving the new or changed configuration data in the 4684 terminal memory Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 4 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Backup Configuration 5 3 4 4 Backup Configuration This option allows you to save the 4684 and 4683 configuration data by writing the current configuration in the 4684 memory to the backup reference diskette A copy of the configuration data is written to a binary image file called 4684CONF on the bac
383. read operation from the 32 KB area is performed No checks are performed on the 8 KB RTC NVRAM area The starting address to read from is supplied in the BX register with bit 15 indicating the desired state of NMI upon exit of this call Control information is provided in the CX register with bit 15 indicating the I O location to read bit 14 indicating address incrementation and bits 13 0 indicating the number of bytes to read On entry register BX contains the address to read Bits 0 through 14 Source starting address Bit 15 0 NMI is enabled on exit 1 NMI is disabled on exit On entry register CX contains control information Bits 0 through 13 Number of bytes to read 0 No operation Bit 14 1 Increment address Bit 15 0 32 KB NVRAM area location 1 8 KB RTC NVRAM area location On entry register ES contains the segment address of the destination buffer and register DI contains the offset address of the destination buffer On return register AH contains the return code 00h Completed successfully 02h NVRAM data is corrupt 32 KB area only 03h Address out of range 86h Function not supported On return register BX contains the address modified based on bit 6 of register CH Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 3 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 2Bh Write String To NVRAM With CRC Check 4 6 3 6 AL 2Bh Write String To NVRAM With CRC Check This function w
384. receipt paper advance 4 4 J8 2 5 V de return 4 4 J8 3 Journal paper advance 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J9 Front Buttons 10 4 9 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J9 Front Buttons j J9 Printer i i Card l J9 Line Description Connector i Eon A J9 1 Document insert reverse advance Joden tuun partenaire ao J9 2 Document insert forward advance Ho Y J9 3 Document insert ready button pose et Pe se ee ee SOS eS J9 4 5 V de return 4 4 J9 5 Turn on printer indicator light Preece see Pop ae Se to to da ee i J9 6 5 V de Y Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 9 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J10 Capacitor 10 4 10 Model 3 or 4 Printer Card Connector J10 Capacitor Printer Card i Connector i Line Description i J10 1 36 V de return J10 2 36 V de i J10 3 Polarization key J10 4 Blank
385. record for each employee showing Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 6 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary such information as rate of pay and deductions or an inventory file one record for each inventory item showing such information as cost selling price and number in stock See also data set file data integrity 1 The condition that exists as long as accidental or intentional destruction alteration or loss of data does not occur 2 Preservation of data for its intended use data link 1 Any physical link such as a wire or a telephone circuit that connects one or more remote terminals to a communication control unit or connects one communication control unit with another 2 The assembly of parts of two data terminal equipment DTE devices that are controlled by a link protocol and the interconnecting data circuit that enable data to be transferred from a data source to a data link 3 In SNA see also link Note A telecommunication line is only the physical medium of transmission A data link includes the physical medium of transmission the protocol and associated devices and programs it is both physical and logical data processing system A network including computer systems and associated personnel that accepts information processes it according to a plan and produces the desired results data rate See data transfer rate line data rate data set Logically related records treated as
386. resent OFF OFF OFF A E Pa ee a PICTURE 1 Figure 3 Model 541 Operator Figure 4 Models 421 and 321 PICTURE 3 Figure 5 Model 541 Rear I O PICTURE 4 Figure 6 Model 421 Rear I O PICTURE 5 Figure 7 Model 321 Rear I O Access Area with Access Door Open PICTURE 2 Operator Access Connector Panel Connector Panel Connector Panel Area with Access Door Area Area Area Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 7 2 Open Store Systems Technical Reference Security Features 1 1 8 Security Features The 4693 provides both physical and password security including O Support for PS 2 power on password enabled by using the reference diskette O Support for PS 2 keyboard password enabled by using the reference diskette O Lockable diskette drive access area Model 541 only O Lockable system unit covers Model 541 only There is no provision to electronically sense lock position locked unlocked Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 202 System Unit Description 1 2 Model 202 System Unit Description Model 202 is the 4693 version of the 4683 Model 2 system unit except that Model 202 does not provide the off line capability mode provided by the 4683 Model A02 Like the 4683 Model 002 Model 202 is a non intelligent unit that provides the capability to attach a second POS workstation to each Model 541 Model 421 and Model 321 The Model 202 system unit pr
387. ressing purposes terminator A 75 ohm resistive connector used on the end of a cable or an unused tap to minimize cable reflections threshold 1 A level point or value above which something is true or will take place and below which it is not true or will not take place 2 In IBM bridge programs a value set for the maximum number of frames that are not forwarded across a bridge due to errors before a threshold exceeded occurrence is counted and indicated to network management programs 3 An initial value from which a counter is decremented from an initial value When the counter reaches zero or the threshold value a decision is made and or an event occurs till A tray in the cash drawer of the point of sale terminal used to keep the different denominations of bills and coins separated and easily accessible time out 1 A time interval allotted for certain events to occur such as a response to polling before corrective error recovery action is taken 2 A parameter related to an enforced event designed to occur at the conclusion of a predetermined elapsed time A time out condition can be canceled by the receipt of an appropriate time out cancellation signal 3 A time interval allotted for certain operations to occur for example response to polling or addressing before system operation is interrupted and must be restarted token A sequence of bits passed from one device to another on the token ring network that s
388. rites a string of information to either the 32 KB or the 8 KB NVRAM areas The CRC code is checked to verify that it is good before a write operation to the 32 KB area is performed No checks are performed on the 8 KB RTC NVRAM area The starting address to write to is supplied in the BX register with bit 15 indicating the desired state of NMI upon exit of this call Control information is provided in the CX register with bit 15 indicating 1 0 location for to read bit 14 indicating address incrementation and bits 13 0 indicating the number of bytes to write On entry register BX contains the address to write Bits 0 through 14 Target starting address Bit 15 0 NMI is enabled on exit NMI is disabled on exit On entry register CX contains control information Bits 0 through 13 Number of bytes to write 0 No operation Bit 14 1 Increment address Bit 15 0 32 KB NVRAM area location 1 8 KB RTC NVRAM area location On entry register DS contains the segment address of the source buffer and register SI contains the offset address of the source buffer On return from these functions register AH contains the condition code 00h Completed successfully 02h NVRAM data is corrupt 32 KB area only 03h Address in out of range 86h Function is not supported On return register BX contains the address modified based on bit 6 of register CH Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 3 6 1 Store Syst
389. rn failed 4 4 4 l OD EF Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 OE DF Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 OF BE Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 10 LETE Data test pattern failed 4 4 PE i Lo PI Buffer address 0400 failed 4 4 4 l i 12 1 502 Buffer address 0200 failed 4 4 4 13 F3 Buffer address 0100 failed 4 4 4 14 04 Buffer address 0080 failed 4 lo LS 1 15 Buffer address 0040 failed Ho 4 4 16 06 Buffer address 0020 failed 4 4 4 Av F7 Buffer address 0010 failed 4 4 4 18 08 Buffer address 0008 failed 4 4 4 f pS FY Buffer address 0004 failed 4 4 4
390. roblem is in the store loop wiring between the active store controller and the last active 4683 xxl or in the store loop receptacle for the store controller or 4683 xxl Report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring at a time disconnect each powered OFF 4683 xx1 from the store loop ment by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop eptacle er each 4683 is disconnected return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No i 1029 If all powered OFF 4683s have not been disconnected continue disconnecting them and displaying the system message at the active store controller OBRT If all powered OFF 4683s have been disconnected the problem is in the store loop wiring between the active store controller and the 4683 xxl that you reconnected in Step 014 or in the store loop receptacle for the store controller or 4683 xx1 Reconnect all 4683s and report the problem to the person responsible for repairing store loop wiring 1 1030 Unplug the store loop cable from socket 1 on the 4683 xx1 that you just disconnected from the store loop Attach shorting plug 1B to the 4683 end of the cable See Figure 29 in Lope adu Plug the other end of the cable into the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and displ
391. roller until the problem has been i resolved Continue at Step 011 1 i 1 I Both store controllers are trying to control the store loop This condition is caused by attaching an active store controller to the store loop when another active store controller is on the store loop Disable the backup store controller Wait 15 seconds and enable the backup store controller Return to normal store operation 1008 From step 004 Disconnect the backup store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in tope 7d Do not reconnect this store controller until the problem has been resolved Wait 15 seconds and display the system message at the primary store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display Yes No 1 1 4 1009 i 1 i Continue at Step 011 i i 1 i Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the backup store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages 1011 From steps 002 006 and 009 Are there any 4683 xxls connected to the store loop Yes No 4 1012 4 i if I 1 i i Continue at Step 035 1 i 1 i Go to the last active 4683 xxl on the store loop See the store loop layout chart A 4683 is considered ac
392. ror messages 1 i 1 i The primary store controller is failing Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the primary store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 8 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Topic 8 Store Controller Reference Information 8 0 Topic 8 Store Controller Reference Information Store controller operation is a function the operating system The discussions in this topic can be used as reference for store systems consisting of 4693 4684 or 4683 point of sale terminals When reading this topic the various models of terminals may be interchanged according to the following chart 4684 xxx may also be 4693 541 4683 xxl may also be 4693 421 or 4693 321 4683 x02 may also be 4693 202 This topic contains reference information about the local area network LAN and backup It may be applied to 4693 point of sale terminals as well as 4680 point of sale terminals Subtopics 8 1 Local Area Network LAN 8 2 Store Controller Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 0 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Local Area Network LAN 8 1 Local Area Network LAN The LAN includes The IBM PC network The IBM multiple controller feature The IBM PC network adapter in the store controller co Or The IBM token ring adapter in the store controller Subtopics 8 1 1 File Server Store Controller on
393. rosgosists iio eee SSS 2 see Sass See ess Byte 4 Error Byte 5 Code Test Pattern Definition 4 4 4 00 00 No errors detected Ho 4 4 j 01 01 Data test pattern failed 4 i 02 02 Data test pattern failed j 03 04 Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 i 04 08 Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 j 1 05 10 Data test pattern failed 06 1 20 Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 l 07 40 Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 l 08 80 Data test pattern failed 4 4 l 09 FE Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 i OA FD Data test pattern failed 4 4 4 j OB FB Data test pattern failed l OC E7 Data test patte
394. rovided with option adapters to the backup reference diskette This procedure is normally done during the initial 4684 setup or when additional options are added to the 4684 SET SYSTEM DATE AND TIME Allows you to view or change the system date and time settings SET VITAL PRODUCT DATA Allows you to view or change the 4684 vital product data MOVE THE 4684 Secures the fixed disk read write heads so that no damage occurs during a move QUIT UTILITIES Returns to MENU M1 Subtopics 5 5 1 Flow Chart of MENUs Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Flow Chart of MENUs 5 5 1 Flow Chart of MENUs PICTURE 12 Figure 15 Flow Chart of MENUs for Running Tests Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 5 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Preparing to Run Utilities 5 6 Preparing to Run Utilities Read the following before beginning Some of the events happen quickly Be careful not to miss them if you are reading the book as the initial program load IPL proceeds 1 Use your store procedures to stop any application programs that are running 2 Do the following to IPL a Switch POWER OFF at the 4684 b Insert the reference diskette in the 4684 diskette drive C Switch power ON at the 4683 if attached d Switch power ON at the 4684 3 Power on self test runs automatically when power is switched ON The messages that normally display during the IPL process are as follows a The video di
395. s If the following message displays M0101 A Configuration Error has occurred Do you want to run configuration Answer YES to this question MENU C2 displays following automatic configuration 6 Switch POWER OFF at the 4684 Ps If you unplugged any feature option card or POS device to cause an error reconnect it 8 Switch 4684 power ON 9 When you hear two tones press S1 ESC on the enhanced A N keyboard 10 If message M0001 Press the 1 key displays press 1 Each error that was detected displays along with additional information about the error Press S1 or ESC for each error that displays The following message displays M0101 A Configuration Error has occurred Do you want to run configuration 11 Answer YES to this question The system unit devices and point of sale devices that are attached are automatically configured 12 Depending on the devices that are attached you may be asked additional questions 13 Select ACTIVATE NEW CONFIGURATION and follow the instructions on the display Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Preparing to Run Configuration 5 4 Preparing to Run Configuration Read the following before beginning the configuration Some of the events happen quickly Be careful not to miss them if you are reading the book as the IPL proceeds al Use your store procedures to stop any application programs that are running 2a Do the following to I
396. s 4 4 i 14537 Latch test errors 4 4 14547 Shared buffer errors 14557 CMOS test errors 4 4 14567 Dump latch errors 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 14 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device IDs for the 4693 Point of Sale Terminal 2 15 Device IDs for the 4693 Point of Sale Terminal The device IDs are used by set terminal characteristics STC to identify devices that are configured for or attached to a point of sale terminal The device ID is also required when requesting a trace report of the device channel for a unique device Table 29 in topic 2 15 1 is a list of the device IDs by the ID number Table 30 in topic 2 15 2 is a list of the device IDs by the device type Subtopics 2 15 1 Device IDs by ID Number 2 15 2 Device IDs by Device Type Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 15 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device IDs by ID Number 2 15 1 Device IDs by ID Number A A A eng alee yal mil al el yee a ea mig A E i aang wi ety a a Table 29 Device IDs by ID Number el ted a a cay ed a e e LE EN a ca etre ne EA a e jy EEEE al pi E ay ee ath Dey Se ci ci SO oy ey a De Se nd A Seni Rak Sen la ies Daioh Dente De oa ID Device Socket Number HO
397. s SSCPs An LU can support at least two sessions one with an SSCP and one with another LU and may be capable of supporting many sessions with other logical units 2 A type of network addressable unit that enables end users to communicate with each other and gain access to network resources logon n The procedure for starting up a point of sale terminal or store controller for normal sales operations by sequentially entering the correct security number and transaction number Synonymous with sign on log on v 1 To initiate a session 2 In SNA products to initiate a session between an application program and a logical unit LU Synonymous with sign on loop 1 A set of instructions that may be executed repeatedly while a certain condition prevails See also store loop 2 A closed unidirectional signal path connecting input output devices to a network loop wiring concentrator LWC A device that serves as a junction to connect the store loop cable from individual terminals to the store controller LWC loop wiring concentrator M machine language A language that is used directly by a machine macro An instruction that causes the execution of a predefined sequence of instructions in the same source language magnetic stripe The magnetic material similar to recording tape on merchandise tickets credit cards and employee badges Information is recorded on the stripe for later reading by the m
398. s on a 4683 point of sale terminal all models to the microprocessor in the 4683 xxl The microprocessor with a shared RAM attached microprocessor controls the data flow on the device channel The rules for sending and receiving data over the device channel are a subset of the synchronous data link control SDLC rules and the store loop rules Subtopics 5 10 1 Device Channel Configuration 5 10 2 Device Channel Interface 5 10 3 Device Channel Byte Format 5 10 4 Device Channel Message Format 5 10 5 Device Channel Message Checking 5 10 6 Device Channel Power On Initialization Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 10 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device Channel Configuration 5 10 1 Device Channel Configuration The communication link connecting devices to the 4683 all models consists of land patterns on the base card in the base unit and device cables connecting the devices to the base unit rear panel The device channel connecting the 4683 002 to the 4683 xx1l can consist of either a single IBM supplied cable connecting the two units or an IBM supplied cable for each unit terminated with an IBM data connector that plugs into the wall The cable in the wall is provided by the customer and is limited to a length of 150 m 490 ft This cable must be IBM Cabling System cable or comparable Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 10 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device Channel Interface 5 10 2 Device Channel Interface The
399. s section describes the single staged ABIOS routines that have been modified and added to support the 4690 system All of the ABIOS routines described in this section can be used in any of the processor protected modes of operation OS 2 4690 or equivalent The ABIOS routines are Device ID 02h Disk Device ID 09h System services Device ID 0Ah PPC NMI Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device ID 02h Disk 4 9 Device ID 02h Disk The disk diskette BIOS routine supports the 2 5 inch SCSI fixed disk drive Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 9 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device ID 09h System Services 4 10 Device ID 09h System Services The programmable power control function is the additional ABIOS routine added to support the 4693 system Subtopics 4 10 1 Function 20h Programmable Power Control PPC ABIOS Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 10 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Function 20h Programmable Power Control PPC ABIOS 4 10 1 Function 20h Programmable Power Control PPC ABIOS The PPC ABIOS provides an application interface to the PPC hardware that controls the system power on off state and is the control mechanism for battery backup and refresh of the system DRAM during the absence of AC power The following routines are accessed by function number 20h with a subfunction number as described below The subfunction number is a word at offset 10h
400. s tect ee Suk esas oe ssS Byte 7 Error Code Definition f t a Pos o e ee 00 No errors detected pur bse coo porel See Se et ee o he a Se 01 Software invoked dump request error Poet Gee ee ie e Se ee 02 Dump switch invoked dump request error pria pand e loto teo to tato 04 Hardware Dump Request Bit error A Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device Channel Adapter System Status Byte 5 8 7 Device Channel Adapter System Status Byte The following table describes the bits of the device channel adapter system status byte SSB The values in the SSB represent the current state of the store loop adapter hardware A l Table 49 Device Channel Adapter System Status Byte Pes eet cle eh Ue tt to o ee ee ta ee ee Bit Definition J a Pr pt st o A Bit 7 Reserved Read Only 4 A i Bit 6 1 Generated a device channel adapter soft Read Write POR 0 Reset the POR mechanism A Bit 5 1 Requested a dump Read Write 0 Reset the dump mechanism yodae eei E O 0 DD mg i Bit 4 Reserved Read Only 4 4 Bit 3 1 Enable the interrupt mechanism Read Write 0 Disable the interrupt mechanism Jenei Pasar e o o e O Bit 2 1 Level 7 interrupt is active Read Only 0 Level 7 interrupt is inacti
401. s to this data segment should be established via the segment address stored at address 40 0E or via BIOS interrupt 15H function number C1H Other vectors or fixed segment values must not be used to point to the EBDA because they are not updated when the EBDA is relocated or expanded Copyright IBM Corp 1993 3 4 1 4 0 Topic 4 Subtopics Basic Input Output System BIOS Routines de 0 J004s uN 9 Sk hp RDA BR BR BR RO Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Store Systems Technical Reference Topic 4 4693 Basic Input Output System BIOS 4693 Basic Input Output System BIOS 02h OFh 10h 13h 15h 16h PPC NMI IRQ7 Point Of Sale POS Video BIOS Disk Diskette System Services POS Keyboard BIOS Advanced Basic Input Output System ABIOS Routines Device ID 02h 10 Device ID 09h 11 Device ID OAh Disk System Services PPC NMI Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 0 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Basic Input Output System BIOS Routines 4 1 Basic Input Output System BIOS Routines This section describes software interrupt routines that are called from an application and get control from hardware interrupts and that have been modified and added to support the 4690 system Access to BIOS is through software interrupt routines Each BIOS entry point is available through its own interrupt with the AH register All of the software routines described in this section are u
402. sale terminals of a 4680 Store System The store controller manages the data flow on the store loop The rules for sending and receiving data over the loop are a subset of the synchronous data link control SDLC rules Subtopics 2 1 Configuration Store Loop Hardware Store Loop Wiring Concentrator Polls End of Poll Timeouts Beacons Cyclical Redundancy Check CRC Message Retransmit Store Loop Error Conditions and Error Messages Store Loop Error Recovery Procedures OY OY OY OV OV OV OV OY O NNNNNNDN ND OANA FWD Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Configuration 6 2 1 Configuration The physical loop which starts and ends at the store controller connects the 4683s in a serial or radial arrangement The store loop wiring is a shielded twisted pair cable that is installed by the user This cable must meet the electrical and physical specifications outlined in IBM 4680 Store System Preparing Your Site The store loop can also be installed using the IBM Cabling System Several types of loop configurations are possible depending on the type of cable used Two of these configurations are described here O A radial store loop uses a twisted pair cable that runs from each 4683 and the store controller to a centrally located loop wiring concentrator LWC See Figure 19 in topic 6 2 3 O A serial store loop uses a twisted pair cable that connects the store controller s loop transmitter to
403. sed when the processor is in real mode DOS operating environment or equivalent The software interrupt routines are Interrupt 02h PPC NMI Interrupt OFh IRQ7 Interrupt 10h video Interrupt 13h disk diskette Interrupt 15h system services Interrupt 16h keyboard Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Interrupt 02h PPC NMI 4 2 Interrupt 02h PPC NMI NMI routine supports the programmable power If the PPC NMI routine gets control and finds the existing ROM NMI The nonmaskable interrupt control PPC hardware that the PPC hardware did not generate the NMI routines are executed as normal Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Interrupt OFh IRQ7 4 3 Interrupt OFh IRQ7 The IRQ7 hardware interrupt routine transmits and receives operations for the SIO channel hardware The IRQ7 routine is used by the system service BIOS routine for POS device control See interrupt 15h AH 92h POS Device Control BIOS in topic 4 6 2 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 43 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Interrupt 10h Point Of Sale POS Video BIOS 4 4 Interrupt 10h Point Of Sale POS Video BIOS The POS video BIOS interrupt routine redirects video BIOS functions to an SIO channel attached display if a PS 2 video display is not attached This allows POST to display diagnostic error codes and provides a standard display interface for the reference
404. sor White 4 4 4 J3 5 Polarization key No wire 4 4 4 J3 6 5 V de return Black 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J4 Document Insert Paper Sensor 10 3 4 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J4 Document Insert Paper Sensor Printer Card Sensor Connector Line Description Cable Wire 4 J4 1 5 V de return Black 4 4 4 J4 2 Polarization key No wire 4 4 4 J4 3 5 V de Blue 4 4 4 J4 4 Sensor Green J4 5 Sensor White 4 4 4 J4 6 5 V de return Black 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 3 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J5 Home Sensor 10 3 5 Model 1 or 2 Printer Card Connector J5 Home Sensor 4 Printer Card Sensor Connector Line Description Cable Wire
405. splay if present displays characters that represent the memory test progress b A series of Unnn messages display that represent the progress of the IPL c A reference diskette Copyright message displays d Message M0001 PRESS THE 1 KEY displays alphanumeric display only otherwise MENU M1 displays Press the 1 key on the primary keyboard e MENU M1 is displayed O If message M0101 is displayed answer YES MENU C2 displays after automatic configuration is run See MENU C2 at Creating or Changing Configuration in topic 5 4 1 O If an error number s is displayed note the number s and then press S1 Additional information or instructions are displayed to help continue problem determination Note On the ANPOS keyboard during some procedures and on the enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 If the IPL does not continue after pressing S1 go to the IBM 4680 Store Messages Guide and follow the User Response for the displayed message When MENU M1 is displayed you are prepared to start utilities To backup the reference diskette see Making a Backup Reference Diskette in topic Abr ls To copy an option diskette to the reference diskette see Copying an Option Diskette to the Reference Diskette in topic 5 6 2 To set the system date and time see Setting System Date And Time in LOpLe 3 bardas To set the vital product data see Setting Vital Product Data in topic 5 6 4 To move the 468
406. ssage At the backup store controller display the Backup Store Loop status Is the Backup Store Loop status Providing Backup Yes No i 1015 i 1 i Continue at Step 019 1 J i i At the primary store controller display the Store Loop Control status The primary store controller is the controller that has been designated to control the store loop It is supported by the backup store controller Is the Store Loop Control status Controlling Loop Yes No 4 1017 o I 1 i 1 Disconnect the primary store controller from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle i Do not reconnect this store controller until the problem has been i resolved Continue at Step 025 1 i 1 i Both store controllers are trying to control the store loop This condition is caused by attaching an active store controller to the store loop when another active store controller is on the store loop Disable the backup store controller Wait 15 seconds and enable the backup store controller Return to normal store operation 1019 From step 015 Display the system message at the backup store controller by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W771 display Yes No 4 1020 i 1 I i Continue at Step 022 1 i 1 i Follow the User Response in me
407. ssage W771 in the Messages Guide for your system 1022 From step 020 Is the store loop cable on the backup store controller plugged into the store loop receptacle Yes No 4 1023 4 I 1 l 1 i i Correct the problem by plugging the cable into the store loop receptacle 1 I i i Record keywords CONTROLLER and INCORROUT At the backup store controller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 3 3 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0110 W003 Message 1025 From steps 013 and 017 A store controller is active when it is The only store controller on the store loop a Fees The primary store controller and its status is Controlling Loop one EE The backup store controller and its status is Providing Backup Is the store loop cable plugged into the store loop adapter on the active store controller See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Yes No I i 1026 Correct the problem by plugging the cable into the store loop adapter 1 i 1 i Is the active store controller powered ON and loaded with the store controller program Yes No 4 1028 i 3 i Continue at Step 030 1 i 1 1 1030 From step 028 Switch POWER OFF at the active store controller Switch power ON and load t
408. st menus 2 6 2 test programs summary 2 3 testing procedure 2 6 3 testing using 4693 reference diskette adapter 2 6 3 diskette drive 2 6 3 dual asynchronous adapter 2 6 3 Ethernet adapter 2 6 3 failure status bytes 4693 2 11 fixed disk 2 6 3 memory 2 6 3 MPA 2 6 3 option adapter 2 6 3 PC network adapter 2 6 3 POS device 2 6 3 RS 232C 2 6 3 serial A 2 6 3 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 INDEX 7 Store Systems Technical Reference Index serial B 2 6 3 system board 2 6 3 system unit 2 6 3 token ring adapter 2 6 3 x25 artic communications 2 6 3 token ring remote IPL RIPL 4683 4684 5 7 token ring 4693 tests 2 6 3 translated safety information FRONT_1 4 U utilities 4684 reference diskette 5 3 utilities 4684 backup diskette creating 5 6 1 copying an option diskette to the reference diskette 5 6 2 flow chart of MENUs 5 5 1 formatting the fixed disk 5 6 7 introduction 5 5 logging errors 5 6 6 moving the 4684 5 6 5 parking the fixed disk heads 5 6 5 preparing to run 5 6 securing the fixed disk 5 6 5 setting system date 5 6 3 setting system time 5 6 3 setting vital product data 5 6 4 utility menus 2 6 2 utility procedure reference diskette 2 8 utility procedure system programs 2 8 utility programs summary 4693 backup and restore system programs 2 5 copy option disk 2 5 display memory map video console only 2 5 display NVRAM error log 2 5 display revision level 2 5 set keyboard rate 2 5 set password video console
409. st of the time automatic configuration is all that is necessary Subtopics 4 1 View Configuration Print Configuration Change Configuration Auto Configuration Save and Restore Configuration Set and View SCSI Device Configuration NM NNN NN Pe PR A oOo fF WN Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference View Configuration 2 4 1 View Configuration This displays the current configuration data that is stored in NVRAM Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 4 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Print Configuration 2 4 2 Print Configuration This prints the same data that is displayed by View on the POS printer or parallel printer Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 4 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Change Configuration 2 4 3 Change Configuration This allows the user to select configuration options other than the defaults This function is limited when no video display is present Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 4 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Auto Configuration 2 4 4 Auto Configuration This allows the user to configure the terminal and select the default options It requires very little manual intervention Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 4 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Save and Restore Configuration 2 4 5 Save and Restore Configuration save the configuration data to These functions allow the user to backup This data is used to restore the the system par
410. st with serial port parameter 1 A name in a procedure that refers to an argument passed to that procedure 2 A variable that is given a constant value for a specified application and that may denote the application 3 An item in a menu or for which the user specifies a value or for which the system provides a value when the menu is interpreted 4 Data passed between programs or procedures parity even A condition when the sum of all of the digits in an array of binary digits is even parity odd A condition when the sum of all of the digits in an array of binary digits is odd partner See conversation partner password In computer security a string of characters known to the computer system and a user who must specify it to gain full or limited access to a system and to the data stored within it path 1 Reference that specifies the location of a particular file within the various directories and subdirectories of a hierarchical file system 2 In a network any route between any two nodes 3 The route traversed by the information exchanged between two attaching devices in a network 4 A command in IBM DOS and IBM OS 2 that specifies directories to be searched for commands or batch files that are not found by a search of the current directory PC network A low cost broadband network that allows attached IBM personal computers to communicate and share resources personal computer PC A desk top free stand
411. sting a 4683 Storage Dump Requesting a Storage Dump Report Requesting a System Log Report Creating a 4680 Problem Analysis Diskette Requesting Store Controller Status Problem Data Collection Form Topic 10 Cables and Wiring Diagrams Wiring Diagrams for 4693 4684 and 4683 Cables Cash Drawer A Connector and Cable Cash Drawer B Connector and Cable Coin Dispenser Connector and Cable Display A Alphanumeric Operator or Shopper Connector and Cable Display B Alphanumeric Operator or Shopper Connector and Cable Optical Character Reader OCR Connector and Cable Point of Sale Keyboard A and B Connector and Long Cable Point of Sale Keyboard A and B Connector and Short Cable Enhanced A N Keyboard Connector and Cable 4684 4693 RS 232C Device Connector and Cable RS 232C or Current Loop Device Connector and Cable RS 232C Asynchronous Communications Port RS 232C Current Loop Wrap Plug RS 232C EIA Wrap Plug Scale Connector and Cable Special Attachment Cable Remote Alarm and Non IBM Cash Drawer Special Attachment Y Cable 1520 Model A02 and Dual Track MSR System Unit Printer Parallel Port 4684 and 4693 Serial I O Asynchronous Port 4693 4693 Serial I O Asynchronous Wrap Plug 3687 Point of Sale Scanner Model 002 Adapter Connector and Cable 4696 4697 Point of Sale Scanner Connector and Cable Point of Sale Printer Model 1 2 3 or 4 Connector and Cable 4680 4690 Store Loop Connector and Cable 4683 Video Display 5 inch Distributed
412. storage area into which data may be entered and retrieved in a nonsequential manner RCMS Remote change management server read To acquire or to interpret data from a storage device from a data medium or from another source read only memory ROM A computer s or adapter s storage area whose contents cannot be modified by the user except under special circumstances real time 1 Pertaining to the actual time during which a physical process occurs 2 Pertaining to data collected concurrently with physical events so that the results of the collection operation may be used to influence the sequence of events receive To obtain and store information transmitted from a device receptacle Electrically a fitting equipped to receive a plug and used to complete a data connection or electrical path See also lobe receptacle record A collection of related items of data treated as a unit for example in stock control each invoice could constitute one record A complete set of such records may form a file reference diskette 1 A diskette shipped with the IBM Personal System 2 computers with Micro Channel architecture The diskette contains code and files used for configuration of options and for hardware diagnostic testing 2 A diskette shipped with the IBM 4683 4684 point of sale terminal It contains code and files used for configuration of options and for hardware diagnostic testing register 1 A storage area in a co
413. structed filters all points addressable APA In computer graphics pertaining to the ability to address and display or not display each picture element pel on a display surface alphanumeric Pertaining to a character set containing letters digits and other characters such as punctuation marks alphanumeric point of sale ANPOS keyboard This keyboard consists of a section of alphanumeric keys a programmable set of point of sale keys a numeric keypad and system function keys alternate adapter In a personal computer that is used on a LAN and that supports installation of two network adapters the adapter that uses alternate not standard or default mapping between adapter shared RAM adapter ROM and designated computer memory segments The alternate adapter is usually designated as adapter 1 in configuration parameters Contrast with primary adapter Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary alternate file server A store controller that maintains image versions of all non system mirrored files and that can assume control if the configured file server becomes disabled alternate master store controller The store controller that can take control of the LAN if the configured master store controller becomes disabled It maintains image versions of both system mirrored and system compound files American National Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII The standard co
414. t send and remove files programs formats and procedures in a network of computers DMA Direct memory access DOS Disk Operating System double byte character set DBCS A set of characters in which each character is represented by 2 bytes Languages such as Japanese Chinese and Korean which contain more symbols than can be represented by 256 code points require double byte character sets Because each character requires 2 bytes the typing display and printing of DBCS characters requires hardware and programs that support DBCS Contrast with single byte character set down loop The position of a terminal or store controller on the store loop in relation to the direction of data flow on the store loop For example each terminal or store controller transmits loop data to the next terminal down loop from its position on the store loop and it receives loop data from the next terminal up loop from its position on the store loop See up loop driver Software component that controls a device DSX Distributed Systems Executive DTE Data terminal equipment dump 1 To write at a particular instant the contents of storage or part of storage onto another data medium for the purpose of safeguarding or debugging the data 2 Data that has been dumped E EAN European article number EIA Electronic Industries Association See EIA interface Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 8 Store Systems Techn
415. t 5 8 Data bit 6 i 9 Data bit 7 LO Acknowledge 11 Busy A 12 P End out of paper 13 Select 4 4 f 14 Auto feed 4 4 LS Error 4 4 16 Initialize printer 4 4 i 17 Select input 4 4 i 18 25 Ground Hwy Y Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 4 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Point of Sale I O Device Channel SIO CD Interface 1 1 4 5 Point of Sale I O Device Channel SIO CD Interface The POS I O device channel interface also known as the serial I O cash drawer SIO CD interface provides connectivity for the POS I O devices including cash drawers It also provides the ability to attach a Model 202 with associated I O up to 150m 492 ft This feature is integrated on the system board on all models and appears as installed in PS 2 option adapter slot 5 with POSID FFE2 This feature can be disabled Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 1 4 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Diskette Drive Interface 1 1 4 6 Diskette Drive Interface A diskette
416. t as opposed to programs procedures rules Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 10 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary and associated documentation HCP Host command processor header The portion of a message that contains control information for the message such as one or more destination fields name of the originating station input sequence number character string indicating the type of message and priority level for the message hertz Hz A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second Note In the United States line frequency is 60Hz or a change in voltage polarity 120 times per second in Europe line frequency is 50Hz or a change in voltage polarity 100 times per second host command processor HCP The SNA logical unit of the programmable Store System store controller host computer 1 The primary or controlling computer in a multi computer installation or network 2 In a network a processing unit in which resides a network access method Synonymous with host processor host processor 1 A processor that controls all or part of a user application network 2 In a network the processing unit in which resides the access method for the network 3 In an SNA network the processing unit that contains a system services control point SSCP 4 A processing unit that executes the access method for attached communication controllers 5 The processing unit required to create and maintain PSS 6
417. t contains the power supply and the interfaces BASIC Beginner s all purpose symbolic instruction code A programming language that uses common English words Basic Input Output System BIOS In IBM Personal Computers with PC I O channel architecture microcode that controls basic hardware operations such as interactions with diskette drives fixed disk drives and the keyboard baud The rate at which signal conditions are transmitted per second Contrast with bits per second bps BCD Binary coded decimal notation beacon 1 A frame sent by an adapter on a ring network indicating a serious ring problem such as a broken cable It contains the addresses of the beaconing station and its nearest active upstream neighbor NAUN 2 To send beacon frames continuously An adapter is beaconing if it is sending such a frame beaconing An error indicating function of token ring adapters that assists in locating a problem causing a hard error on a token ring network beaconing terminal A terminal that is not receiving the normal signal from the store loop Therefore it transmits a beacon message binary 1 Pertaining to a system of numbers to the base two the binary digits are 0 and 1 2 Pertaining to a selection choice or condition that has two possible different values or states binary coded decimal notation BCD A binary coded notation in which each of the decimal digits is represented by a binary numeral For examp
418. t maintain a Terminal Identification Chart or a store loop layout chart The chart must indicate The physical location of the 4683s on the loop The terminal number of each 4683 on the loop The physical order of the terminal numbers on the loop The direction of loop data flow on the loop The chart can be a picture of the store loop showing the store controller at the top of a circle and each 4683 placed around the circle The loop must be closed with the last 4683 down loop connected to the store controller Use an arrow to show the direction of data flow from the store controller through each 4683 and back to the store controller Starting at the store controller list the terminal number of the first point of sale terminal down loop from the store controller Continue until you complete the list with the last 4683 down loop from the store controller the 4683 with its down loop segment going directly back to the store controller The first step in isolating any store loop failure is to verify that the distance between active 4683s on the store loop does not exceed the maximum of 1220 m 4000 ft If too many 4683s are powered OFF the distance can exceed the maximum Exceeding 1220 m 4000 ft can result in permanent or intermittent store loop failures If the distance does not exceed 1220 m 4000 ft proceed with the following problem determination procedures Subtopics 6 2 9 1 When the Beaconing 4683 is the First 4683 on the St
419. t while waiting for a level 7 adapter system hardware interrupt status byte See i i topic 2 12 ARS RSS o e li 30 Device channel Timeout while waiting for a response adapter system from a request to acquire the shared status byte See buffer for a software POR request i topic 2 12 SE oases E 31 Device channel Timeout while waiting for a response adapter system from a software POR request status byte See i i topic 2 12 Posh ase A O O O O A ee 32 Device channel Timeout while waiting for a response adapter system from a request to acquire the shared status byte See buffer for a read EC level request topic 2 12 Sa aan ae a HSA RSs SSS a N an 33 Device channel Timeout while waiting for a response adapter system from a read EC level request status byte See i topic 2 12 a SSA aa Ha SpA o pS eS Ao Ropa ASS AS E 40 Device channel A level 7 interrupt was received with adapter interrupt unexpected status flag byte See i i topic 2 14 1 O E A Sl 80 Device channel A level 7 interrupt was received when adapter interrupt not expected flag byte See topic 2 14 1 See eee Ye ee SIA Ss A So ss stos 90 Device channel A level 7 interrupt was received when if 1 i adapter interrupt flag byte See 1 1 i i i not expected 1 i topic 2 14 1 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 11 3 2 Store Systems Technical Referen
420. te of a file that specifies to which store controllers it is distributed fixed disk drive In a personal computer system unit a disk storage device that reads and writes on rigid magnetic disks It is faster and has a larger storage capacity than a diskette and is permanently installed flag A character or indicator that signals the occurrence of some condition such as the setting of a switch or the end of a word formatted diskette A diskette on which track and sector control information has been written and that can be used by the computer to store data Note A diskette must be formatted before it can receive data frame 1 The unit of transmission in some LANs including the IBM Token Ring Network and the IBM PC Network It includes delimiters control characters information and checking characters On a token ring network a frame is created from a token when the token has data appended to it On a token bus network IBM PC Network all frames including the token frame contain a preamble start delimiter control address optional data and checking characters end delimiter and are followed by a minimum silence period 2 A housing for machine elements 3 In synchronous data link control SDLC the vehicle for every command every response and all information that is transmitted using SDLC procedures Each frame begins and ends with a flag frame check sequence FCS 1 A system of error checking performed at bo
421. tely specifies the result for any permissible combination of operands 2 A program step undertaken or executed by a computer 3 An action performed on one or more data items such as adding multiplying comparing or moving operator 1 A symbol that represents the action being performed in a mathematical operation 2 A person who operates a machine operator message A message from the operating system or a program telling the operator to perform a specific function or informing the operator of a specific condition within the system such as an error condition optical character recognition OCR The machine identification of printed characters through the use of light sensitive devices option 1 A specification in a statement a selection from a menu ora setting of a switch that may be used to influence the execution of a program 2 A hardware or software function that may be selected or enabled as part of a configuration process 3 A piece of hardware such as a network adapter that can be installed in a device to modify or enhance device function option adapter In IBM point of sale terminals an optional feature or logic card that provides functions in addition to those which are standard original equipment manufacturer OEM A manufacturer of equipment that may be marketed by another manufacturer OS Operating system OS 2 Operating System 2 OSI open systems interconnect output device A dev
422. ter for Danmark findes i bogen 4683 4684 POST nr 6511 2111 Suomenkieliset turvaohjeet ovat kirjasessa GB11 7352 Les notices de s curit traduites se trouvent dans la brochure GA11 0734 pour la France Die Sicherheitshinweise befinden sich im Handelssystem IBM 4680 IBM 4684 Sicherheitshinweise Teilenummer 25F6466 Gli avvisi di sicurezza tradotti si trovano nel manuale di sicurezza codice GA13 1531 Du finner oversatte sikkerhetsmeldinger i h ndboken 4683 4684 Kassaterminal Sikkerhetsinformasjon GA15 4011 Poder encontrar as indicac es de seguranca traduzidas no manual de indicac es de seguran a do seu pais GS88 0012 Puede encontrar las notas de seguridad traducidas en el manual de notas de seguridad de su pais GA10 8943 Svenska vers ttningar av varningstexterna finns i handboken S kerhetsf reskrifter GA14 2676 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 FRONT_1 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Preface PREFACE Preface This manual is designed for service support personnel to use as a source of technical reference information about the IBM 4693 Point of Sale Terminals IBM 4684 Point of Sale Terminals IBM 4683 Point of Sale Terminals Point of Sale Terminal 1 0 Devices Store Loop Wiring and Theory of Operation Cable Diagrams Note This manual is not intended to be used as an entry point for problem determination or general repair procedure information Problem determination should begin in the
423. ter motor J103 15 Polarization key signal i i J103 5 Cutter motor J103 16 unused signal i J103 6 Cutter motor J103 17 5 V de i signal i 4 4 4 J103 7 CR motor signal J103 18 5 V de return 4 4 4 4 J103 8 CR motor signal J103 19 CR low sensor 4 4 4 4 f J103 9 CR motor signal J103 20 Polarization key 4 4 4 4 J103 10 CR motor signal J103 21 Journal low sensor 4 4 4 4 f J103 11 Journal motor J103 22 Journal motion signal sensor 4 4 4 4 J103 12 Journal motor J103 23 DI top sensor i signal 4 4 4 4 J103 13 Journal motor J103 24 DI front sensor signal 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 4 13 1 Store Systems Technical Reference
424. ters installed in the option adapter slots If two token ring adapters are installed only one of the adapters can have RIPL ROM 4684 200 O The 4684 200 model is featured at time of order with or without baseband LAN including RIPL ROM integrated on the system planar board O The 4684 200 model cannot have a baseband LAN adapter installed in an option adapter slot O The 4684 200 model can have one or two token ring adapters nstalled in the option adapter slots H If two token ring adapters are installed only one of the adapters can have RIPL ROM 4684 300 O 4684 300 model is featured at time of order with or without either one of the following optional system planar side card options Baseband LAN including RIPL ROM side card a Token ring including RIPL ROM side card O The 4684 300 model that does not have a baseband LAN side card can have one baseband LAN adapter including RIPL ROM installed in an option adapter slot O The 4684 300 model can have one or two token ring adapters installed in the option adapter slots If two token ring adapters are installed only one of the adapters can have RIPL ROM The 4684 supports only one baseband LAN adapter Ls Integrated on the system planar board Installed in an option adapter slot model 300 only 3 Installed with a system planar side card Model 300 only N The 4684 supports up to two token ring adapters 1 Installed in option adapter
425. ters on existing models should be attached using the RS 232C ports Models 541 421 and 321 support the PS 2 option adapters and features listed in Table 15 These devices have been tested to function as intended in the hardware and can be installed and maintained with IBM procedures using 4693 devices particularly non PS 2 keyboards and displays unless otherwise stated These models also can use numerous other IBM and non IBM PS 2 adapters However these other adapters may require the use of a PS 2 like keyboard and compatible video display unit Auto configuration support is provided for a core set of microchannel adapter cards There is no need to use option diskettes or manual input during the configuration process which is a significant usability enhancement over standard PS 2 or competitive products Refer to Table 15 for the supported list of adapters All other adapters require the use of the reference diskette configuration utilities to provide complete configuration using normal PS 2 procedures The reference diskette is required to change the defaults provided by auto configuration such as memory map usage or interrupt selection Table 15 PS 2 Adapter Auto Configuration Support pe Seo teta to ai eee eo eo Se ee PS 2 Adapter name POS ID pee A n Pi eae POS I O device channel FFE2 4 f 4684 Store Loop EEBF i 4 4 Token Ring 4 MB E000 4
426. th the sending and receiving station after a block check character has been accumulated 2 A numeric value derived from the bits in a message that checks for any bit errors in transmission 3 A redundancy check in which the check key is generated by a cyclic algorithm Synonymous with cyclic redundancy check CRC frequency The rate of signal oscillation expressed in hertz cycles per second function 1 A specific purpose of an entity or its characteristic action 2 A subroutine that returns the value of a single variable 3 In data communications a machine action such as a carriage return or line feed function key A key on a terminal such as an ENTER key that causes the transmission of a signal not associated with a character that can be printed or displayed Detection of the signal usually causes the system to perform some predefined action for the operator or determined by the application program IG group 1 A set of related records that have the same value for a particular field in all records 2 A collection of users who can share access authorities for protected resources 3 A list of names that are known together by a single name group address In a LAN a locally administered address assigned to two or more adapters to allow the adapters to copy the same frame Contrast locally administered address with universally administered address HY hardware Physical equipmen
427. the LAN 8 1 2 Master Store Controller on the LAN Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference File Server Store Controller on the LAN 8 1 1 File Server Store Controller on the LAN If the file server becomes permanently disabled there is a possibility that data can be lost Examples of the data that can be lost are Any information in the spool file of the failing file server that has not been copied to the alternate file server Any information in the I O buffers of the failing file server When the configured file server is brought back up after being down the following steps should be taken Note If one store controller is both the master and the file server steps 1 and 2 of Master Store Controller on the LAN in topic 8 1 2 should be done before starting here If this is the case you may not have to be concerned with stopping and starting background applications 1 If the alternate file server has been activated as acting file server a Stop any background applications that should be running only on the file server b Deactivate the alternate acting file server 2 Activate the configured file server as acting file server Between the deactivation and activation of the file server there is a time when there is no file server During this time no updates can be made to application mirrored files Bie Start any necessary background applications on the Acting file server Note If Auto Resu
428. the first 4683 s loop receiver Then a twisted pair cable connects the loop transmitter in each successive 4683 to the loop receiver in the next 4683 Finally a twisted pair cable returns from the last 4683 s loop transmitter to the store controller s receiver to complete the loop See Figure 20 in topic 6 2 3 Up to sixty four 4683s can be connected to one store loop Note System performance can be affected based on transaction rate Systems using a single store controller are limited to a single loop Loops generally use two twisted pairs in a single jacket with a connection similar to the one shown in Figure 21 in topic 6 2 3 No remote loops are supplied with this system Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Store Loop Hardware 6 2 2 Store Loop Hardware The 4680 Store System store loop is made up of the following hardware store controller with one or two store loop adapters store controller store loop attachment cables store loop adapter in each point of sale terminal store loop attachment cable for each point of sale terminal shorting plug 1B for each store loop attachment cable Store loop wiring including the receptacles for plugging into the store loop DDPPPEDP A store loop in a 4680 Store System is configured with a store controller managing a communications line to which terminals are connected Point of sale terminals are connected in series to form a loop with the store con
429. the fixed disk system partition you can load them from backup copies of the system diskettes These backup diskettes were created when the terminal is installed 1 Use the store procedures to stop any application programs that are running 2 Switch Ready mode OFF at the 4693 terminal The Ready indicator will be OFF 3 Press the Reset switch to disable storage retention Indicators 1 and 2 will remain ON 4 Insert the reference diskette in the diskette drive 5 Switch Ready mode ON The Ready indicator will be ON 6 Follow the displayed instructions O If an error code is displayed before the main menu appears see Messages in 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Hardware Service Manual O If you have an audible or visible symptom see Symptoms in 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Hardware Service Manual PICTURE 9 Figure 10 4693 Operator Panel Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 6 1 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Flow of 4693 System Programs Menus 2 6 2 Flow of 4693 System Programs Menus PICTURE 10 Notes 1 The contents of these menus will vary with the models and with the features installed on the terminal 2 MENU TEST 7 appears only if a model xx2 satellite terminal is attached to the 4693 terminal Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 6 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Test Procedure 2 6 3 Test Procedure As Load the system programs See Loading the System Programs in topic 26 21 2 Wh
430. the primary keyboard and primary display assignments are selected automatically and the changes you made are lost Normally the primary display is assigned as follows lst choice The video display attached to the system unit video display socket 2nd choice The display attached to socket 4A 3rd choice The display attached to socket 4B 9A or 9B Normally the primary keyboard is assigned as follows Ist choice The enhanced A N or ANPOS keyboard attached to socket 1 2nd choice The keyboard attached to socket 5A 3rd choice The keyboard attached to socket 5B Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 3 51 Store Systems Technical Reference 4684 and 4683 Point of Sale Configuration Record 5 3 4 4684 and 4683 Point of Sale Configuration Record Subtopics aaa a y ud WWW uy 4 Be A A Oe WN 1 The Configuration Record Create Change Configuration Activate New Configuration Backup Configuration Restore Configuration Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 3 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference The Configuration Record 5 3 4 1 The Configuration Record As part of the configuration process the 4684 terminal creates a record that identifies each attached device and the sockets that are used If you also have a 4683 terminal the configuration process creates a similar record for that terminal Both configuration records are stored in the 4684 terminal nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM Nonvolatile RAM is also used to sto
431. the store controller or an open store loop up loop from the 4683 displaying U003 u004 A 4683 that is displaying message U004 has received store loop polls and has sent a load request message to the store controller but has not yet received a response to the load request U004 can be caused by no response from the store controller or an open store loop down loop from the 4683 displaying U004 U0O5 A 4683 that is displaying message U005 has received a response from the store controller and is in the process of receiving a program load Note The position of a 4683 on the store loop determines which offline condition exists at that 4683 The location of the loop problem in the store loop determines which error messages are displayed at the store controller If a failure is detected when a 4683 runs its store loop adapter wrap The 4683 removes itself from the store loop and goes offline O The keyboard Message Pending light comes ON O Message W002 is placed in the message queue Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 8 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Store Loop Error Conditions and Error Messages If a failure is detected when the store controller runs its store loop adapter wrap test The store controller removes itself from the store loop Message W763 is logged in the system message log The 4683s go offline and issue a backup request Note A 4683 is considered active if it is attached to the store loop has its power ON and
432. the store loop If a 4683 has neither a message nor a response to a message it does not respond to the poll When the store controller transmits a message to a 4683 an acknowledgment of that message is required The acknowledgment is not transmitted until the 4683 receives a poll If the store controller does not receive an acknowledgment within a certain period of time the message is retransmitted to the 4683 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 6 2 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference End of Poll Timeouts 6 2 5 End of Poll Timeouts An end of poll EOP character is transmitted with every poll The store controller expects to receive the EOP character that is transmitted with each poll If the EOP is not received the store controller retries If an EOP character is received the store controller resumes normal operation If retries fail the store controller then runs a wrap test on its own store loop adapter If the store controller store loop adapter wrap test fails the store controller loop relay drops When the loop relay drops store loop continuity is maintained and the store controller is removed from the store loop When the store controller is removed from the store loop the 4683s detect the absence of polls and they start to beacon When a 4683 receives its own beacon this is confirmation that the store loop is intact and the 4683 transmits a backup request The 4683 continues to transmit the backup request until it rec
433. ting System has functions other than those that support the sales environment Access to these additional functions is through the command mode You can select command mode from the SYSTEM MAIN MENU While in this mode it is possible to receive error messages These error messages are also called SHELL messages The HELPLVL parameter for the DEFINE command lets you specify how much online information is displayed with the error message If you are a beginning user you can set the help level so the message contains detailed information to resolve the condition If you are a more experienced user you can set the help level to provide a briefer message Examples of the levels of help for a message are i Displays the command mode function the error source module and the return code 1 i i Identifies the command and type of error in one sentence An example of a level 2 error message is COPY Write error Expands on the level 2 message and includes more specific information An example of a level 3 error message is COPY An error occurred writing report txt on A Expands on the level 3 message and often suggests a possible solution An example of a level 3 error message is COPY An error occurred writing report txt on A Disk A is full You can erase unnecessary files to free up space See the IBM 4680 Store System User s Guide for selecting the level of help for error messages that occur in command mode
434. tion capable 4 4 3 upper left not present s 4 4 4 4 upper right not present 4 4 5 integrated on system integrated on system POS 1 0 device board board channel Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 3 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference PS 2 I O Support 1 4 PS 2 I O Support Keyboards PS 2 101 key 102 key enhanced alphanumeric keyboard Video Displays The 4690 229mm 9 inch color or monochrome CRT can be installed on the terminal using a mounting system to integrate with the terminal All other displays must be used in a distributed configuration Displays may be distributed up to 2 7 m 9 ft from the system unit A switched convenience outlet is provided for attaching the video displays The video displays supported include O 229mm 9 inch color display integrated or distributed O 229mm 9 inch monochrome display integrated or distributed The 229mm 9 inch monochrome display does not meet ANSI Standards German Workplace Law requirements in 25x80 text mode or ISO requirements Copyright IBM Corp 1993 1 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference POS I O Support 1 5 POS I O Support All 4693 system units provide support for attachment of devices that communicate using the R
435. tion is to be sent destination address A field in the medium access control MAC frame that identifies the physical location to which information is to be sent Contrast with source address device 1 A mechanical electrical or electronic contrivance with a specific purpose 2 An input output unit such as a terminal display or printer See also attaching device device address 1 The first subchannel address recognized by a channel attached device 2 In data communication the identification of any device to which data can be sent or from which data can be received device channel In IBM Point of Sale terminals a path along which signals for serial input output devices can be sent For these terminals the device channel controller or adapter is contained on the system board diagnostic diskette A diskette containing diagnostic modules or tests used by computer users and service personnel to diagnose hardware problems Copyright IBM Corp 1993 GLOSSARY 7 Store Systems Technical Reference Glossary diagnostics Modules or tests used by computer users and service personnel to diagnose hardware problems digital 1 Pertaining to data in the form of digits Contrast with analog 2 Pertaining to data consisting of numerical values or discrete units direct access storage device DASD A device in which access time is effectively independent of the location of the data direct memory access DMA A procedure
436. tions before the main power was lost Memory parity error was detected The PPC hardware failed to keep memory refreshed when the main power was off POST Resume completed successfully Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 000F PPC Hardware Status Byte 2 16 3 000F PPC Hardware Status Byte The PPC hardware status byte is 1 byte of hex data When byte OOOEH OOH or 03H Bits 7 0 0 When byte OOOEH 04H Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit OrRPNWHB OO x x bere When byte Bits 7 0 When byte Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit OPNOMsgqnu J PRPRPRPEP eM KF Mode Control switch turns power on Ring Detect at serial port 2 turns power on Ring Detect at serial port 1 turns power on RTC alarm turns power on Memory contents are bad O00EH 05H O00EH 06H Mode Control switch turns power on Ring detect 2 turned power on Ring detect 1 turned power on RTC alarm turned power on Memory contents bad When byte OOOEH 07H or AOH Bits 7 0 0 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 16 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference 0010 007F Master Terminal SIO Configuration Data 2 16 4 0010 007F Master Terminal SIO Configuration Data Subtopics 2 16 4 1 Keyboard Devices 2 16 4 2 Display Devices 2 16 4 3 Printer Devices 2 16 4 4 Readers and Scanning Devices 2 16 4 5 Monetary Devices 2 16 4 6 External Devices 2 16 4 7 Reserved
437. tition or to a diskette configuration to a 4693 terminal Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 4 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Set and View SCSI Device Configuration 2 4 6 Set and View SCSI Device Configuration This function allows the user to display the SCSI ID for each installed SCSI device The ID appears in a set of two numbers separated by a comma The first number is the assigned ID All fixed disks for the 4693 are shipped preset to SCSI ID Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 4 6 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Utility Programs Summary 2 5 Utility Programs Summary There are several utility programs available on the reference diskette Some are only available when a video display and an enhanced A N keyboard console are attached This is known as a video console Also some of the utilities that deal specifically with the fixed disk and diskette drive are only available when running on a Model 541 that has a fixed disk The utility programs are Backup and restore system programs Copy option diskette Set time and date Set password Set keyboard rate Display revision level Update system programs Set startup sequence Display memory map Display NVRAM error log Enter Print vital product data Subtopics 5 1 Backup and Restore System Programs Model 541 Copy Option Diskette Set Time and Date Set Password Set Keyboard Rate Display Revision Level Update System Programs Model 541 only Set Star
438. tive if it has a terminal number is powered ON and attached to the store loop Disconnect this 4683 from the store loop by unplugging its store loop cable from the store loop receptacle See Figure 30 in topic 7 1 Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did message W761 display From steps 026 and 029 Reconnect the 4683 xx1 to the store loop and continue at Step 022 Yes No i i i i i 1014 i 1 i Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 7 2 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0150 W764 Message Is the store loop cable plugged into socket 1 on this 4683 xx1 base unit Yes No i i 1016 Correct the problem by plugging the cable into socket 1 1 i 1 i Unplug the store loop cable from socket 1 on this 4683 xx1 base unit Attach shorting plug 1B to the 4683 end of the cable See Figure 29 in TOPIE aLi Plug the other end of the cable into the store loop receptacle Return to the active store controller and display the system message by pressing System Request and then pressing the M key Did the active store controller display message W760 or W764 Yes No i i 1018 Return to the 4683 xx1 and switch POWER OFF Service the 4683 base unit 1 i 3 i Return to the 4683 xxl and examine its store loop receptacle for damage Is the store loop receptacle
439. to the diskette If you are going to copy a system log report to the problem analysis diskette you must first write the system log report to a file See step 7 of Requesting a System Log Report in topic 9 4 This is necessary for any of the REPORTs listed on the screen A each do A Anejo emia a a lena Shc EE Mae may AAN Nek Le dea Da E EE ARANA EA A EN A EA i CREATE PROBLEM ANALYSIS DISKETTE 1 i Type an X by the item s you wish to be copied 1 i MODIFICATION STATUS l DATE i SYSTEM LOG REPORT TERMINAL DUMP CONTROLLER DUMP SYSTEM TRACE REPORT PERFORMANCE REPORT MODULE LEVEL REPORT 1 i Type the desired diskette selection i DESTINATION 1 1 DISKETTE DRIVE A 2 DISKETTE DRIVE B 1 i Insert a formatted diskette into the selected drive To continue press ENTER i i i Message line FIHELP F2 F3QUIT F4 FS F6 ET F8 F9 F10 i Status line i A E AE E E EE S E A E E E A When the display indicates that diskette creation is complete press F3 twice to return to the SYSTEM MAIN MENU Remove the diskette from the drive label it and give it to the person responsible for problem analysis diskettes help desk personnel store programmer or the IBM Support Center for Software Assistance Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 5 2 Store Systems Technical Reference Requesting Store Controller Status 9 6 Requesting Store Controller Status 1 Press System Request on
440. to the next 4683 down loop This continues with each 4683 receiving data from the 4683 immediately up loop from its position and passing it on to the next 4683 down loop The last 4683 down loop passes the data back to the store controller PICTURE 20 Figure 24 Store Loop with an Open Condition PICTURE 21 Figure 25 Store Loop with the Primary Store Controller Offline PICTURE 22 Figure 26 Store Loop with an Open Condition PICTURE 23 Figure 27 Store Loop with a Failing Point of Sale Terminal PICTURE 24 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Store Loop MAPs Figure 28 Typical Store Loop Receptacles PICTURE 25 Figure 29 4683 xx1 Store Loop Cable 1 and Shorting Plug 1B PICTURE 26 Figure 30 Store Controller Store Loop Adapter and Store Loop Receptacle Copyright IBM Corp 1993 71 2 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0100 W001 Message 7 2 MAP 0100 W001 Message i The 4683 is not 1 O The store loop is open up loop from the receiving store loop 4683 displaying message W001 communications 1 O A 4683 xx1 is failing up loop O The 4683 xxl store loop cable is The 4683 is not failing beaconing because it 1 O The 4683 base unit is failing does not have a terminal U The primary store controller is number failing fe El The backup store controller is failing The 4683 keyboard po The distance exceeds 4000 feet 1220 OFFLINE light
441. to the store controller The store controller then transmits the system code to the point of sale terminal In a 4680 Store System the 4683 xx2 gets its IPL from its partner 4683 xx1 or 4684 For other applications the 4683 xx2 gets its IPL from its controlling device Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 15 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Power On Self Test for the Point of Sale Terminal 5 6 16 Power On Self Test for the Point of Sale Terminal The point of sale terminals have tests that run automatically each time power is switched ON at the base unit Note When power is switched OFF at the 4683 xxl or 4684 operation is halted at an attached 4683 xx2 These tests are located in the point of sale terminal read only storage ROS and they test the following Cash drawer attachment logic Device channel Display logic Keyboard logic Processor logic 4683 xx1 or 4684 only Read only storage 4683 xx1 or 4684 only Storage 4683 xx1 or 4684 only Store loop channel 4683 xx1 or 4684 only Timer 4683 xx1 or 4684 only Totals storage Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 6 16 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Remote IPL RIPL for Token Ring and Baseband LAN 5 7 Remote IPL RIPL for Token Ring and Baseband LAN RIPL Support for token ring and baseband LAN on a 4684 Model 1xx 200 300 RIPL support can be enabled by following the procedures outlined here Note Enhanced Keyboard cannot support the RIPL function wit
442. torage Dump Requesting a Storage Dump Report Requesting a System Log Report Creating a 4680 Problem Analysis Diskette Requesting Store Controller Status Problem Data Collection Form NO O O 10 O WO O JO 04 uN Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 0 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Requesting a Store Controller Storage Dump 9 1 Requesting a Store Controller Storage Dump Subtopics 9 1 1 IBM Personal Computer AT or PS 2 Storage Dump 9 1 2 4684 Point of Sale Terminal Storage Dump Copyright IBM Corp 1993 9 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference IBM Personal Computer AT or PS 2 Storage Dump 9 1 1 IBM Personal Computer AT or PS 2 Storage Dump Warning This procedure stops store operations The storage dump occurs and the store controller IPLs 1 Press a dump switch on the Personal Computer AT or PS 2 See Figure 33 Message W507 displays If two store loop adapters are installed you can press either dump switch They both do the same thing 2 Wait for the dump to finish approximately two minutes Message W507 disappears and the store controller IPLs 3 When the dump is complete notify the store programmer Note Figure 33 shows the store loop adapters installed in the Personal Computer AT The dump switch is in the same location on the store loop adapters in the PS 2 The store loop adapters can be installed in any expansion slot in the Personal Computer AT or PS 2 This figure shows them installed in slots 1 and 2
443. tore loop and the primary store controller requested control of the store loop The backup store controller always honors this request The backup store controller while monitoring the activity on the store loop is not receiving polls or beacons from 4683s up loop It is beaconing and receiving its own beacon This means there is no active primary store controller and there are no 4683s on the store loop Figure 31 is a diagram of 4683s and two store controllers connected to a store loop to provide store controller backup PICTURE NOTES T m Cc SE ad Figure PICTURE Figure 27 his illustration represents a typical store loop ay not be wired like this ontroller is similar he 4683 P can also be a 4683 001 or 4683 A01l he store controller transmits data to the first 4683 down loop on the store loop he data and passes it to the next 4683 down loop he 4683 immediately up loop from its position he last 4683 down loop passes the data back to the store controller 31 Store Loop with Backup Store Controller 28 32 Examples of Configurations for Store Controller Backup Copyright IBM Corp 1993 8 2 1 1 using the IBM Loop Wiring Concentrator Your stor but the position of your 4683s on the loop and their relationship to the The 4683 002 can also be a 4683 A02 This 4683 receive This continues with each 4683 receiving data fron and passing it on to the next 4683 down loop Store Systems Techn
444. transmit and receive circuits that connect to the device channel are transceivers The driver is switched to transmit or set to a high impedance condition when the unit is not transmitting The receiver is always enabled passing to the unit its own transmitted data and any received data Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 10 2 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device Channel Byte Format 5 10 3 Device Channel Byte Format The device Channel message frames are made up of twelve bit characters The meaning of these bits is as follows Bit 1 Start bit zero Bits 2 to 9 Data bits 0 to 7 Bit 10 Address bit one framing byte Address bit zero non framing byte Bits 11 and 12 Stop bits one Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 10 3 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Device Channel Message Format 5 10 4 Device Channel Message Format The message format for device channel frames are defined as follows O Frames transmitted to the devices Message Frame Address Control Data CRC CRC Flag Response Frame Address Control CRC CRC Flagl Poll Frame 24 one bits Address 24 one bits Address O Frames transmitted from the devices Message Frame Address Control Data CRC CRC Flag Response Frame Address Control CRC CRC Flagl Poll Response no data or status to transmit EOP The flag character acts as the ending delimiter for message and response frames The address character sends the frame to the correct device or identifies the de
445. troller The store loop is totally contained within a store The distance between powered ON point of sale terminals on the store loop should not exceed 1220 m 4000 ft A point of sale terminal is attached to the store loop with store loop attachment cable 1 A 4683 xxl attaches directly to the store loop A 4683 xx2 attaches to a partner 4683 xx1 or 4684 It is not attached to the store loop A 4683 xx2 displays the store loop status of its partner 4683 xx1 or 4684 The store loop receptacles and the connectors that attach to the receptacles are self shorting This means that when a store loop attachment cable is disconnected from a receptacle the transmit and receive contacts in the receptacle automatically connect together to maintain the continuity of the store loop The same contacts in the store loop attachment cable connector connect together when the connector is disconnected from a receptacle The transmit and receive contacts connecting together causes the point of sale terminal transmit data to be wrapped back so the terminal receives the same data that it transmits Shorting plug 1B is attached to the point of sale terminal store loop attachment cable 1 It is designed to be used at the terminal end of its store loop attachment cable 1 This allows store loop continuity to be maintained when the store loop attachment cable is disconnected from socket 1 on the point of sale terminal base unit Copyright IBM Corp 1993
446. troller go to the Hardware Service Manual for your store controller and check for power on self test error messages Copyright IBM Corp 1993 7 6 3 Store Systems Technical Reference MAP 0150 W764 Message 7 7 MAP 0150 W764 Message he store loop is open down loop from he last active 4683 xxl n inactive 4683 xx1 is failing own loop from the last active 683 xx1 he store loop cable is failing on the ast active 4683 xxl i The active store i 1 i 1 l 1 i 1 l 1 i i he base unit is failing on the last 1 i i i r i i i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i controller is transmitting store loop polls but it is not receiving end of polls or beacons ctive 4683 xxl he store loop cable is failing on the ctive store controller he active store controller is failing he distance exceeds 4000 feet 1220 meters between the last active 4683 xx1 and the active store controller HHOHMHrPH BAP AH PO 1001 To display the terminal number press Sl type 7 and press 8S2 To display messages at a point of sale terminal when the keyboard OFFLINE light is ON press Sl type 2 and press 8S2 Note On the ANPOS Keyboard during some procedures and on the Enhanced Alphanumeric Keyboard Esc Sl and Enter S2 To display a system message at the store controller sign on at the store controller press System Request and then press the M key Warning Switching POWER OFF at a 4
447. trols and Indicators for Models 541 421 and 321 When the keylock is in the locked position diskette media slot which prevents insertion or removal of media a flag is extended across the The This prevents access to the interior and provides security to data on the fixed disk drive o T o c Indicatc E O O O O O O O O O O O Table 12 Indicator Matrix E O O O O O O O O O O O O O i i System i i Main i Board i j Power Ready Good State AC Converter Indicator Indicator fs eae ee ee fa ROSS hi i Date aon ace gla PORRA SS ON Present ON ON ON Fully Operational hee soe a Ses Fa q gt Si Hosp 2 es POWER DOWN Absent OFF OFF OFF Mem Ret disabled battery power absent i i HSS E SS SSeS FS 2 52 ta SS SaaS Ho Sasa ABS SSeS INTERLOCK SHUTDOWN Absent or ON ON OFF Interlock or battery Present i absent i i SO SR A jas tapes es Ps ps aa PASSE SSS OFF Present OFF OFF ON Mem retention disabled i ein aid PSS HRS ho i a ala Hr as BACKUP Absent OFF OFF OFF Mem Retention Enabled battery l i power present i Po a SOS ee a a ia LS RR RS a E STANDBY Present OFF OFF ON Mem Retention Enabled PS SS SPS SSeS aes Has PE San ABSCESS Skee Overtemperature Present OFF OFF OFF ia a RA A aos oe wi ai nie Fosas Overcurrent P
448. tup Sequence Model 541 only 9 Display Memory Map Video Console only 10 Display NVRAM Error Log 11 Enter Print Vital Product Data NNNNNNNNNDN DH daa aa a a a A J004s wn Copyright IBM Corp 1993 25 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Backup and Restore System Programs Model 541 2 5 1 Backup and Restore System Programs Model 541 The backup function of this utility copies the system programs from the system partition to diskettes Backup copies of the original system diskettes are created using this utility The restore function copies all system programs from the system diskettes to the fixed disk system partition Since it erases any option files that have been added to the system partition since the last restore you may have to copy the option diskettes to the system partition See Update System Programs Model 541 only in topic 2 5 7 Restore creates a system partition if none is present when this utility is started from a reference diskette Note The 4693 has two fixed disk drive slots If only one drive is installed it must be located in the left slot and contains the system partition If two drives are present the one on the left side is always considered the first fixed disk drive and contains the system partition Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2 5 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Copy Option Diskette 2 5 2 Copy Option Diskette This utility is used to copy option files for an optional adapter
449. ultiple services including but not limited to voice and data interaction A basic unit used to record system activity consisting of the acceptance of a line of terminal input processing of the line anda response if any interface 1 A shared boundary between two functional units defined by functional characteristics common physical interconnection characteristics signal characteristics and other characteristics as appropriate 2 A shared boundary An interface may be a hardware component to link two devices or a portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more computer programs 3 Hardware software or both that links systems programs or devices interference 1 The prevention of clear reception of broadcast signals 2 The distorted portion of a received signal International Organization for Standardization ISO An organization of national standards bodies from various countries established to promote development of standards to facilitate international exchange of goods and services and develop cooperation in intellectual scientific technological and economic activity interpretive routine A routine that decodes instructions written as pseudocodes and immediately executes the instructions Contrast with compile interrupt 1 A suspension of a process such as execution of a computer program caused by an external event and performed in such a way that the process can be resumed 2 To stop a pr
450. un You must ACTIVATE NEW CONFIGURATION after you ADD the device to make the change effective Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 4 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Restrictions When Connecting Displays 5 4 5 Restrictions When Connecting Displays There are a few restrictions and limitations to be aware of when connecting or configuring displays to the 4684 or 4683 If these restrictions and limitations are not observed unpredictable problems may occur O If you socket 9B O If you and the O If you and the O f you connect O If you have TWO alphanumeric A N displays one must be connected to 4A and the other to ONE of the following sockets 4B 9A or have TWO operator displays one must be connected to socket 4A other to ONE of the following sockets 4B 9A or 9B have TWO shopper displays one must be connected to socket 4A other to ONE of the following sockets 4B 9A or 9B have a combined keyboard display connected to socket 5A DO NOT an operator display to socket 4A have a combined keyboard display connected to socket 5B DO NOT connect an operator display to socket 4B 9A or 9B Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 4 5 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Backing Up the Configuration 5 4 6 Backing Up the Configuration To start configuration begin at Preparing to Run Configuration in topic 5 4 des Select START CONFIGURATION from MENU M1 Lis Select BACKUP CONFIGURATION from MENU
451. us transmission of data to more than one destination BSC Binary synchronous communication buffer 1 A portion of storage used to hold input or output data temporarily 2 A routine or storage used to compensate for a difference in data rate or time of occurrence of events when transferring data from one device to another bus 1 In a processor a physical facility on which data is transferred to all destinations but from which only addressed destinations may read in accordance with appropriate conventions 2 A network configuration in which nodes are interconnected through a bidirectional transmission medium 3 One or more conductors used for transmitting signals or power byte 1 A string that consists of a number of bits treated as a unit and representing a character 2 A binary character operated upon as a unit and usually shorter than a computer word 3 A string that consists of a particular number of bits usually 8 that is treated as a unit and that represents a character 4 A group of 8 adjacent binary digits that represent one extended binary coded decimal interchange code EBCDIC See n bit byte 1 C A high level programming language designed to optimize run time size and efficiency CMOS Complementary metal oxide semiconductor complementary metal oxide semiconductor CMOS A technology that combines the electrical properties of n type semiconductors and p type semiconductors
452. ve 4 A Bit 1 1 Shared buffer access is complete Read Write 0 Shared buffer return is complete poso lees Possess os es see eset ee ee ee eS Bit 0 1 Requested shared buffer access Read Write 0 Shared buffer return is complete 4 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 8 7 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Shared Buffer Request Byte 5 8 8 Shared Buffer Request Byte The following table describes the bits of the Shared Buffer Request Bytes This byte is updated by the system unit microprocessor after each access of the message buffer A y Table 50 Shared Buffer Request Byte Pes ee Ses ees ese see eee ese ee ee ee ee ee Bit Definition 4 4 MBIC oh 1 Diagnostic self test request 4 4 Bit 6 1 Read and process the Timer Function bytes 4 4 Bit 5 1 Read the device channel function command byte 4 4 Bit 4 1 Process the Transmit Message s held in the shared i j buffer O WBIC T3 1 New poll list Bie 2 1 Device channel internal storage dump request 4
453. vice from which a frame is received The address byte in other than a poll has the high order bit bit 9 set to zero The control character gives a method of defining the type of frame being transmitted or received data response or control The terminal and the devices each have a frame check sequence FCS that is two cyclic redundancy check CRC characters at the end of each frame to check the validity of the frame A check is also made to ensure that no characters between the starting delimiter and the ending delimiter have the address bit bit 10 set to 1 one Subtopics 5 10 4 1 Addressing 5 10 4 2 Polling Copyright IBM Corp 1993 5 10 4 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Addressing 5 10 4 1 Addressing Messages transmitted by I O devices always flow from the device to the 4683 xxl The address character in these messages identifies which device originated the message Messages originating at the 4683 xxl are sent to a specific device by using that device address as the leading delimiter in the frame The following types of addresses are placed in a message only by the 4683 xxl A broadcast address sends a message to all devices regardless of device type that are connected to the device channel rather than to a specific device A message can be broadcast to all the devices attached to a 4683 xxl or to all the devices attached to a 4683 002 but not to both groups at the same time A port address is used by the
454. wer is completely removed Assuming that the NMI vector has not been modified the PPC NMI routine gains control of the system Note The application should set the power on events before using this function If no power on events are previously set the system resumes only when the Mode Control switch is pressed and AC power is present Copyright IBM Corp 1993 4 6 1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference AL 22h Set the Power On Event 4 6 1 2 AL 22h Set the Power On Event This function sets up a future event for automatically turning the 4693 power on These power on events remain in effect until changed by the application or AC and battery power is lost On entry the power on events are defined in register BL Bit 7 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 3 Ring detect 2 Bit 2 Ring detect 1 Bit 1 Clock alarm Bit 0 Reserved Setting the appropriate bit enables the corresponding power on event Multiple bits may be set in register BL for any combination of power on events If no bits are set in register BL the system powers on when the Mode Control switch is pressed The Mode Control switch is always enabled as a power on event Note The 4693 does not switch to ready mode power on if AC power is not present On entry if the clock alarm event is selected as a power on event the following alarm registers must be loaded with the alarm time CH Hour Hour is in 24 hour BCD for
455. with IBM Corp Copyright IBM Corp 1993 EDITION 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Table of Contents CONTENTS Table of Contents COVER Book Cover NOTICES Notices EDITION Edition Notice CONTENTS Table of Contents FRONT_1 Notices FRONT_1 Trademarks and Service Marks FRONT_1 Electronic Emission Notices FRONT_1 Laser Product Identification FRONT_1 Information about Translated Safety Notices PREFACE Preface PREFACE Store System Libraries PREFACE Store System Related Publications Software PREFACE Store System Related Publications Hardware PREFACE 3 1 General Publications X0 Topic 1 4693 General Description E General Description of the 4693 Point of Sale Terminals Available Models Features Memory Subsystem Features Port Interface and Storage Devices Power Subsystem Features Internal System Loads Controls and Indicators for Models 541 421 and 321 Security Features Model 202 System Unit Description Implementation Overview Subsystem Features Internal System Loads Controls and Indicators for Model 202 PS 2 Option Adapter Support til Feature Slot Assignment PS 2 I O Support POS I O Support Operating System Software Compatibility Y Model 541 F Models 421 and 321 Topic 2 4693 Configuration Tests and Utilities Introduction Reference Diagnostic and Support Diskettes 2 System Partition 3 IML Image 4 Keyboard Differences 4690 Store Loop Remote Initial Program Load RIPL Test Programs Summary Configuration
456. work Cable and Data Connector PS 2 Cable to Data Connector PS 2 Baseband to 4684 Baseband Connector 4684 Baseband Network Wrap Plug 4684 Baseband Network Terminator Plug X 25 Interface Co Processor 2 Cable Wiring Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Cash Drawer A Connector and Cable 10 1 1 Cash Drawer A Connector and Cable j Connector H Line i Cash Drawer A 4683 4684 4693 Description Connector 3A 1 Switch Pin 4 3A 2 Switch Pin 3 3A 3 Signal Pin 2 3A 4 36 V de Pin 1 AO Copyright IBM Corp 1993 10 1 1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Cash Drawer B Connector and Cable 10 1 2 Cash Drawer B Connector and Cable j Connector H Line i Cash Drawer B 4683 4684 4693 Description Connector 3B 1 Switch Pin 4 3B 2 Switch Pin 3 3B 3 Signal Pin 2
457. xtension Card Model 3 or 4 Printer Extension Card Model 3 or 4 Card Connector J109 Glossary Index Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You Copyright IBM Corp 1993 CONTENTS 4 Store Systems Technical Reference Notices FRONT_1 Notices References in this publication to IBM products programs or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM s product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any of IBM s intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product program or service Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products except those expressly designated by IBM is the user s responsibility IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to the IBM Director of Commercial Relations IBM Corporation Purchase NY 10577 Subtopics FRONT_1 1 Trademarks and Service Marks FRONT_1 2 Electronic Emission Notices FRONT_1 3 Laser Product Identification FRONT_1 4 Information about Translated Safety Notices Copyright IBM Corp 1993 FRONT_1 1 Store Systems Technical Reference Trademar
458. y planar POS register 05 verify card enable setup latch port 96h 4 4 06 verify CMOS shutdown byte 4 A l 07 verify 2K CMOS shutdown byte 4 A f 08 8237 DMA 0 initialization channel register test perform the following tests on DMA compatibility registers 1 y i i i i 1 write base target read base target extended read current target compatibility 1 1 l i i i EZRA write base transfer count read base transfer count extended read transfer count compatibility 1 i 1 i 1 i 3 page registers compat_targ test the compatibility base and current target address registers for the channel currently being tested compat_tc test the compatibility base and current transfer count registers for the channel currently being tested i compat_pagereg the page register for the channel currently being tested poses freee ese eee eS So ee ee ee ee tito a tt ee od 09 dma_setup mode set all DMA channels A OA storage refresh test A l f 0B 8042 interface test A Y OC reset 8042 4 4 OD write byte 0 of 8042 memory 4 4 O
459. ys special character keys or function keys used for entering information into the terminal and into the system keyed file Type of file composed of keyed records Each keyed record has two parts a key and data A key identifies and accesses each record in the file kilobit Kb One thousand binary digits kilobyte KB 1024 bytes for processor and data storage memory size otherwise 1000 bytes bt label Constant either numeric or literal that references a statement or function LAN Local area network LAN adapter The circuit card within a communicating device such as a personal computer that together with its associated software enables the device to be attached to a LAN LAN segment 1 Any portion of a LAN for example a single bus or ring that can operate independently but is connected to other parts of the establishment network by bridges 2 An entire ring or bus network without bridges See cable segment ring segment latency The time interval between the instant at which an instruction control unit initiates a call for data and the instant at which the actual transfer of data begins Synonymous with waiting time See also ring latency LED Light emitting diode light emitting diode LED A semiconductor chip that gives off visible or infrared light when activated line On a terminal one or more characters entered before a return to the first printing or display position lin
460. ystem unit or on top of a cash drawer to appear as an integrated terminal or located remotely up to 3 8m 12 ft away All of the point of sale devices except the cash drawer communicate with the system unit using a 2 wire RS 485 interface with the serial input output communication SIOC interface protocol Model 541 This model functions at the high end of the 4693 family It can function both as a store controller and as a point of sale terminal It can provide store controller support for other Model 541 terminals and for Model 421 terminals It provides power to attached I O devices and can provide point of sale support for one cable attached Model 202 Model 541 contains 486SLC2 processor Logic circuitry and the power supply An I O attachment panel tailgate for connecting point of sale devices Card sockets for installing four IBM PS 2 option adapters Video standard An optional diskette drive for 2 88 MB 3 1 2 inch diskettes Optional 80 160 or 250 MB 2 1 2 inch fixed disk drives Model 421 Similar to the Model 541 Model 421 functions as an intelligent point of sale terminal providing power to its own attached 1 0 devices and can provide point of sale support for one cable attached Model 202 terminal Model 421 contains 386SLC2 processor Logic circuitry and the power supply An I O attachment panel tailgate for connecting point of sale devices Card sockets for installing two IBM PS 2 option adapt

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

    Design House 560961 Instructions / Assembly    W IL L HA R W O O D  two position hepa air purifier with remote contorl    EX3200 および EX4200 イーサネット スイッチ  Operating Instructions  Manuel de configuration du Wi-Fi  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file